v60 Plugin Hybrid PDF

WEB EDITION
OWNER'S MANUAL
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we
pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been recommend that you familiarise yourself with the
designed for the safety and comfort of you and equipment, instructions and maintenance infor-
your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in mation contained in this owner's manual.
the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to
satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.

Table of contents
01 Introduction 02 Safety
Owner information.................................... 13 General information on seatbelts.............. 29 General information on child safety.......... 45
Reading the owner's manual.................... 13 Seatbelt - putting on................................. 30 Child seats................................................ 46
Digital owner's manual in the car.............. 16 Seatbelt - loosening.................................. 31 Child seats - location................................ 50
Recording data......................................... 18 Seatbelt - pregnancy................................ 31 Child seat - two-stage booster seat*........ 51
01 02 02
Accessories and extra equipment............ 18 Seatbelt reminder...................................... 32 Two-stage booster seat* - raising............. 52
Information on the Internet....................... 19 Seatbelt tensioner..................................... 32 Two-stage booster seat* - lowering.......... 53
Volvo ID..................................................... 19 Safety - warning symbol........................... 33 Child seat - ISOFIX................................... 54
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy..... 21 Airbag system........................................... 33 ISOFIX - size classes................................ 54
The owner's manual and the environ- Driver airbag.............................................. 34 ISOFIX - types of child seat...................... 56
ment.......................................................... 23 Passenger airbag...................................... 35 Child seats - upper mounting points........ 58
Laminated glass........................................ 23 Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat-
Plug-in hybrid - overview.......................... 24 ing*............................................................ 36
Plug-in hybrid - introduction..................... 26 Side airbag (SIPS)..................................... 38
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion..................................................... 39
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 39
General information on WHIPS (whiplash
protection)................................................. 40
WHIPS - child seats.................................. 41
WHIPS - seating position.......................... 41
When the systems deploy......................... 42
General information on safety mode......... 43
Safety mode - attempting to start the
car............................................................. 44
Safety mode - moving the car.................. 44
2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Table of contents
03 Instruments and controls

Instruments and controls, left-hand drive Heating* of the steering wheel.................. 88 Sunroof*.................................................. 109
car - overview........................................... 60 Light switches........................................... 88 Menu navigation - combined instrument
Instruments and controls, right-hand Position/parking lamps............................. 90 panel....................................................... 110
drive car - overview................................... 63 Menu overview - combined instrument
Daytime running lights.............................. 91
Combined instrument panel...................... 66 panel....................................................... 111
03 03 03
Tunnel detection*...................................... 92
Digital combined instrument panel - Messages................................................ 111
overview.................................................... 67 Main/dipped beam.................................... 92
Messages - handling............................... 112
Eco guide & Hybrid guide......................... 71 Active high beam*..................................... 93
MY CAR.................................................. 113
Combined instrument panel - meaning of Active Xenon headlamps*......................... 95
Trip computer......................................... 114
indicator symbols...................................... 72 Rear fog lamp........................................... 96
Trip computer - digital combined instru-
Combined instrument cluster - meaning Brake lights............................................... 97 ment panel.............................................. 115
of warning symbols................................... 73
Hazard warning flashers........................... 97 Trip computer - supplementary informa-
Outside temperature gauge...................... 75 tion.......................................................... 119
Direction indicators................................... 98
Trip meter.................................................. 75 Trip computer - trip statistics*................ 120
Interior lighting.......................................... 98
Clock......................................................... 76
Home safe light duration......................... 100
Licenses - combined instrument panel..... 76
Approach lighting.................................... 100
Symbols in the display.............................. 77
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pat-
Volvo Sensus............................................ 79 tern.......................................................... 100
Key positions............................................ 80 Wipers and washing................................ 101
Key positions - functions at different lev- Power windows....................................... 103
els.............................................................. 81
Door mirrors............................................ 105
Seats, front................................................ 82
Windows and rearview and door mirrors
Seats, front - electrically operated*.......... 83 - heating.................................................. 106
Seats, rear................................................. 85 Rearview mirror - interior........................ 107
Steering wheel.......................................... 87 Compass*............................................... 107
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

Table of contents
04 Climate control 05 Loading and storage

General information on climate control... 122 General information about precondition- Storage spaces....................................... 147
Actual temperature................................. 123 ing........................................................... 136 Tunnel console........................................ 149
Sensors - climate control........................ 123 Preconditioning - parking inside............. 137 Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
Air cleaning............................................. 123 Preconditioning - parking outside........... 137 ashtray*................................................... 149
04 04 05
Air cleaning - passenger compartment fil- Preconditioning - direct start.................. 138 Glovebox................................................. 149
ter............................................................ 124 Preconditioning - immediate stop........... 139 Inlay mats*.............................................. 150
Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Pack- Preconditioning - timer........................... 139 Vanity mirror............................................ 150
age (CZIP)*.............................................. 124 Timer - setting......................................... 140 Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets............... 150
Air cleaning - IAQS*................................ 125 Timer - starting........................................ 140 Loading................................................... 151
Air cleaning - material............................. 125 Timer - switching off............................... 141 Loading - long load................................. 152
Menu settings - climate control.............. 125 Preconditioning - messages................... 142 Roof load................................................. 153
Air distribution in the passenger com- General information about heaters......... 144 Load retaining eyelets............................. 153
partment.................................................. 126
Electrically-driven heater........................ 144 12 V electrical socket - cargo area*........ 153
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 128
Fuel-driven heater................................... 144 Safety net*............................................... 154
Heated front seats*................................. 129
Fuel-driven heater - auto mode/deactiva- Safety net* combined with cargo cover.. 155
Heated rear seat*.................................... 129 tion.......................................................... 145 Safety grille............................................. 156
Fan.......................................................... 130
Cargo cover............................................ 156
Auto-regulation....................................... 130
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment.......................................... 131
Air conditioning....................................... 131
Demisting and defrosting the wind-
screen..................................................... 132
Air distribution - recirculation.................. 132
Air distribution - table............................. 134

Table of contents
06 Locks and alarm

Remote control key................................. 159 Keyless drive* - interference to remote Type approval - remote control key sys-
Remote control key - losing ................... 159 control key function................................ 172 tem.......................................................... 184
Remote control key - personalisation*.... 160 Keyless drive* - locking........................... 172
Locking/unlocking - indicator................. 161 Keyless drive* - unlocking....................... 173
06 06 06
Lock indicator......................................... 161 Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key
blade ...................................................... 173
Immobiliser.............................................. 162
Keyless Drive* - lock settings................. 174
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system....................................... 162 Keyless Drive* - antenna location........... 174
Remote control key - functions............... 163 Locking/unlocking - from the outside..... 175
Remote control key - range.................... 164 Manual locking of the door..................... 175
Remote control key with PCC* - unique Locking/unlocking - from the inside....... 176
functions................................................. 165 Total airing function................................ 177
Remote control key with PCC* - range... 166 Locking/unlocking - glovebox................. 177
Detachable key blade............................. 166 Locking/unlocking - tailgate.................... 178
Detachable key blade - detaching/ Deadlocks*.............................................. 179
attaching................................................. 167 Child safety locks - manual activation.... 180
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors 167 Child safety locks - electrical activation* 181
Privacy locking*....................................... 168 Alarm....................................................... 181
Remote control key - replacing the bat- Alarm indicator........................................ 182
tery.......................................................... 169
Alarm - automatic re-arming................... 183
Keyless drive*.......................................... 170
Alarm - remote control key not working. 183
Keyless Drive* - remote control key
range....................................................... 171 Alarm signals........................................... 183
Keyless drive* - secure handling of the Reduced alarm level............................... 184
remote control key.................................. 171

Table of contents
07 Driver support
Electronic stability control (ESC) - gen- Adaptive cruise control* - overview........ 201 City Safety™ - laser sensor.................... 220
eral.......................................................... 186 Adaptive cruise control* - managing City Safety™ - symbols and messages.. 222
Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera- speed...................................................... 202 Collision warning system*....................... 223
tion.......................................................... 187 Adaptive cruise control* - set time inter- Collision warning system* - function...... 224
Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym- val............................................................ 203
07 07 07
bols and messages................................. 188 Collision warning system* - detection of
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary cyclists.................................................... 225
Road Sign Information (RSI)*.................. 190 deactivation, and standby mode............ 204
Collision warning system* - detection of
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation 190 Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking pedestrians............................................. 226
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations 192 another vehicle........................................ 205
Collision warning system* - operation.... 227
Speed limiter*.......................................... 193 Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate...... 205
Collision warning system* - limitations... 228
Speed limiter* - getting started............... 193 Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assis-
tance....................................................... 206 Collision warning system* - camera sen-
Speed limiter* - changing speed............. 194 sor limitations.......................................... 229
Radar sensor........................................... 207
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation Collision warning system* - symbols and
and standby mode.................................. 194 Radar sensor - limitations....................... 208 messages................................................ 231
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee- Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing Driver Alert System*................................ 233
ded.......................................................... 195 and action............................................... 210
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*...................... 233
Speed limiter* - deactivation................... 195 Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages................................................ 211 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation... 234
Cruise control*........................................ 196 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
Distance Warning*.................................. 213
Cruise control* - managing speed.......... 197 messages................................................ 235
Distance Warning* - limitations............... 214
Cruise control* temporary deactivation Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*............. 237
and standby mode.................................. 197 Distance Warning* - symbols and mes-
sages....................................................... 215 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - func-
Cruise control* - resume set speed........ 198 tion.......................................................... 237
City Safety™........................................... 216
Cruise control* - deactivate.................... 198 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera-
City Safety™ - function........................... 216 tion.......................................................... 238
Adaptive cruise control - ACC*............... 199
City Safety™ - operation........................ 217 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
Adaptive cruise control* - function......... 200
City Safety™ - limitations....................... 218 tions........................................................ 239

Table of contents
08 Starting and driving

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - sym- Alcolock*................................................. 256 Foot brake - emergency brake assis-
bols and messages................................. 240 Alcolock* - functions and operation........ 256 tance....................................................... 279
Park Assist*............................................. 242 Alcolock* - storage.................................. 257 Parking brake.......................................... 280
Park assist syst* - function..................... 242 Alcolock* - before starting the engine.... 257 Planning your driving.............................. 284
07 08 08
Park assist syst* - backward.................. 243 Alcolock* - to bear in mind..................... 259 Fording.................................................... 285
Park assist syst* - forward...................... 244 Alcolock* - symbols and text messages. 260 Overheating............................................. 285
Park assist syst* - fault indication........... 245 Starting the engine.................................. 261 Driving with open tailgate....................... 286
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors. 245 Switching off the engine......................... 262 Overload - starter battery........................ 286
Park assist camera*................................ 246 Steering lock........................................... 262 Before a long journey.............................. 287
Park assist camera - settings................. 248 Jump starting with battery...................... 263 Winter driving.......................................... 287
Park assist camera - limitations.............. 249 Drive systems.......................................... 264 Range for electric operation................... 288
BLIS*....................................................... 249 Drive system - drive modes.................... 265 Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing............. 288
BLIS* - operation.................................... 250 Energy flow............................................. 268 Fuel filler flap - manual opening.............. 289
CTA* ....................................................... 251 Drive system - symbols and messages.. 269 Filling up with fuel................................... 289
BLIS - symbols and messages............... 253 Gearboxes............................................... 271 Fuel - handling........................................ 290
Adjustable steering force*....................... 254 Gear shift indicator*................................ 271 Fuel - diesel............................................. 290
Type approval - radar system................. 254 Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic............ 272 Catalytic converters................................ 292
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 274 Diesel particle filter (DPF)........................ 293
Hill start assist (HSA)*............................. 275 Economical driving.................................. 294
All Wheel Drive - AWD............................ 275 Charging the hybrid battery.................... 294
Foot brake............................................... 276 Charging current..................................... 295
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system.... 279 Charging the hybrid battery - prepara-
tions........................................................ 296
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers......... 279 Charging cable with control unit............. 297

Table of contents
09 Wheels and tyres

Charging cable with control unit - status Tyres - direction of rotation.................... 315 TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
messages................................................ 300 Tyres - maintenance............................... 315 System)* - recommendations................. 331
Charging cable with control unit - tem- Tyres - tread wear indicators.................. 317 TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
perature monitoring................................ 301 System)* - driveable punctured tyres*.... 331
Wheel bolts............................................. 317
Charging cable with control unit - ground TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
08 09 09
fault breaker............................................ 301 Tools....................................................... 317 System)* - rectifying low tyre pressure... 332
Charging the hybrid battery - starting..... 302 Jack*....................................................... 318 Emergency puncture repair.................... 332
Charging the hybrid battery - ending...... 303 Winter tyres............................................. 319 Emergency puncture repair kit - location 333
Long-term storage - points to remember 304 Wheel and wheel rim dimensions........... 319 Emergency puncture repair kit - over-
Driving with a trailer................................ 305 Tyres - dimensions.................................. 320 view......................................................... 334
Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox 306 Tyres - load index................................... 320 Emergency puncture repair - operation.. 334
Towing bracket/Towbar.......................... 307 Tyres - speed ratings.............................. 321 Emergency puncture repair - rechecking 337
Detachable towbar - storage.................. 307 Changing wheels - removing wheels...... 321 Emergency puncture repair kit - inflating
the tyres.................................................. 338
Detachable towbar - specifications........ 307 Changing wheels - fitting........................ 324
Emergency puncture repair kit - sealant. 339
Detachable towbar - attachment/ Tyres - air pressure................................. 325
removal................................................... 308 Type approval - tyre pressure monitoring 340
Warning triangle...................................... 326
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA.................... 310 First aid kit*............................................. 327
Towing.................................................... 312 Tyre pressure monitoring*....................... 327
Towing eye.............................................. 312 TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
Recovery................................................. 313 System)* - general................................... 328
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System)* - adjusting (recalibration)......... 329
System)* - status..................................... 329
System)* - activate/deactivate................ 330

Table of contents
10 Maintenance and service

Volvo service programme....................... 347 Lamp replacement - number plate light- Rustproofing........................................... 390
Book service and repair*......................... 347 ing........................................................... 364 Cleaning the interior................................ 390
Raising the car........................................ 350 Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo Paint damage.......................................... 392
area......................................................... 364
Bonnet - opening and closing................. 352
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror light-
10 10 10
Engine compartment - overview............. 352 ing........................................................... 365
Engine compartment - checking............. 353 Lamps - specifications ........................... 365
Engine oil - general................................. 354 Wiper blades........................................... 366
Engine oil - checking and filling.............. 355 Washer fluid - filling................................ 368
Coolant - level......................................... 356 Starter battery - general.......................... 369
Brake and clutch fluid - level.................. 357 Battery - symbols.................................... 370
Power steering fluid - level...................... 358 Starter battery - replacement.................. 371
Climate control system - fault tracing and Hybrid battery......................................... 372
repair....................................................... 358
Electrical system..................................... 373
Lamp replacement.................................. 359
Fuses - general....................................... 373
Lamp replacement - headlamps............. 360
Fuses - in engine compartment.............. 375
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs................................. 361 Fuses - under glovebox.......................... 378
Lamp replacement - dipped beam......... 361 Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox................................................. 380
Lamp replacement - main beam............. 362
Fuses - in cargo area.............................. 382
Lamp replacement - extra main beam.... 362
Fuses - in the engine compartment's
Lamp replacement - direction indicators cold zone................................................ 386
front......................................................... 362
Car washing............................................ 388
Lamp replacement - rear lamp............... 363
Polishing and waxing.............................. 389
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps...................................................... 364 Water and dirt-repellent coating............. 390

Table of contents
11 Specifications 12 Alphabetical Index

Type designations................................... 395 Alphabetical Index.................................. 412
Dimensions............................................. 398
Weights................................................... 399
Towing capacity and towball load.......... 400
11 12
Engine specifications.............................. 401
Motor specifications - Electric drive
motor....................................................... 402
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions... 402
Engine oil - grade and volume................ 404
Coolant - grade and volume................... 405
Transmission fluid - grade and volume... 406
Brake fluid - grade and volume............... 407
Power steering fluid - grade.................... 407
Washer fluid - quality and volume.......... 407
Fuel tank - volume.................................. 408
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions... 409
Tyres - approved tyre pressures............. 410
Hybrid Battery - specification................. 411
Range - specification.............................. 411
10

Table of contents
11

INTRODUCTION

01 Introduction
Owner information Reading the owner's manual Owner's Manual in mobile devices 01
Your car is equipped with a screen where you A good way of getting to know your new car
can find information about how your car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before
works (applies to certain car models). For cars your first journey. This will give you the oppor-
with owner information in the screen, the prin- tunity to familiarise yourself with new func-
ted owner's manual is a supplement and con- tions, to see how best to handle the car in dif-
tains important text, the latest updates, as ferent situations, and to make the best use of
well as instructions that can be useful when, all the car's features. Please pay attention to
for practical reasons, you are unable to read the safety instructions contained in the man-
the information on the screen. ual.
Changing the screen's language may mean The specifications, design features and illus-
that certain information is no longer in trations in the owner's manual are not bind-
accordance with national or local laws and ing. We reserve the right to make modifica-
regulations. tions without prior notice.
NOTE
© Volvo Car Corporation
IMPORTANT The owner's manual is available for down-
load as a mobile application (applies for
The driver is always responsible that the IMPORTANT certain car models and mobile devices),
vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that see www.volvocars.com.
Do not remove this manual from the car -
applicable laws and regulations are fol- should a problem arise then the informa- The mobile application also includes video
lowed. It is also important that the car is tion required about where and how to seek and searchable content and easy naviga-
maintained and handled in accordance professional help would be missing. tion between different sections.
with Volvo's recommendations in the
owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the Options/accessories
information on the screen and in the prin- All types of option/accessory are marked with
ted manual then it is always the printed an asterisk*.
information that applies.
In addition to standard equipment, the
owner's manual also describes options (fac-
tory fitted equipment) and certain accessories
(retrofitted extra equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's
manual is not available in all cars - they have
}}

01 Introduction
||
01 different equipment depending on adapta- lighted in the owner's manual by means of Risk of property damage
tions for the needs of different markets and the text being slightly larger and printed in
national or local laws and regulations. grey. Examples of this are in menu texts and
message texts on the information display
In the event of uncertainty over what is stand-
(e.g. Audio settings).
ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer. Decals
Special texts The car contains different types of decal
which are designed to convey important
information in a simple and clear manner. The
WARNING decals in the car have the following descend-
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of ing degree of importance for the warning/
injury. information.
G031592
Warning for personal injury
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
damage.
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
NOTE which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
damage to property.
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facili-
tate the use of e.g. features and functions.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the
text that it refers to via a number. If the foot- G031590
note refers to text in a table then letters are

used instead of numbers for referral. Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field.
Message texts Used to indicate the presence of danger
There are displays in the car that show text which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
messages. These text messages are high- serious personal injury or fatality.
14

01 Introduction
Information When there is a series of illustrations for Related information 01

step-by-step instructions each step is Related information refers to other sections
numbered in the same way as the corres- containing related information.
ponding illustration.
Images
There are numbered lists with letters
The manual's images are sometimes sche-
adjacent to the series of illustrations
matic and may deviate from the car's appear-
where the order of the instructions is not
ance depending on equipment level and mar-
significant.
ket.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-
bered and are used to illustrate a move- To be continued
ment. }} This symbol is located furthest down to
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a the right when an article continues on the fol-
movement when the reciprocal order is of lowing page.
G031593
no relevance.
Continued from previous page
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- || This symbol is located furthest up to the
White ISO symbols and white text/image on step instructions then the different steps are left when an article continues from the previ-
black message field. numbered with normal numbers. ous page.
NOTE Position lists Related information

Red circles containing a number are used • The owner's manual and the environment
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in overview images where different com- (p. 23)
in the owner's manual should be exact ponents are pointed out. The number
replicas of those in the car. They are
recurs in the position list featured in con-
• Information on the Internet (p. 19)
included to show their approximate
appearance and location in the car. The nection with the illustration that describes
information that applies to your particular the item.
car is available on the respective decals
for your car. Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a Example:
certain sequence are numbered in the • Coolant
owner's manual.
• Engine oil
15

01 Introduction
01 Digital owner's manual in the car • Search - Search function for finding an Search
The owner's manual can be read on the article.
screen in the car1. The content is searchable • Categories - All articles sorted into cate-
and it is easy to navigate between different gories.
sections. • Favourites - Quick access to favourite-
bookmarked articles.
Open the digital owner's manual - press the
MY CAR button in the centre console, press • Quick Guide - A selection of articles for
OK/MENU and select Owner's manual. common functions.
Select the information symbol in the lower
For basic navigation, see Operating the sys-
right-hand corner in order to obtain informa-
tem. See below for a more detailed descrip-
tion about the digital owner's manual.
tion.
NOTE Searching using the daisy wheel.
The owner's manual is not available while Character list.
driving.
Changing the input mode (see following
table).
Use the daisy wheel to enter a search term,
e.g. "seatbelt".
1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
letter buttons on the control panel in the
centre console can also be used.
Owner's manual, start page. 2. Continue with the next letter and so on.
There are four options for finding information
in the owner's manual:
1 Applies to certain car models.
16

01 Introduction
3. To change the input mode to numbers or Categories Navigating in an article 01

special characters, or to perform a The articles in the owner's manual are struc-
search, turn TUNE to one of the options tured into main categories and subcategories.
(see explanation in the following table) in The same article can be in several appropri-
the list for changing the input mode (2), ate categories in order to be found more
press OK/MENU. easily.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the category tree
123/AB Change between letters and and press OK/MENU to open a category -
C numbers with OK/MENU.
selected - or article - selected . Press
MORE Change to special characters EXIT to go back to the previous view.
with OK/MENU.
Favourites
OK Perform the search. Turn TUNE Located here are the articles that are saved
to select a search result article, as favourites. To select an article as a favour- Home - leads to the start page for the
press OK/MENU to go to the ite, see the heading "Navigating in an article" owner's manual.
article. below. Favourite - adds/removes an article as a
Turn TUNE to navigate in the favourite list favourite. You can also press the FAV
a|A Changes between lowercase
and press OK/MENU to open an article. button in the centre console to add/
and uppercase letters with OK/
Press EXIT to go back to the previous view. remove an article as a favourite.
MENU.
Highlighted link - leads to linked article.
||} Changes from the text wheel to Quick Guide
the search field. Move the cur- Located here is a selection of articles for get- Special texts - if the article contains
sor with TUNE. Delete any misting to know the car's most common func- warnings, important or note texts then an
spelling with EXIT. To return to tions. The articles can also be accessed via associated symbol is shown here as well
the text wheel, press OK/ categories, but are collected here for quick as the number of such texts in the article.
MENU. access. Turn TUNE to navigate between the links or
Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide scroll in an article. When the screen has
Note that the digit and letter
and press OK/MENU to open an article. scrolled to the start/end of an article the
buttons on the control panel
Press EXIT to go back to the previous view. home and favourite options are accessed by
can be used for editing in the
scrolling a further step up/down. Press OK/
search field.
MENU to activate the selection/highlighted
link. Press EXIT to go back to the previous
view.
17

01 Introduction
01 Recording data for a certain length of time, but also as a Accessories and extra equipment
Certain information about the vehicle's opera- result of a collision or incident. This informa- The incorrect connection and installation of
tion and functionality, and any incidents, are tion may be stored by Volvo as long as it can accessories and extra equipment can nega-
recorded in the car. help to further develop and further enhance tively affect the car's electronic system.
safety and quality and as long as there are
Your vehicle contains a number of computers legal requirements and other regulations that Certain accessories only function when asso-
whose function is to continuously check and Volvo needs to consider. ciated software is installed in the car's com-
monitor the vehicle's operation and function- puter system. Volvo therefore recommends
Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-
ality. Some of the computers can record that you always contact an authorised Volvo
bed information being disclosed to third par-
information during normal driving if they workshop before installing accessories or
ties without the vehicle owner's consent.
detect an error. In addition, information is extra equipment which are connected to or
However, due to national legislation and reg-
recorded in the event of a collision or inci- affect the electrical system.
ulations Volvo may be required to disclose
dent. Parts of the recorded information are
such information to authorities such as police Heat-reflecting windscreen*
required so that technicians can diagnose
authorities, or others who may assert a legal
and rectify faults in the vehicle during servic-
right to have access to it.
ing and maintenance and so that Volvo can
fulfil legal requirements and other regulations. To be able to read and interpret the informa-
In addition to this, the information is used for tion recorded by the computers in the vehicle
research purposes by Volvo in order to con- requires special technical equipment that
tinually develop quality and safety, as the Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
information can contribute to a better under- agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
standing of the factors that cause accidents is responsible that the information, which is
and injuries. The information includes details transferred to Volvo during servicing and
of the status and functionality of various sys- maintenance, is stored and handled in a
tems and modules in the vehicle with regard secure manner and that the handling com-
to engine, throttle, steering and brake sys- plies with applicable legal requirements. For
tems, amongst other things. This information further information - contact a Volvo dealer. Areas where IR film is not applied.
may include details regarding the way the
driver drives the vehicle, such as vehicle Dimensions
speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
steering wheel movement and whether or not A 40 mm
the driver and passengers have used their
B 80 mm
seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa-
tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers

01 Introduction
The windscreen is equipped with a heat- Information on the Internet Volvo ID 01

reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat At www.volvocars.com there is further infor- Volvo ID is your personal ID that provides
radiation into the passenger compartment. mation concerning your car. access to various services2.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such With a personal Volvo ID it is possible to log in Examples of services:
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with to My Volvo web, which is a personal web
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and page for you and your car. • My Volvo - Your personal web page for
performance. you and your car.
For the optimal function of electronic equip- • In an Internet-connected car* - Certain
ment, it should be positioned on the part of functions and services require that you
the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film have registered your car to a personal
(see the highlighted area in the above illustra- Volvo ID, for example to be able to send a
tion). new address from a map service on the
Internet directly to the car.
QR code • Volvo On Call, VOC* - Volvo ID is used
A QR code reader is required to read the QR when logging in to the Volvo On Call
code, which is available as a supplemental mobile app.
program (app) for several mobile phones. The
QR code reader can be downloaded from e.g. NOTE
App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play. Old login accounts must be upgraded to
Volvo ID in order to continue using these
services.
Advantages of Volvo ID
• One user name and one password to
access online services, i.e. only one user-
name and one password to remember.
• When changing the username/password
for a service (e.g. VOC) it will also be
changed automatically for other services
(e.g. My Volvo)
2 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
}}

01 Introduction
||
01 Create a Volvo ID
To create a Volvo ID you need to enter your
personal e-mail address and follow the
instructions in the e-mail message received in
order to complete the registration. It is possi-
ble to create a Volvo ID via one of the follow-
ing services:
• My Volvo web - Enter your e-mail address
and follow the instructions.
• For an Internet-connected car* - Enter
your e-mail address in the app that
requires Volvo ID and follow the instruc-
tions. Alternatively, press the Connect
button in the centre console and
select Apps, SETUP and follow the
instructions.
• Volvo On Call, VOC* - Download the lat-
est version of the VOC app. Choose to
create a Volvo ID from the start page and
follow the instructions.
Related information
• Information on the Internet (p. 19)

01 Introduction
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy tured in one of the cleanest and most 01
Your Volvo complies with strict international resource-efficient plants in the world.
environmental standards and is also manufac-
G000000
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor- for our partners so that they work systemati- Efficient emission control
poration's core values which influence all cally with environmental issues. Your Volvo is manufactured following the
operations. We also believe that our custom- concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept
ers share our consideration for the environ- Fuel consumption that encompasses a clean interior environ-
ment. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consump- ment as well as highly efficient emission con-
tion in each of their respective classes. Lower trol. In many cases the exhaust emissions are
Your Volvo complies with strict international fuel consumption generally results in lower
environmental standards and is also manu- well below the applicable standards.
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon diox-
factured in one of the cleanest and most ide. Clean air in the passenger
resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel compartment
Car Corporation has global ISO certification,
consumption. For more information read A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
which includes the environmental standard
under the heading, Reducing environmental and pollen from entering the passenger com-
ISO 14001 covering all factories and several
impact. partment via the air intake.
of our other units. We also set requirements
}}
21

01 Introduction
||
01 A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* required to guarantee good environmental Following this advice can save money, the
(Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the care. planet's resources are saved, and the car's
incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traf- durability is extended. For more information
fic outside. Reducing environmental impact and further advice, see Eco guide (p. 71) ,
You can easily help reduce environmental Economical driving (p. 294) and Fuel con-
The system consists of an electronic sensor impact - here are a few tips: sumption (p. 409).
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
tored continuously and if there is an increase • Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
Recycling
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as the engine when stationary for longer
periods. Pay attention to local regula- As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
carbon monoxide then the air intake is important that the car is recycled in an envi-
closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy tions.
ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
traffic, queues and tunnels for example. • Drive economically - think ahead.
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level • Perform service and maintenance in is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the accordance with the owner's manual's referral to a certified/approved recycling
carbon filter. instructions - follow the intervals recom- facility.
mended in the Service and Warranty
Interior Booklet. Related information
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- • If the car is equipped with an engine • The owner's manual and the environment
sant and comfortable, even for people with block heater*, use it before starting from (p. 23)
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. cold - it improves starting capacity and
Extreme attention has been given to choosing reduces wear in cold weather and the
environmentally-compatible materials. engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature more quickly, which lowers con-
Volvo workshops and the environment sumption and reduces emissions.
Regular maintenance creates the conditions • High speed increases consumption con-
for a long service life and low fuel consump- siderably due to increased wind resis-
tion for your car. In this way you contribute to tance - a doubling of speed increases
a cleaner environment. When Volvo's work- wind resistance 4 times.
shops are entrusted with the service and
maintenance of your car it becomes part of
• Always dispose of environmentally hazar-
dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
our system. Volvo makes clear demands an environmentally safe manner. Consult
regarding the way in which our workshops a workshop in the event of uncertainty
are designed in order to prevent spills and about how this type of waste should be
discharges into the environment. Our work- discarded - an authorised Volvo work-
shop staff have the knowledge and the tools shop is recommended.

01 Introduction
The owner's manual and the Laminated glass 01

environment
The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual Laminated glass
comes from FSC® certified forests or other The glass is reinforced which pro-
controlled sources. vides better protection against
break-ins and improved sound insu-
The Forest Stewardship Council® symbol lation in the passenger compart-
shows that the paper pulp in a printed ment. The windscreen and other windows*
owner's manual comes from FSC® certified have laminated glass.
forests or other controlled sources.
Related information
• Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
(p. 21)

01 Introduction
01 Plug-in hybrid - overview

Overview of the V60 PLUG-IN HYBRID unique
functions.
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 294). Hybrid battery (p. 372).
24

01 Introduction
01
Electric motor (p. 264) with drive on the
rear wheels.
Drive modes (p. 265).
Combined instrument panel (p. 67) with
unique information for the plug-in hybrid.
Related information
• Plug-in hybrid - introduction (p. 26)
25

01 Introduction
01 Plug-in hybrid - introduction Driving the car Battery capacity is reduced considerably if
The car is driven as a completely normal car. The car is driven as a completely normal car. the battery is too cold or too hot. Precondi-
The electric motor drives the car mostly at low The electric motor drives the car mostly at tioning prepares the car's drive systems and
speeds, the diesel engine at higher speeds, as low speeds, the diesel engine at higher the passenger compartment before departure
well as during more active driving. speeds, as well as during more active driving. so that both wear and energy needs during
Read more about Economical driving the journey are reduced. Read more about
Important to know (p. 294). General information about preconditioning
(p. 136).
WARNING Drive modes
It is possible to set the car in different drive Charging the hybrid battery
Remember that the car does not emit any modes while driving, e.g. electric operation
engine noise when it is only powered by
the electric motor and may therefore be
only or, when power is required, both electric IMPORTANT
difficult to notice by children, pedestrians, motor and diesel engine. The car calculates
Never connect the charging cable when
cyclists and animals. This applies in partic- an optimal combination of driveability, driving there is a risk of lightning.
ular at low speeds, such as in car parks. experience, environmental impact and fuel
economy according to the drive mode
selected. Read more about Drive system - The hybrid battery is the Lithium-ion type and
High-voltage current can be recharged in different ways. A charg-
drive modes (p. 265).
Several components in the ing cable with control unit can be connected
car work with high-voltage Combined instrument panel between the car and a 230V AC socket, see
current that could be danger- Two fields in the combined instrument panel Charging cable with control unit (p. 297).
ous in the event of incorrect show unique information for the V60 PLUG-IN Charging time depends on charging current
intervention. Do not touch HYBRID; hybrid battery gauge (current energy (p. 295).
anything that is not clearly level), active drive mode, symbol that is illumi- The electric motor is used as an engine brake
described in the owner's nated when the diesel engine is operating, during light braking and the car's kinetic
manual. Read more about the engine com- Hybrid Guide as well as energy recovery. energy is converted to electrical energy which
partment (p. 352). Read more about the combined instrument is used to charge the hybrid battery. Read
panel (p. 67). more about recycling the brake force energy
WARNING Preconditioning (p. 276).
Orange-coloured cables must only be han- In order that the car should have optimal In addition, the diesel engine can charge the
dled by qualified personnel. function it is important that the hybrid battery electric motor's hybrid battery with a special
with associated electrical drive systems, as high-voltage generator when the need arises,
well as the diesel engine and its drive sys- see drive system and drive modes (p. 265).
tems, have the correct operating temperature.
26

01 Introduction
Related information 01
• Plug-in hybrid - overview (p. 24)
27

SAFETY

02 Safety
General information on seatbelts Remember Related information

Heavy braking can have serious consequen- • Do not use clips or anything else that can • Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 31)
ces if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly. • Seatbelt - loosening (p. 31)
all passengers are using their seatbelts during • The seatbelt must not be twisted or • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 32)
the journey. caught on anything. 02
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a
seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,
this may diminish the protection provided
by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-
son.
Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the WARNING
diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-
over the abdomen). self. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo workshop.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
the body so it can provide maximum protec-
load, such as in conjunction with a colli-
tion. Do not lean the backrest too far back. sion, the entire seatbelt must be replaced.
The seatbelt is designed to protect in a nor- Some of the protective characteristics of
mal seating position. the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it
appears to be undamaged. In addition,
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas-
replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or
ten their (p. 30) seatbelt by means of an damaged. The new seatbelt must be type-
audio and visual reminder (p. 32). approved and intended for installation in
the same position as the replaced seatbelt.
29

02 Safety
Seatbelt - putting on Remember

Put on the seatbelt (p. 29) before driving The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
starts. • if it is pulled out too quickly
02 Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by • during braking and acceleration
pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt • if the car leans heavily.
buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt
has locked. Related information
• Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 31)
• Seatbelt - loosening (p. 31)
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 32)
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on

• Seatbelt reminder (p. 32)
the shoulder.
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and

move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high
as possible without it chafing against your throat.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the
rear seat1.
1 Certain markets.
30

02 Safety
Seatbelt - loosening Seatbelt - pregnancy The aim should be to position the seat with as
Loosen the seatbelt (p. 29) when the car is Seatbelt (p. 29) must always be worn during large a distance as possible between abdo-
stationary. pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in men and steering wheel.
the correct way.
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle Related information 02
and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt • Seatbelt - putting on (p. 30)
does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so • Seatbelt - loosening (p. 31)
that it does not hang loose.
Related information
• Seatbelt - putting on (p. 30)
• Seatbelt reminder (p. 32)
G020998
The diagonal section should wrap over the

shoulder then be routed between the breasts
and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and
ensure that it fits as close to the body as pos-
sible. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant dri-
vers must adjust the seat (p. 82) and steer-
ing wheel (p. 87) such that they can easily
maintain control of the vehicle as they drive
(which means that they must be able to easily
operate the foot pedals and steering wheel).
31

02 Safety
Seatbelt reminder automatically after approximately 30 sec- Seatbelt tensioner

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas- onds driving or after pressing the indica- All the seatbelts (p. 29) are equipped with belt
ten their (p. 30) seatbelt by means of an audio tor stalk OK button (p. 110). If anyone is tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten-
and visual reminder. unbelted then the message can only be sioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a
02 acknowledged manually by pressing the
sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then
indicator stalk OK button.
provides more effective restraint for the occu-
• Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- pants.
belts is unfastened during travel. This
warning takes the form of a message in WARNING
the combined instrument panel along with
the audio/visual signal. The warning stops Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's
also be acknowledged manually by side. Always insert the tongue of the seat-
belt into the buckle on the correct side. Do
pressing the OK button.
not make any damages on seatbelts nor
The combined instrument panel's information insert any foreign objects into a buckle.
G017726
display shows which seatbelts are in use. The seatbelts and buckles would then
This information is always available. possibly not function as intended in the
event of a collision. There is a risk of
The audio reminder is speed dependent, and Certain markets serous injury.
in some cases time dependent. The visual An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind
reminder is located in the roof console and in the driver and front seat passenger to use a
the combined instrument panel (p. 66). seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt At low speed, the audible reminder will sound
reminder system. for the first 6 seconds.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
• Provides information on which seatbelts
(p. 29) are being used in the rear seat. A
message appears in the combined instru-
ment panel when the seatbelts are in use,
or if one of the rear doors has been
opened. The message is acknowledged
32

02 Safety
Safety - warning symbol WARNING Airbag system

The warning symbol is shown if a fault is In the event of a frontal collision the airbag
If the warning symbol for the airbag sys-
detected during fault tracing or if a system tem remains illuminated or illuminates system helps to protect the head, face and
has been activated. Where required, the while driving, it means that the airbag sys- chest of the driver and passenger.
warning symbol is shown together with a tem does not have full functionality. The 02
message in the combined instrument panel symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt ten-
(p. 66) information display. sioner system, SIPS, the IC system or
some other fault in the system. Volvo rec-
ommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warn-

ing triangle illuminates and SRS airbag
Service required or SRS airbag Service
urgent appears in the display. Volvo recom-
G018665
mends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop immediately.
Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-
Related information drive car.
• General information on safety mode
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air- (p. 43)
bag system (p. 33) in the combined instrument
panel.
The warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel illuminates when the remote con-
trol key is in key position II (p. 81). The sym-
bol is extinguished after approx. 6 seconds
provided the airbag system is fault-free.
G018666
Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-
drive car.
}}
33

02 Safety
||
The system consists of airbags and sensors. • Safety - warning symbol (p. 33) Driver airbag
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors To supplement the protection afforded by the
and the airbag(s) are inflated and become seatbelt (p. 29) the car is equipped on the
hot. The airbag cushions the initial collision driver's side with an airbag (p. 33).
02 impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates
when compressed by the collision. When this This airbag is fitted into the centre of the
occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
completely normal. The entire process, AIRBAG.
including inflation and deflation of the airbag,
occurs within tenths of a second. WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
WARNING belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
Volvo recommends that you contact an may diminish the protection provided by
authorised Volvo workshop for repair. the airbag in the event of a collision.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious Related information
personal injury.
• Passenger airbag (p. 35)
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending
on the nature of the collision and whether
or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies
to all belt positions.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-
sion. The detectors sense the force of the
collision on the vehicle and the action is
adapted accordingly so that one or more
airbags are deployed.
Related information
• Driver airbag (p. 34)
34

02 Safety
Passenger airbag
To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 29) on the passenger side, the car
is equipped with an airbag (p. 33).
02
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is
marked AIRBAG.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- Alternative 2: Position of airbag label on passen-
hand drive car. ger side door pillar. The label becomes visible
when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
fitted in one of the following two locations in
the car:
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a
seat protected by an activated airbag. Fail-
ure to follow this advice can lead to death
or serious injury to the child.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-
hand drive car.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
Alternative 1: Position of airbag label on passen- possible with their feet on the floor and
ger side sun visor. backs against the backrest. Seatbelts
must be secured.
}}
35

02 Safety
||
WARNING Passenger airbag - activating/ never children in a child seat or on a
deactivating* booster cushion.
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is Front passenger airbag (p. 35) can be deacti- The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
located. vated if the car is equipped with a switch, in this position, children in a child seat or
02 PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
WARNING Switch - PACOS than 140 cm.
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the air- is located on the passenger end of the instru- WARNING
bag is activated. ment panel and is accessible when the pas-
senger door is open. Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat. Check that the switch is in the required posi- Never place a child in a child seat or on a
tion. The remote control key's key blade booster cushion on the front passenger
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever seat when the airbag is activated. This
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (p. 167) should be used to change position. applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
is activated.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life. No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat when the air-
bag is deactivated.
Switch - PACOS*
The front passenger airbag can be deacti- can endanger life.
vated (p. 36) if the car is equipped with a
switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch). NOTE
WARNING When the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 81) the warning symbol
If the car is equipped with a front passen- (p. 33) for the airbag is shown in the com-
ger airbag, but does not have a PACOS Location of airbag switch. bined instrument panel for
switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), The airbag is activated. With the switch in approx. 6 seconds.
then the airbag will always be activated. this position, persons taller than 140 cm Following which, the indicator in the roof
can sit in the front passenger seat, but console is illuminated showing the correct
Related information status for the front passenger seat airbag.
• Child seats (p. 46)

02 Safety
WARNING
can endanger the lives of passengers in
2
the car.
02
Related information
• Child seats (p. 46)
2
G017800
G017724
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated. deactivated.
A warning symbol in the roof console indi- A text message and a symbol in the roof con-
cates that the airbag for the front passenger sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas-
seat is activated (see preceding illustration). senger seat is deactivated (see preceding
illustration).
WARNING
WARNING
booster cushion in the front seat if the air- Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-
bag is activated and the symbol in senger seat if the message in the roof con-
the roof console is illuminated. Failure to sole indicates that the airbag is deacti-
follow this advice could endanger the life vated, and if the warning symbol(p. 33) for
of the child. the airbag system is also displayed on the
combined instrument panel. This indicates
that there has been a severe malfunction.
Visit a workshop as soon as possible.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
37

02 Safety
Side airbag (SIPS) WARNING

In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
• Volvo recommends that repairs are
only carried out by an authorised Volvo
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, workshop. Defective work in the SIPS-
02 pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural bag system could cause malfunction
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- and result in serious personal injury.
er's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important • Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
part of the SIPS.
panel, since this area is required by
the side airbag.
• Volvo recommends the use only of car
Driver's seat, left-hand drive. seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
• Side airbags are a supplement the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
G032949
The SIPS bag system consists of two main

• Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion (p. 39)
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat's • Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 39)
backrests. Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact.
The airbag deflates when compressed by the
collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
38

02 Safety
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster Inflatable Curtain (IC) WARNING

cushion The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
The protection provided by the car to children driver and passengers from striking their handles in the roof. The hook is only
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion heads on the inside of the car during a colli- designed for light clothing (not for solid
is not diminished by the side airbag (p. 38). sion. objects such as umbrellas for example). 02
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 46) can be Do not screw or install anything onto the
placed on the front passenger seat provided car's headlining, door pillars or side pan-
els. This could compromise the intended
that the car does not have an activated airbag protection. Volvo recommends that you
(p. 36) on the front passenger side. only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
Related information
• General information on child safety WARNING
(p. 45) Do not load the car higher than 50 mm
under the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
Inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part
of the SIPS system (p. 38) and the airbag sys-
tem (p. 33). It is fitted in the headlining along WARNING
both sides of the roof and protects the car's The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
occupants sitting in the outer seats. A suffi- the seatbelts.
ciently violent collision trips the sensors and Always use a seatbelt.
the inflatable curtain is inflated.
Related information
• General information on seatbelts (p. 29)
39

02 Safety
General information on WHIPS WARNING

(whiplash protection)
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a pro- seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
tection against whiplash injuries. The system
02 consists of energy absorbing backrests and
specially designed head restraints in the front Seat properties
seats. When the WHIPS system is deployed, the
front seat backrests are lowered backward to
change the seating position of the driver and
front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of
whiplash injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Related information
• WHIPS - child seats (p. 41)
• WHIPS - seating position (p. 41)
• General information on seatbelts (p. 29)
The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end

collision, where the angle and speed of the
collision, and the nature of the colliding vehi-
cle all have an influence.
40

02 Safety
WHIPS - child seats WHIPS - seating position WARNING

The protection provided by the car to children For optimum protection from the WHIPS sys-
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion tem (p. 40) the driver and passenger must rear seat cushion and the front seat's
is not diminished by the WHIPS system have the correct seating position and make backrest. Make sure you do not to
(p. 40). sure that the system's function is not obstruc- obstruct the function of the WHIPS sys- 02
ted. tem.
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 46) can be
placed on the front passenger seat provided Seating position
that the car does not have an activated airbag Set the correct seating position in the front
(p. 36) on the front passenger side. seat (p. 82) before driving starts.
Related information Driver and front seat passenger should sit in
• General information on child safety the centre of the seat with as little space as
(p. 45) possible between the head and the head
restraint.
Function
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may

prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not make contact
with the folded backrest.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
}}
41

02 Safety
WARNING When the systems deploy System Triggered

In the event of a collision Volvo's different
If a seat has been subjected to extreme Inflatable Curtain In the event of a
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, personal safety systems work together in
the WHIPS system must be checked. order to minimise injury. IC (p. 39) side impact and/or
02 Volvo recommends that it is checked by overturning and/or
an authorised Volvo workshop. System Triggered some frontal colli-
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
sionsA
Seatbelt ten- In the event of a
capacity may have been lost even if the Whiplash protection In a rear-end colli-
seat appears to be undamaged. sioner (p. 32) front frontal collision,
seat and/or side-impact WHIPS (p. 40) sion
Volvo recommends that you contact an collision, and/or
authorised Volvo workshop to have the A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a
rear-end collision collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors
system checked even after a minor rear- such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed
end collision. and/or overturning of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the
different safety systems of the car are activated.
Seatbelt tensioner, In a frontal collision
rear seat and/or side-impact If the airbags (p. 33) have deployed, the fol-
accident and/or lowing is recommended:
overturning
• Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
Airbags In a frontal colli- that you have it conveyed to an author-
ised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
(Steering sionA
deployed airbags.
wheel(p. 34) and
• Volvo recommends that you engage an
passenger airbag authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
(p. 35)) replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
Side airbags In a side-impact
(SIPS) (p. 38) accidentA • Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are
deployed only once during a collision.
42

02 Safety
WARNING General information on safety mode WARNING

Safety mode is a protective state that is
The airbag system's control module is Never attempt to repair your car or reset
located in the centre console. If the centre enforced when the collision may have dam- the electronics yourself if the car has been
console is drenched with water or other aged any of the car's vital functions, such as in safety mode. This could result in per-
liquid, disconnect the cables to the starter the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety sonal injury or the car not functioning as 02
battery. Do not attempt to start the car systems, or the brake system. normal. Volvo recommends that you
since the airbags may deploy. Recovering engage an authorised Volvo workshop to
the car. Volvo recommends that you have check and restore the car to normal status
it conveyed to an authorised Volvo work- after Safety mode See manual has been
shop. displayed.
WARNING Related information

• Safety mode - attempting to start the car
Never drive with deployed airbags. They (p. 44)
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The • Safety mode - moving the car (p. 44)
smoke and dust created when the airbags
are deployed can cause skin and eye irrita-
tion/injury after intensive exposure. In case
of irritation, wash with cold water. The
rapid deployment sequence and airbag Warning triangle in the combined instrument
fabric may cause friction and skin burns. panel.
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
Safety mode See manual may appear in the
combined instrument panel (p. 66) informa-
tion display. This means that the car has
reduced functionality.
43

02 Safety
Safety mode - attempting to start the WARNING Safety mode - moving the car
car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
If the car is set in safety mode (p. 43) then an to restart the car if it smells of fuel when See manual has been reset after attempting
attempt to start the car can be made if every- the Safety mode See manual message to start the car (p. 44) , the car can be moved
02 thing seems normal and the absence of fuel is displayed. Leave the car at once. carefully out of a dangerous position.
leakage has been checked.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the WARNING
car. There must be no smell of fuel either. Related information
If the car is in safety mode it must not be • General information on safety mode
If everything seems normal and you have towed. It must be transported from its (p. 43)
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you location. Volvo recommends that it is
may attempt to start the car. transported to an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to
Related information
the effect that the ignition is on, press the
start button. Then close the door and reinsert
• Safety mode - moving the car (p. 44)
the remote control key. The car's electronics
will now try to reset themselves to normal
mode. Then try to start the car.
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display then the car must
not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery
service (p. 313) used instead. Even if the car
appears to be driveable, hidden damage may
make the car impossible to control once mov-
ing.
44

02 Safety
General information on child safety NOTE

Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
In the event of questions when fitting child
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a safety products, contact the manufacturer
child to sit on the knee of a passenger. for clearer instructions.
02
Volvo recommends that children travel in
rear-facing child seats until as late an age as Child safety locks
possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and The rear doors and rear door windows* can
then front-facing booster cushions/child seats be blocked manually (p. 180) or electronically
until up to 10 years of age. (p. 181)* from opening from the inside.
The position of a child in the car and the Related information
choice of equipment are dictated by the • Child seats - location (p. 50)
child's weight and size; see Child seats
(p. 46). • Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 54)
• Child seats - upper mounting points
NOTE (p. 58)
Regulations regarding the placement of

children in cars vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,

booster cushions & attachment devices)
which is designed for your particular car.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment pro-
vides you with optimum conditions for your
child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore,
the child safety equipment fits and is easy to
use.

02 Safety
Child seats NOTE

Children should sit comfortably and safely.
When using child safety products it is
Make sure that the child seat is being used important to read the installation instruc-
correctly. tions included.
02
WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat
to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,
springs or the rails and beams under the
seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the

child seat for the correct fitting.
G020739
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
46

02 Safety
Recommended child seats2

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0 Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing
child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system. 02
max 10 kg
Type approval: E1 04301146
Group 0+
(L)
max 13 kg
Group 0 Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear- Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant
facing child seat, secured with the car's child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
max 10 kg
seatbelt. secured with the car's seatbelt.
Group 0+ Type approval: E1 04301146 Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
max 13 kg (U) (U)
Group 0 Child seats which are universally approved. Child seats which are universally approved. Child seats which are univer-
sally approved.
max 10 kg (U) (U)
(U)
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Group 1 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
9-18 kg
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
straps.
(L)
(L)
2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
}}
47

02 Safety
||
Group 1 Child seats which are universally approved. Child seats which are universally approved. Child seats which are univer-
sally approved.
9-18 kg (U) (U)
02
(U)
Group 2 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
15-25 kg
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
straps.
(L)
(L)
Group 2 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Volvo rear-facing/turnable child
Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, seat (Volvo Convertible Child
15-25 kg
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. secured with the car's seatbelt. Seat) - front-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191 Type approval: E5 04191
(U) (U)
(U)
Group 2/3 Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Volvo booster seat with back-
Booster Seat with backrest). Seat with backrest). rest (Volvo Booster Seat with
15-36 kg
backrest).
(UF) (UF)
(UF)
Group 2/3 Booster cushion with and without backrest Booster cushion with and without backrest Booster cushion with and with-
(Booster Cushion with and without (Booster Cushion with and without backrest). out backrest (Booster Cushion
15-36 kg
backrest). with and without backrest).
(UF)
(UF) (UF)
48

02 Safety
Group 2/3 Integrated booster cushion (Integrated Booster
Cushion) - available as a factory fitted option.
15-36 kg
02
(B)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
Related information
• Child seats - location (p. 50)
• Child seats - upper mounting points
(p. 58)
• Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 54)
• General information on child safety (p. 45)
49

02 Safety
Child seats - location WARNING

Always fit child seats/booster cushions (p. 46)
in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is acti- booster cushion in the front seat if the air-
vated (p. 36). If a child is sitting on the front bag is activated.
02 passenger seat then he/she could suffer seri-
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
ous injury if the airbag deploys.
of the front passenger seat.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
fitted in one of the following two locations in sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
the car: is activated.
can endanger life.
Alternative 2: Position of airbag label on passen-
ger side door pillar. The label becomes visible
when the passenger door is opened. WARNING
You may place: Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could
• a child seat/booster cushion on the front rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening but-
passenger seat provided there is no acti- ton must not be used, as they could cause
vated airbag on the front passenger side. the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
• one or more child seats/booster cushions Do not allow the upper section of the child
in the rear seat. seat to rest against the windscreen.
Alternative 1: Position of airbag label on passen- WARNING

ger side sun visor. Related information
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a
seat protected by an activated airbag. Fail- • General information on child safety (p. 45)
ure to follow this advice can lead to death • Child seats - upper mounting points
or serious injury to the child. (p. 58)
• Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 54)
50

02 Safety
Child seat - two-stage booster seat* WARNING

The integrated booster seats in the rear seat
Volvo recommends that repair or replace-
allow children to sit comfortably and safely. ment is only carried out by an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifi-
The booster cushions are specially designed 02
cations or additions to the booster cush-
to provide optimum safety. In combination ion. If an integrated booster cushion has
with the seatbelt (p. 29) they are approved for been subjected to a major load, such as in
children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg conjunction with a collision, the entire
and who are at least 95 cm in height. booster cushion must be replaced. Even if
the booster cushion appears to be undam-
aged, it may not afford the same level of
protection. The booster cushion must also
be replaced if it is heavily worn.
Incorrect position, the head restraint must be
adjusted as high as the head and the seatbelt
must not be below the shoulder. WARNING
Check before driving that: If the instructions for the two-stage
• the integrated two-stage booster seat is booster seat are not followed then the
correctly set in accordance with the table child could sustain serious injury in the
(p. 52) and in locked position event of an accident.
• the seatbelt is in contact with the child's

body and is not slack or twisted
Correct position, the seatbelt should be posi-
tioned in on the shoulder. • the seatbelt does not lie across the
child's throat or below the shoulder (see
preceding illustrations)
• the lap section of the seatbelt is posi-
tioned low over the pelvis to provide opti-
mal protection.
Adjusting the booster seat's two levels is per-
formed by raising (p. 52) and lowering
(p. 53).

02 Safety
Two-stage booster seat* - raising Stage 24

The integrated booster seat (p. 51) in the rear
seat can be folded up into two stages. How
many stages the cushion should be folded up
02 depends on the child's weight.
Stage 1 Stage 2
Weight 22-36 kg 15-25 kg
Stage 13
Press the booster cushion backwards to

lock. Start from the lower stage. Press the but-
ton.
Pull the handle forward and up in order to

release the booster cushion.
3 Lower stage.
4 Upper stage.

02 Safety
Two-stage booster seat* - lowering

The integrated booster seat (p. 51) in the rear
seat can be folded down from the upper or
lower stage to fully lowered position in the
seat cushion. However, it is not possible to 02
adjust the booster cushion from the upper
stage to the lower stage.
Lift the booster cushion up at the front Press down with your hand in the centre
edge and press it back against the back- of the cushion in order to lock it.
rest to lock.
IMPORTANT
NOTE Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
It is not possible to adjust the booster seat toys) left behind in the space under the
from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be cushion before lowering.
reset by being fully folded down (p. 53)
into the seat cushion. Pull the handle forwards to release the
cushion. NOTE
Related information When folding the rear backrest the booster
• Two-stage booster seat* - lowering seat must first be lowered.
(p. 53)
Related information
• Two-stage booster seat* - raising (p. 52)

02 Safety
Child seat - ISOFIX • General information on child safety (p. 45) ISOFIX - size classes
ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats There is a size classification for child seats
(p. 46) that is based on an international stand- using the ISOFIX (p. 54) fixture system in
ard. order to assist users in choosing the correct
02 type of child seat (p. 56).
Size Description
class
A Full size, front-facing child
seat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-

facing child seat
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-fac-

ing child seat
C Full size, rear-facing child seat

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the D Reduced size, rear-facing
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats. child seat
The location of the mounting points is indi-
E Rear-facing infant seat
cated by symbols in the backrest upholstery
(see preceding illustration). F Transverse infant seat, left-
Press the seat cushion down to access the hand
mounting points. G Transverse infant seat, right-
Always follow the manufacturer's installation hand
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Related information
• ISOFIX - size classes (p. 54)
• ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 56)
54

02 Safety
WARNING
Never place the child in the passenger
seat if the car is fitted with an activated air-
bag.
02
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-
cation, the car model must be included on
the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-
tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
55

02 Safety
ISOFIX - types of child seat seats are suitable for all seats in all car mod-
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in els.
different sizes. This means that not all child
02 Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK

(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK

(IL)
D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK

(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
56

02 Safety
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKA 02
(IUF)
B1 X OKA
(IUF)
A X OKA
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal catego-
ries.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Make sure you select the right size class

(p. 54) of child seat with ISOFIX (p. 54) fixture
system.
57

02 Safety
Child seats - upper mounting points NOTE

The car is equipped with upper mounting
In cars with a cargo cover over the lug-
points for certain front-facing child seats gage compartment, this must be removed
(p. 46). These mounting points are located on before child seats can be attached to the
02 the rear of the seat. securing points.
For detailed information on how the child seat

should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
drawn through the hole in the head
restraint leg before they are tensioned at
the attachment point.
The upper mounting points are primarily Related information

intended for use with front-facing child seats. • General information on child safety (p. 45)
Volvo recommends that small children should • Child seats - location (p. 50)
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age • Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 54)
as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facili-
tate fitting this type of child seat in cars
with folding head restraints on the outer
seats.
58

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instruments and controls, left-hand

drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
03
60

Overview, left-hand drive cars
03
}}
61

||
Function See Function See Function See
Menus and mes- (p. 110), Control panel (p. 176), Seat adjustment* (p. 83).
sages, direction (p. 112), (p. 181),
indicators, main/ (p. 98), (p. 103) and Headlamp control, (p. 88),
dipped beam, trip (p. 92) and (p. 105). opener for fuel filler (p. 288) and
computer (p. 119). flap and tailgate (p. 178).
Hazard warning (p. 97).
Cruise control* (p. 196) and flashers Related information
03 (p. 199).
Control panel for (p. 113) and • Outside temperature gauge (p. 75)
Horn, airbags (p. 87) and infotainment system the Sensus • Trip meter (p. 75)
(p. 33). and menu naviga- Infotainment • Clock (p. 76)
tion supplement.
Combined instru- (p. 66).
ment panel Control panel for (p. 128).
climate control
Menu navigation, (p. 113) and
audio control, the Sensus Gear selector (p. 272).
phone control* Infotainment
supplement. Controls for drive (p. 265).
modes
START/STOP (p. 261).
ENGINE button Wipers and washing (p. 101).
Ignition switch (p. 80). Steering wheel (p. 87).

adjustment
Screen for infotain- (p. 113) and
ment system and the Sensus Bonnet opener (p. 352).
display of menus Infotainment
supplement. Parking brake (p. 280).
Door handle –

Instruments and controls, right-hand

drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
03
}}
63

||
Overview, right-hand drive cars
03
64

Function See Function See Related information

• Outside temperature gauge (p. 75)
Screen for infotain- (p. 113) and Headlamp control, (p. 88), • Trip meter (p. 75)
ment system and the Sensus opener for fuel filler (p. 288) and
display of menus Infotainment flap and tailgate (p. 178). • Clock (p. 76)
supplement.
Seat adjustment* (p. 83).
Ignition switch (p. 80).
Parking brake (p. 280).
START/STOP (p. 261). 03
ENGINE button Steering wheel (p. 87).
adjustment
Cruise control* (p. 196) and
(p. 199). Menus and mes- (p. 110),
sages, direction (p. 112),
Combined instru- (p. 66). indicators, main/ (p. 98),
ment panel dipped beam, trip (p. 92) and
computer (p. 119).
Horn, airbags (p. 87) and
(p. 33). Gear selector (p. 272).
Menu navigation, (p. 113) and Controls for drive (p. 265).
audio control, the Sensus modes
phone control* Infotainment
supplement. Control panel for (p. 128).
climate control
Wipers and washing (p. 101).
Control panel for (p. 113) and
Door handle – infotainment system the Sensus
and menu naviga- Infotainment
Control panel (p. 176), tion supplement.
(p. 181),
(p. 103) and Hazard warning (p. 97).
(p. 105). flashers
Bonnet opener (p. 352).

Combined instrument panel

The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, as well as messages.
• Digital combined instrument panel - over-

view (p. 67)
• Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 72)
03
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 73)
66

Digital combined instrument panel - car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
overview computer, as well as messages. The informa-
The combined instrument panel's information tion is shown with symbols and text.
display shows information on some of the
03
The instrument shows information according to the selections made, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 110).
Hybrid battery gauge mation, Eco guide & Hybrid guide
(p. 71).
Current energy level
Active drive mode
The symbol illuminates when the diesel

engine is operating.
Hybrid guide (Driver Support Power
Meter). Shows the current driver-reques-
ted propulsion power and available elec-
tric motor power, i.e. the limit when the
diesel engine starts/stops. For more infor-
}}
67

||
Energy recovery The combined instrument panel's information The choice of theme and setting of contrast
display shows information on some of the mode and colour mode can be stored for
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip each remote control key in the car key mem-
computer, as well as messages. The informa- ory*, see Remote control key - personalisa-
tion is shown with symbols and text. There tion* (p. 160).
are further descriptions under the functions
that use the display.
Gauges and indicators

03 Alternative themes can be selected for the
combined instrument panel. Possible themes
are "Hybrid", "Elegance", "Eco" and
"Performance".
When the electric motor generates power A theme can only be selected when the
for the hybrid battery, bubbles are shown engine is running.
in the hybrid battery gauge - see Foot To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk
brake (p. 276). switch's OK button and select the Themes
menu option by turning the thumbwheel on Gauges and indicators, theme "Hybrid".
Information display the lever. Press the OK button. Turn the Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
thumbwheel to select the theme and confirm only one white marking1, the yellow indi-
the selection by pressing the OK button. cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
On certain model variants, the appearance of is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
the centre console's screen follows the theme supplementary information (p. 119) and
selected for the combined instrument panel. Filling up with fuel (p. 289).
The contrast mode and colour mode for the Hybrid battery gauge
instrument can also be set using the left-hand Speedometer
stalk switch.
For more information on menu navigation, Hybrid guide. See also Eco guide &
see Menu navigation - combined instrument Hybrid guide (p. 71).
panel (p. 110). Gear position indicator. See also Auto-
Information display.
matic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 272).
1
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.

03
Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance". Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco". Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indi- only one white marking1, the yellow indi- only one white marking1, the yellow indi-
cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer - is illuminated. See also Trip computer - is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
supplementary information (p. 119) and supplementary information (p. 119) and supplementary information (p. 119) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 289). Filling up with fuel (p. 289). Filling up with fuel (p. 289).
No function Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Hybrid E-boost gauge. Illustrates electric motor
guide (p. 71). use, its support to the diesel engine and
Speedometer engine braking2 with the electric motor.
Speedometer
No function Speedometer
Hybrid guide. See also Eco guide &
Gear position indicator. See also Auto- Hybrid guide (p. 71). Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
matic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 272). Gear position indicator. See also Auto- speed in thousands of revolutions per
matic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 272). minute (rpm).
1
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
2 Engine braking with the electric motor charges the hybrid battery, see Foot brake (p. 276).
}}
69

||
Hybrid guide. See also Eco guide & If the engine does not start or if the function-
Hybrid guide (p. 71). ality check is carried out in key position II
Gear position indicator. See also Auto- then all symbols go out within a few seconds
matic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 272). except the symbol for faults in the car's emis-
sions system.
Indicator and warning symbols
Related information
• Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
03
indicator symbols (p. 72)
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 73)
Indicator and warning symbols.

Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
symbols in the centre of the information dis-
play, illuminate in key position II or when the
engine is started. When the engine has
started, all the symbols should go out except
the parking brake symbol, which only goes
out when the brake is disengaged.
70

Eco guide & Hybrid guide Instantaneous value

Eco guide and Hybrid guide are two com- The instantaneous value is shown here - the
bined instrument panel (p. 66) instruments higher the reading on the scale, the better.
which help the driver to drive the car with The instantaneous value is calculated based
optimum driving economy. on speed, engine speed, engine power uti-
The car also stores statistics of journeys lised plus use of the foot brake.
made, which can be viewed in the form of a Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low engine
block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statis- speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall dur-
tics* (p. 120). 03
ing acceleration and braking.
Eco guide Very low instantaneous values illuminate the
This instrument provides an indication of how red zone on the meter (with a short delay),
economically the car is being driven. which means poor driving economy and Driver-requested power
hence should be avoided.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco";
Average value Available electric motor power
see Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 67). The average value slowly follows the instanta- Where the two pointers meet is the threshold
neous value and describes how the car has for when the diesel engine starts/stops.
been driven most recently. The higher the
pointers on the scale, the better the economy Driver-requested power
achieved by the driver. The large pointer indicates the amount of
engine power requested by the driver by reg-
Hybrid guide ulating the accelerator pedal. The higher the
This instrument shows the relationship reading on the scale, the more power is
between how much power is being taken requested by the driver in the current gear.
from the electric motor and how much power Available electric motor power
is available.
The small pointer indicates the amount of
To view this function, select the theme power currently available for the electric
"Hybrid" or "Performance", see Digital com- motor.
bined instrument panel - overview (p. 67).
A large gap between the two pointers indi-
Instantaneous value cates a large power reserve.
Average value

Combined instrument panel - Symbol Specification 3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
meaning of indicator symbols a workshop to have the ABS system
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a Main beam On checked. Volvo recommends that you
function is activated, that the system is oper- seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
ating, or that an error or failure has occurred. workshop.
Left-hand direction indicator
Rear fog lamp on
Indicator symbols This symbol illuminates when the rear fog
Right-hand direction indicator
Symbol Specification lamp is switched on.
03 Stability system
ABL fault Tyre pressure system , see
Tyre pressure monitoring* A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
(p. 327) system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
Emissions system with constant glow then there is a fault in the
system.
ABS fault
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in Stability system, sport mode
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights). Sport mode allows for a more active driving
Rear fog lamp on experience. The system then detects whether
Emissions system the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move-
If the symbol illuminates after the engine has ments and cornering are more active than in
Stability system, see Electronic been started then it may be due to a fault in
stability control (ESC) - general normal driving and then allows controlled
the car's emissions system. Drive to a work- skidding of the rear section up to a certain
(p. 186) shop for checking. Volvo recommends that level before it intervenes and stabilises the
Stability system, sport mode, you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo car. The symbol illuminates when the sport
see Electronic stability control workshop. mode is activated.
(ESC) - operation (p. 187) ABS fault Engine preheater
If this symbol illuminates then the system is This symbol illuminates during engine pre-
Engine preheater not working. The car's regular brake system heating. Preheating takes place mostly due to
continues to work, but without the ABS func- low temperature.
Low level in fuel tank tion.
Low level in fuel tank
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off When the symbol illuminates the level in the
Information, read display text the engine. fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
2. Restart the engine.

Information, read display text • Digital combined instrument panel - over- Combined instrument cluster -
When one of the car's systems does not view (p. 67) meaning of warning symbols
behave as intended, this information symbol The warning symbols alert the driver that an
illuminates and a text appears on the informa- important function is activated, or that a seri-
tion display. The message text is cleared with ous error or a serious failure has occurred.
the OK button, see Menu navigation - com-
bined instrument panel (p. 110), or it disap- Warning symbols
pears automatically after a time (time Symbol Specification
depending on which function is indicated).
03
The information symbol can also illuminate in Parking brake applied
conjunction with other symbols.
Airbags – SRS
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the Seatbelt reminder
symbol and message are cleared using the
OK button, or disappear automatically
after a time. Starter battery not charging
Main beam On Fault in brake system

The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash. Warning
Left/right-hand direction indicator
Both direction indicator symbols flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used. Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
Tyre pressure system when the parking brake is applied. The sym-
The symbol illuminates in the event of low bol flashes during application, and then
tyre pressure, or if a fault arises in the tyre changes over to a constant glow.
pressure system.
A flashing symbol in any other situation
Related information means that a fault has arisen. Read the mes-
• Combined instrument panel (p. 66) sage on the information display.
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning For more information, see Parking brake
of warning symbols (p. 73) (p. 280).
}}
73

||
Airbags – SRS 2. Restart the engine. Warning
If this symbol remains illuminated or illumi- • If both symbols extinguish, continue The red warning symbol illuminates when a
nates while driving, it means a fault has been driving. fault has been indicated which could affect
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or the safety and/or driveability of the car. An
IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop • If the symbols remain illuminated,
explanatory text is shown on the information
check the level in the brake fluid reser-
to have the system checked. Volvo recom- display at the same time. The symbol remains
voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level
mends that you seek assistance from an visible until the fault has been rectified but the
(p. 357). If the brake fluid level is nor-
authorised Volvo workshop. mal but the symbols are still illumi- text message can be cleared with the OK
Seatbelt reminder nated, the car can be driven, with great button; see Menu navigation - combined
03
This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat care, to a workshop to have the brake instrument panel (p. 110). The warning sym-
has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in system checked. Volvo recommends bol can also illuminate in conjunction with
a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt. that you seek assistance from an other symbols.
authorised Volvo workshop. Action:
Starter battery not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a 1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
WARNING
fault has occurred in the electrical system. further.
Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- 2. Read the information on the information
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
ther before topping up the brake fluid. display. Implement the action in accord-
workshop.
ance with the message in the display.
Fault in brake system The loss of brake fluid must be investiga-
ted by a workshop. Volvo recommends
Clear the message using the OK button.
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
that you contact an authorised Volvo
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place workshop.
and check the level in the brake fluid reser-
voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level
(p. 357). WARNING
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at
the same time, there may be a fault in the the same time, there is a risk that the rear
brake force distribution system. end will skid during heavy braking.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off

the engine.
74

Reminder – doors not closed Outside temperature gauge Trip meter

If one of the doors is not closed properly then The display for the outside temperature gauge The trip meter display appears in the com-
the information or warning symbol illuminates appears in the combined instrument panel. bined instrument panel.
together with an explanatory image in the
information display. Stop the car in a safe
place as soon as possible and close the door
that is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 7 km/h then the informa- 03
tion symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet3 is not closed properly then the
warning symbol illuminates together with an
Display for outside temperature gauge Trip meter.
explanatory image in the information display.
Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi- Display for trip meter
When the temperature lies between +2 °C to
ble and close the bonnet.
-5 °C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has measuring short distances. The distance is
information symbol illuminates together with been stationary, the gauge may display a shown in the display.
an explanatory image in the information dis- reading that is too high. Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show
play. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
Related information the required meter.
possible and close the tailgate.
• Combined instrument panel (p. 66) A long press (until the change occurs) on the
Related information left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets
• Combined instrument panel (p. 66) the trip meter shown. For more information,
• Combined instrument panel - meaning of see Trip computer - supplementary informa-
indicator symbols (p. 72) tion (p. 119).
• Digital combined instrument panel - over- Related information
view (p. 67)
• Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
3 Only cars with alarm*.

Clock Licenses - combined instrument panel this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC
The clock display appears in the combined A license is an agreement for the right to offers spare parts or customer support.
instrument panel. operate a certain activity or the right to use Portions of this product uses software
someone else's entitlement according to the copyrighted © 2007 The FreeType Project
terms and conditions in the agreement. The (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
following text is Volvo's agreement with the
manufacturer/developer. Portions of this product uses software with
Copyright © 1994–2013 Lua.org, PUC-Rio
Combined Instrument Panel Software (http://www.lua.org/)
03
Open Source Software Notice
This product uses certain free / open source
and other software originating from third
parties, that is subject to the GNU Lesser
General Public License version 2 (LGPLv2),
The FreeType Project License ("FreeType
License") and other different and/or additional
Clock. This product includes software under
copy right licenses, disclaimers and notices.
Display for showing the time following licenses:
The links to access the exact terms of
LGPLv2, and the other open source software LGPL v2.1: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-
Set the clock licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and licenses/lgpl-2.1.html
The clock can be adjusted in the menu sys- notices are provided to you below. Please
refer to the exact terms of the relevant
• ・ GNU FriBidi
tem MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
License, regarding your rights under said • ・ DevIL
Related information licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers The FreeType Project License: http://
• Combined instrument panel (p. 66) to provide the source code of said free/open git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/freetype/
source software to you for a charge covering freetype2.git/tree/docs/FTL.TXT
the cost of performing such distribution, such
as the cost of media, shipping and handling,
• ・ FreeType 2
upon written request. Please contact your MIT License: http: http://opensource.org/
nearest Volvo Dealer. licenses/mit-license.html
The offer is valid for a period of at least three • ・ Lua

(3) years from the date of the distribution of
76

Symbols in the display Symbol Specification See Symbol Specification See

There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided Starter battery (p. 73) Engine preheater (p. 72)
into warning, indicator and information sym- not charging (diesel)
bols. Shown below are the most common
Fault in brake (p. 73), Low level in fuel (p. 72),
symbols with their meanings and a reference
system (p. 276) tank (p. 142)
to where in the manual further information can
be found. Warning, safety (p. 33), Information, read (p. 72)
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when mode (p. 43), display text 03
(p. 73)
a fault has been indicated which could affect Main beam On (p. 72),
the safety and/or driveability of the car. An (p. 92)
explanatory text is shown in the information Control symbols in the combined
display in the combined instrument panel at instrument panel Left-hand direc- (p. 72)
the same time. Symbol Specification See tion indicators
- Information symbol, illuminates in ABL fault* (p. 72), Right-hand (p. 72)
combination with text in the information dis- (p. 95) direction indica-
play in the combined instrument panel, when tors
a deviation in any of the car's systems has Emissions sys- (p. 72)
occurred. The information symbol can also tem Tyre pressure (p. 72),
illuminate in conjunction with other symbols. system* (p. 327)
ABS fault (p. 72),
Warning symbols in the combined (p. 276)
instrument panel
Rear fog lamp on (p. 72),
Symbol Specification See (p. 96)
Parking brake (p. 73), Stability system, (p. 72),
applied (p. 280) ESC (Electronic (p. 188),
Stability Control), (p. 310)
Airbags – SRS (p. 33), Trailer stability
(p. 73) assist*
Seatbelt (p. 29), Stability system, (p. 72),
reminder (p. 73) sport mode (p. 188)
}}

||
Information symbols in the combined Symbol Specification See Symbol Specification See
instrument panel
Speed limiter (p. 193) Parking brake (p. 280)
Symbol Specification See
Active high beam, (p. 93) Auto Brake*, Dis- (p. 215), Rain sensor* (p. 101)
AHB (Active High tance Warning* (p. 222),
Beam)* (Distance Alert), (p. 231) Driver Alert Sys- (p. 235),
City SafetyTM, tem*, Lane (p. 240)
Camera sensor*, (p. 93),
03 Collision warning Departure Warn-
Laser sensor* (p. 222),
system* ing*
(p. 231),
(p. 235), Engine block and (p. 142) Driver Alert Sys- (p. 240)
(p. 240) passenger com- tem*, Lane
partment heater* Departure Warn-
Adaptive cruise (p. 211)
control* ing*
Engine block (p. 142)
Adaptive cruise (p. 203), heater and pas- Driver Alert Sys- (p. 234)
control*, Distance (p. 213) senger compart- tem*, Time for a
Warning* (Dis- ment heater* break
tance Alert) Service required
Driver Alert Sys- (p. 235)
Adaptive cruise (p. 199), Activated timer* (p. 142) tem*, Time for a
control*, time (p. 201) break
interval
Recorded speed (p. 190)
Cruise control* (p. 196) ABL system* (p. 95) information*
Radar sensor* (p. 211),

Parking inside (p. 137)
(p. 215), Fuel filler flap, (p. 288)
(p. 231) right-hand side
Foot brake (p. 276) Low battery (p. 142)

Symbol Specification See Information symbols in the roof console Volvo Sensus
display Volvo Sensus is the heart of your personal
Parking outside (p. 137) Volvo experience. It is Sensus that provides
Symbol Specification See
information, entertainment and functions to
Seatbelt reminder (p. 32) simplify your ownership.
Heating the seat (p. 137),
(p. 137) Airbag, passenger (p. 36)
seat, activated
Drive systems (p. 269) 03
Airbag, passenger (p. 36)

seat, deactivated
Gear shift indica- (p. 271)
tor Related information
indicator symbols (p. 72) When you are sitting in your car you want
Gear positions (p. 272)
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning control, and in today's interconnected world,
of warning symbols (p. 73) this includes information, communication and
• Messages - handling (p. 112) entertainment when it is most suitable for
Measuring the oil (p. 355) you. Sensus covers all our solutions that ena-
level ble connection* to the outside world, at the
same time providing you with intuitive control
over all the car's capabilities.
Volvo Sensus combines and presents many
functions in several of the car's systems on
the centre console's display screen. With
Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by
means of an intuitive user interface. Settings
can be made in Car settings, Audio and
media, Climate control, etc.
With the centre console buttons and controls
or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*
}}

||
functions can be activated or deactivated and of the buttons both vary, depending on the Key positions
many different settings can be made. equipment selected and the market.
The remote control key can be used to set the
Navigation* - NAV, see separate supple- vehicle's electrical system in different modes/
With a press on MY CAR all settings related
ment (Sensus Navigation). levels so that different functions are available;
to the driving and control of the car are pre-
sented, such as City Safety, locks and alarm, Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, see Key positions - functions at different lev-
automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc. see separate supplement (Sensus Info- els (p. 81).
tainment).
With a press on the respective function
Function settings - MY CAR, see MY
RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, *, NAV* and CAM*
03 CAR (p. 113).
other sources, systems and functions can be
activated, e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Internet-connected car - *, see sepa-
Bluetooth®*, navigation* and park assist cam- rate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
era*. Climate control system (p. 122).
For more information about all functions/
Park assist camera* (p. 246) – CAM*.
systems, see the relevant section in the
owner's manual or its supplement.
Overview
Ignition switch with remote control key extrac-
ted/inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the Keyless* function the
remote control key does not need to be
inserted into the ignition switch but can be
stored in e.g. a pocket. For more informa-
tion on Keyless functions, see Keyless
drive* (p. 170).
Control panel in centre console. The figure is Insert the remote control key
schematic - the number of functions and layout 1. Hold the end of the remote control key
with the detachable key blade and insert

the remote control key in the ignition Key positions - functions at different Level Functions
switch. levels
2. Then press the remote control key in the In order to enable the use of a limited number 0 • Odometer, clock and tem-
lock up to its end position. of functions with the engine switched off, the perature gauge are illumi-
car's electrical system can be set in 3 differ- nated.
IMPORTANT ent levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with the • Power seats can be adjusted.
remote control key. Throughout this owner's • The audio system can be
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can
impair the function or destroy the lock. manual these levels are described using the used for a limited time - see
denomination "key positions". the Sensus Infotainment sup- 03
Do not press in the remote control key
plement.
incorrectly turned - hold the end with the The following table shows the functions avail-
detachable key blade, see Detachable key able in each key position/level. I • Sunroof, power windows, 12V
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 167). socket in the passenger com-
partment, navigation, phone,
Remove the remote control key ventilation fan and wind-
Push the remote control key, allow it to eject, screen wipers can be used.
then pull it out from the ignition switch.
Current consumption loads the
starter battery in this key posi-
tion.
}}
81

||
Level Functions • Key position II - With the remote control Seats, front
key fully inserted into the ignition switch4 The car's front seats have different setting
II • The headlamps come on. - Give a long5 press on START/STOP options for optimum seating comfort.
• Warning/indicator lamps illu- ENGINE.
minate for 5 seconds. • Back to key position 0 - To return to key
• Several other systems are position 0 from position II and I - Briefly
activated. However, heating in press on START/STOP ENGINE.
seat cushions and the rear
Audio system
03 window can only be activated
For information on audio system functions
after the engine has been
started. with remote control key removed, see the
Sensus Infotainment supplement.
This key position consumes a
lot of current from the starter Starting and stopping the engine
battery and should therefore be For information about starting/stopping the
avoided! engine, see Starting the engine (p. 261).
Choosing key position/level Related information Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
• Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This • Key positions (p. 80)
Forward/backward: lift the handle to
means that the car's electrical system is adjust the distance to the steering wheel
at level 0.
and pedals. Check that the seat is locked
• Key position I - With the remote control after changing position.
key fully inserted into the ignition switch4
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,
- Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.
pump up/down.
NOTE Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
To reach level I or II without starting the Change the lumbar support*, press the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch button.
pedal when these key positions are due to
Control panel for power seat*, see Seats,
be selected.
front - electrically operated* (p. 83).
4 Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function.

5 Approx. 2 seconds.

WARNING Raising takes place in reverse order. Seats, front - electrically operated*
The car's front seats have different setting
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving.
WARNING options for optimum seating comfort. The
Make sure that the seat is in locked posi- Grasp the backrest and make sure that it power seat can be moved forward/backward
tion in order to avoid personal injury in the is properly locked after being folded up in and up/down. The front edge of the seat
event of sudden braking or an accident. order to avoid personal injury in the event cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest
of sudden braking or an accident. angle and lumbar support* can be changed.
Lowering the passenger seat backrest*6 Power seat
• Seats, front - electrically operated*
(p. 83)
• Seats, rear (p. 85)
The passenger seat's backrest can be folded Front edge of seat cushion up/down
forward to make room for long loads.
Raise/lower seat
Move the seat as far back/down as possi-
ble. Seat, forward/backward
Adjust the backrest to an upright position. Backrest rake
Lift the catches on the rear of the back- Lumbar support* is adjusted inward and
rest and fold it forward. outward
4. Push the seat forward so that the head The power seats have overload protection
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox. which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
6 Only applies to comfort seats.

}}

||
object. If this should happen, set the car's Store setting Emergency stop
electrical system in key position I or 0 and Memory button If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
wait a short time before adjusting the seat one of the setting buttons for the seat or
again. Memory button memory buttons in order to stop the seat.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down/ Memory button Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
inward/outward) can be made at a time. the key memory is performed by pressing the
Button for storing settings unlock button on the remote control key. The
Preparations driver's door must then be open.
The seat can be adjusted for a certain time 1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
03
after unlocking the door with the remote con- 2. Press and hold button M while pressing WARNING
trol key without the key in the ignition switch. button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously. Hold the
Seat adjustment is normally made in key buttons depressed until the acoustic sig- Risk of crushing! Make sure that children
position I and can always be made when the nal is heard and text is shown in the com- do not play with the controls. Check that
engine is running. bined instrument panel. there are no objects in front of, behind or
under the seat during adjustment. Ensure
Seat with memory function* The seat must be adjusted again before a that none of the rear seat passengers is in
new memory can be set. danger of becoming trapped.
The setting for lumbar support is not stored.
Heated seats
Using a stored setting For heated seats, see Heated front seats*
Press one of the memory buttons 1-3 until the (p. 129) and Heated rear seat* (p. 129).
seat and the door mirrors stop. If the button
is released, the movement of the seat and Related information
door mirrors will be interrupted. • Seats, front (p. 82)
• Seats, rear (p. 85)
Key memory* in remote control key
All remote control keys can be used by differ-
ent drivers to store the settings for the driv-
er's seat and door mirrors7, see Remote con-
The memory function stores settings for the trol key - personalisation* (p. 160).
seat and the door mirrors.
7 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power rearview and door mirrors. The setting for lumbar support is not stored.

Seats, rear Manual lowering of the outer head The triple-section backrest can be folded in
The rear seat backrest and the outer seat restraints, rear seat different ways.
head restraints can be folded. The centre seat
head restraint can be adjusted to suit the NOTE
height of the passenger. The front seats may need to be pushed
forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
Head restraint, centre seat, rear upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be fully folded forward.
03
• The left-hand section can be folded sepa-
rately.
• The centre section can be folded sepa-
rately.
• The right-hand section can only be folded
Pull the locking handle closest to the head together with the centre section.
restraint to fold the head restraint forward. • If the entire backrest is to be folded then
The head restraint is moved back manually the different sections should be folded
until a "click" can be heard. separately.
Adjust the head restraint according to pas-
senger height so that the whole of the back of WARNING
the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as The head restraints must be in locked
required. position after being raised.
To lower the head restraint again, the button
(located in the centre between the backrest Lowering the rear seat backrest
and head restraint, see illustration) must be
pressed in while the head restraint is pressed IMPORTANT
down carefully.
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down.
The seat belts must not be connected
either. Otherwise there is a risk of damag-
ing the rear seat upholstery.
}}
85

||
NOTE WARNING
When the backrest has been raised, the Do not lower the outer head restraints if
red indicator should no longer be showing. there are any passengers using of the
If it is still showing then the backrest is not outer seats.
locked in place.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
WARNING click is heard.
03 Check that the backrests and head

restraints in the rear seat are locked prop- WARNING
If the centre backrest is being lowered -
erly after being folded up. The head restraints must be in locked
release and adjust the head restraint for
position after being raised.
the centre backrest, see the earlier sec-
tion "Head restraint, centre seat, rear". Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints* Related information
The outer head restraints are lowered
automatically when the outer backrests
• Seats, front (p. 82)
are lowered. Pull up the backrest's lock- • Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 83)
ing handle while folding the backrest
forward at the same time. A red indicator
on the lock catch shows that the
backrest is no longer locked in place.
NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered
the head restraints must be moved for-
ward slightly so as not to make contact
with the seat cushion.
1. The remote control key must be in key
position II.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
2. Press the button to lower the rear outer
head restraints to improve rearward visi-
bility.

Steering wheel 3. Push back the lever to fix the steering Horn
The steering wheel can be adjusted in differ- wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press
ent positions and has controls for horn and the steering wheel lightly at the same time
cruise control, as well as menu, audio and as you push the lever back.
phone control.
WARNING
Adjusting
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away.
03
With speed related power steering* the level
of steering force can be adjusted, see Adjust-
able steering force* (p. 254).
Keypads* Horn.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to sig-
nal.
Related information
• Heating* of the steering wheel (p. 88)
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
Keypads in the steering wheel.
steering wheel.
Cruise control* (p. 196)
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you. Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 199)
Audio and phone control, see supple-
ment, Sensus Infotainment

Heating* of the steering wheel approx. 10 °C. Activate/deactivate the func- Light switches
The steering wheel can be heated with elec- tion in the menu system MY CAR (p. 113). The headlamp control activates and adjusts
tric heating. the external lighting. It is also used to adjust
display and instrument lighting and mood
Function lighting (p. 98).
03
Button position may vary depending on equip-

ment selected and market.
Repeatedly press the button to switch
between the following functions:
Function Indicator
Switched off Button lamp extinguished
Heating Button lamp illuminated
Automatic steering wheel heating

With activated automatic start of steering
wheel heating, the heating of the steering
wheel starts when the engine is started. Auto-
matic start takes place when the car is cold
and the ambient temperature is below

Overview, light switches Posi- Specification Posi- Specification

tion tion
Daytime running lightsA when Daytime running lights, side
the car's electrical system is in marker lamps front and posi-
key position II or the engine is tion/parking lamps/side marker
running. lamps rear in daylight when the
car's electrical system is in key
Main beam flash can be used.
position II or the engine is run-
03
Daytime running lights, side ning.
marker lamps front and posi- Dipped beam and position/
tion/parking lamps/side marker parking lamps/side marker
lamps rear when the car's elec- lamps in weak daylight or dark-
Overview, light switches. trical system is in key position II ness, or when the rear fog lamp
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and or the engine is running. or windscreen wipers with con-
instrument lighting as well as ambient Position/parking lamps/side tinuous wiping are activated.
lighting* marker lamps when the car is The tunnel detection (p. 92)*
Button for rear fog lamp parked. function is activated.
Knob for daytime running lights and park- Main beam flash can be used. The active high beam (p. 93)*
ing lamps function can be used.
Thumbwheel8 for headlamp levelling Main beam can be activated
when dipped beam is switched
Knob positions on.
NOTE Main beam flash can be used.
The same lamps are used for daytime run- Dipped beam and position/
ning lights and position/parking lamps parking lamps/side marker
front. The brightness is higher when the lamps.
lamps are used as daytime running lights.
Main beam can be activated.
8 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.

}}

||
Posi- Specification Position/parking lamps
tion Position/parking lamps are switched on with
the headlamp control's knob.
Main beam flash can be used.
A Fitted in or under the front bumper.
Volvo recommends that mode is used

when the car is being driven, as long as traffic
03 situations or weather conditions are unfavour-
able for the Active high beam* function.
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.
switched on depending on key position; see
Only driver
Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 81). Driver and passenger in the front passen-
The display lighting is automatically subdued ger seat Knob for headlamp control in the position for
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the position/parking lamps.
Occupants in all seats
thumbwheel. Turn the knob to the position for (num-
Occupants in all seats and maximum load ber plate lighting is switched on at the same
The intensity of the instrument lighting is in the cargo area
adjusted with the thumbwheel. time).
The driver and maximum load in the
Headlamp levelling If the car's electrical system is in key position
cargo area
The load in the car changes the vertical align- II or the engine is running then the daytime
Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have running lights switch on instead of the front
ment of the headlamp beam, which could
automatic headlamp levelling and are there- position/parking lamps.
dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by
fore not equipped with the thumbwheel.
adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the When it is dark outside and the tailgate is
beam if the car is heavily laden. Related information opened the rear position/parking lamps illumi-
1. Leave the engine running, or have the • Position/parking lamps (p. 90) nate to alert traffic behind. This takes place
car's electrical system in key position I. • Daytime running lights (p. 91) irrespective of what position the knob is in or
what key position the car's electrical system
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/ • Main/dipped beam (p. 92)
is in.
lower beam alignment.

Related information Daytime running lights WARNING

• Light switches (p. 88) With the knob for headlamp control in This system help to save energy - it cannot
position, and the car's electrical system in key determine in all situations when daylight is
position II or the engine running, the daytime too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
running lights are activated automatically in and rain.
daylight. The driver is always responsible for ensur-
ing that the car is driven with the correct
Daytime running lights during the day. beam pattern for the traffic situation and in
DRL accordance with applicable traffic regula- 03
tions.
Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.

With the knob for headlamp control in
position the daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Lights - DRL) are activated automati-
cally when the car is driven in daylight. A light
sensor on the top of the instrument panel
changes from daytime running lights to
dipped beam at twilight or when daylight
becomes too weak. Switching to dipped
beam also takes place when the windscreen
wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
91

Tunnel detection* Main/dipped beam daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is
Tunnel detection changes the lighting from With the knob for headlamp control in posi- also activated automatically if the windscreen
daytime running lights to dipped beam when wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
tion and the car's electrical system in
the car is driven into a tunnel. Approx. 20 sec- key position II or the engine running, the With the knob in position dipped beam
onds after the car has left the tunnel, the light- dipped beam is activated automatically in is always switched on when the engine is run-
ing returns to daytime running lights. poor light conditions. ning or when key position II is active.
The tunnel detection function is available in With the knob for headlamp control in posi-
Main beam flash
cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the tion dipped beam is always switched on
03 Move the stalk switch gently towards the
entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting when the engine is running or when key posi- steering wheel to the position for main beam
from daytime running lights to dipped beam. tion II is active. flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk
Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the
switch is released.
tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running
lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel Main beam
within this time period then dipped beam is Main beam can be activated when the knob
kept switched on. This avoids repeated 9 or
is in position . Activate/deacti-
changes to the car's lighting.
vate main beam by moving the stalk switch
Note that the headlamp control's knob must towards the steering wheel to the end posi-
remain in position for tunnel detection tion and then releasing. Alternatively, the
to work. main beam can be deactivated by a light
press of the stalk switch toward the steering
Related information wheel.
• Main/dipped beam (p. 92)
When main beam has been activated the
• Light switches (p. 88) Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control. symbol illuminates in the combined
Position for main beam flash instrument panel.
Position for main beam Auxiliary lamps*

If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can
Dipped beam use the MY CAR menu system to choose
With the knob in position, dipped beam whether they should be deactivated or
is activated automatically at twilight or when
9 When dipped beam is switched on.

switched on/off simultaneously with the main Active high beam* beam that points directly to the vehicle is
beam10, see MY CAR (p. 113). The Active High Beam function detects the dimmed.
headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the
Related information rear lights of vehicles in front, and switches
• Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 95) the lighting from main beam to dipped beam.
• Active high beam* (p. 93) Xenon headlamps only dim the portion of the
• Light switches (p. 88) light beam that points directly to the vehicle.
The lighting returns to main beam when the
• Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
(p. 100) incoming light has stopped. 03
• Tunnel detection* (p. 92) Active high beam - AHB
Active high beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is
a function which uses a camera sensor at the
top edge of the windscreen to detect the
headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the
Dipped beam directly toward oncoming vehicles,
rear lights of vehicles in front, and then
but continued main beam on both sides of the
switches from main beam to dipped beam. vehicle.
The function can also take streetlights into
account. The lighting returns to full main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
Car with halogen headlamps detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
The lighting returns to main beam about a traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
Car with Xenon headlamps
Unlike what happens during conventional
dimming, the light beam continues with main
beam on both sides of oncoming traffic or
vehicles ahead - only the part of the light
10 Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
}}

||
Activating/deactivating When main beam is activated, the symbol screen sensors are no longer blocked, the
AHB can be activated when the headlamp turns blue. This also applies for Xenon head- message extinguishes and the symbol
control's knob is in position (provided lamps if the main beam is partially dimmed, illuminates.
that the function has not been deactivated in i.e. as soon as the light beam shines with
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR slightly more than dipped beam. WARNING
(p. 113)). Manual operation
AHB is an aid for using the optimum beam
pattern when conditions are favourable.
NOTE
The driver always bears responsibility for
03 manually switching between main and
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist dipped beam when traffic situations or
and dirt. weather conditions so require.
Do not stick or attach anything to the
windscreen in front of the camera sensor IMPORTANT
as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
one or more of the systems dependent on Examples of when manual switching
the camera to stop working. between main and dipped beam may be
required:
If the message Active main beam • In heavy rain or dense fog
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in Temporary unavailable Switch manually is • In freezing rain
AUTO position. shown in the combined instrument panel's
• In snow flurries or slush
The function can start while driving in the information display then you have to switch
dark when the car's speed is 20 km/h or manually between main and dipped beam. • In moonlight
higher. However, the knob for headlamp control can • When driving in poorly lit built-up
still remain in position . The same areas
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left-
hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel applies if the message Windscreen sensors • When the traffic ahead has weak light-
blocked See manual and the symbol ing
to the end position and then releasing. Deac-
tivation when main beam is on means that the are shown. The symbol goes out when • If there are pedestrians on or beside
lights are reset directly to dipped beam. these messages are shown. the road
When AHB is activated the symbol AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in • If there are highly reflective objects
such as signs in the vicinity of the road
turns white in the instrument's information situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When
display. AHB becomes available again, or the wind-
94

• When the lighting from oncoming traf- Active Xenon headlamps* minates in the combined instrument panel at
fic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier Active Xenon headlamps are designed to pro- the same time as the information display
• When there is traffic on connecting vide maximum illumination in bends and junc- shows an explanatory text and a further illu-
roads tions and so provide increased safety. minated symbol.
• On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
Active Xenon headlamps ABL Symbol Message Specification
• In sharp bends.
Headlamp The system is
For more information on the limitations of the system disengaged. Visit
03
camera sensor, see Collision warning system* malfunc- a workshop if
- camera sensor limitations (p. 229). tion Serv- the message
ice remains. Volvo
Related information required recommends
• Main/dipped beam (p. 92) that you contact
• Light switches (p. 88) an authorised
Volvo workshop.
The function is only active in twilight or dark-

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) ness and only when the car is moving.
and activated (right) respectively.
The function11 can be deactivated/activated
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
lamps (Active Bending Lights – ABL) the light (p. 113).
from the headlamps follows the steering
wheel movement in order to provide maxi- For headlamp pattern adjustment, see Head-
mum lighting in bends and junctions and so lamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 100).
provide increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started (provided that it has not
been deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113)). In the event
of a fault in the function the symbol illu-
11 Activated on delivery from the factory.

}}

||
Cornering lights Rear fog lamp NOTE
Active Xenon headlamps are equipped with When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog
cornering lights that temporarily illuminate the Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps
lamp can be used so that other road users vary from country to country.
area diagonally in front of the car in the direc- shall notice vehicles in front at an early stage.
tion the steering wheel is turned in a sharp
bend, or in the direction for which the direc- Related information
tion indicators are used. • Light switches (p. 88)
The function is activated when main beam or
03 dipped beam is used and the car's speed is
lower than approx. 30 km/h.
In addition, both cornering lights are switched
on as a supplement to the reversing lamp
during reversing.
Related information
• Main/dipped beam (p. 92)
• Active high beam* (p. 93) Button for rear fog lamp.
• Light switches (p. 88) The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
when key position II is active or the engine is
running and the headlamp control's knob is in
position or .
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog
lamp's indicator symbol in the com-
bined instrument panel and the light in the
button both illuminate when the rear fog lamp
is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automati-
cally when the engine is switched off or when
the headlamp control's knob is turned to
position or .

Brake lights Hazard warning flashers again or the button is depressed. For more
The brake light automatically comes on during The hazard warning flashers warn other road information on emergency brake lights and
braking. users by means of all of the car's direction automatic hazard warning flashers, see Foot
indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when brake - emergency brake lights and auto-
The brake light is switched on when the brake this function is activated. matic hazard warning flashers (p. 279).
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched
on when one of driving support systems When the hazard warning flashers are acti- Related information
Adaptive cruise control (p. 199), City Safety vated both direction indicator symbols flash in • Direction indicators (p. 98)
(p. 216) or Collision warning system (p. 223) the combined instrument panel.
brakes the car. 03
For information on emergency brake lights

and automatic hazard warning flashers, see
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 279).
Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warn-
ing flashers. Both direction indicator symbols
in the combined instrument panel flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car has been braked
so suddenly that the emergency brake lights
have been activated at a speed below
10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain
on when the car has stopped and are deacti-
vated automatically when the car is driven off
97

Direction indicators The stalk switch remains in its position and is Interior lighting
The car's direction indicators are operated moved back manually, or automatically by the The passenger compartment lighting is acti-
with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction steering wheel movement. vated/deactivated with the buttons in the con-
indicator lamps flash three times or continu- trols above the front seats and the rear seat.
Direction indicator symbols
ously, depending on how far up or down the
For direction indicator symbols, see Com-
stalk switch is moved.
bined instrument panel - meaning of indicator
symbols (p. 72).
03 Related information
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 97)
G021149
Controls in roof console for the front reading
lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Direction indicators. Reading lamp, left-hand side
Short flash sequence Reading lamp, right-hand side
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction Interior lighting
indicator lamps flash three times. The All lighting in the passenger compartment can
function can be activated/deactivated in be switched on and off manually within
the menu system MY CAR, see MY 30 minutes from when:
CAR (p. 113).
• the engine has been switched off and the
Continuous flash sequence car's electrical system is in key position 0
Move the stalk switch up or down to the • the car has been unlocked but the engine
outer position. has not been started.
98

Front roof lighting Lighting in the cargo area Passenger compartment lighting is switched
The front reading lamps are switched on or The lighting in the cargo area is switched on off when:
off by pressing the relevant button in the roof and off respectively when the tailgate is • the engine is started
console. opened or closed.
• the car is locked.
Rear roof lighting Automatic lighting The passenger compartment lighting comes
The switch for passenger compartment light- on and remains on for two minutes if one of
ing has three positions for the lighting in the the doors is open.
passenger compartment:
If any lighting is switched on manually and 03
• Off – right-hand side pressed in, auto- the car is locked then it will be switched off
matic lighting deactivated. automatically after two minutes.
• Neutral position – automatic lighting
activated. Mood lights*
When the normal passenger compartment
• On – left-hand side pressed in, passenger
lighting is switched off and the engine is run-
compartment lighting switched on.
ning, a number of LEDs illuminate, including
G021150
Neutral position one in the ceiling lighting, in order to provide

When the button is in neutral position the a low-light and enhance the mood while driv-
Rear roof lighting. ing. The light also makes it easier to see
passenger compartment lighting is switched
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing on and off automatically in accordance with objects in storage compartments etc. during
each respective button. the following. the darker hours of the day. This lighting goes
out for a little while after the normal passen-
Courtesy lighting The passenger compartment lighting is ger compartment lighting when the car is
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart- switched on and remains on for 30 seconds locked. The brightness is controlled using the
ment lighting) is switched on and off respec- if: thumbwheel on the headlamp control (p. 88).
tively when a side door is opened or closed. • the car is unlocked with the remote con-
trol key or key blade, see Remote control
Glovebox lighting key - functions (p. 163) or Detachable
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off key blade - unlocking doors (p. 167)
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
• the engine has been switched off and the
Vanity mirror lighting car's electrical system is in key position
The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 150) is 0.
switched on and off respectively when the
cover is opened or closed.

Home safe light duration Approach lighting Headlamps - adjusting headlamp

Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam, Approach lighting consists of parking lamps, pattern
parking lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate light- If the car is equipped with active Xenon head-
number plate lighting, interior roof lighting as ing, interior roof lighting as well as courtesy lamps and has the Active High Beam function
well as courtesy lighting. lighting. then the headlamp pattern must be reset
when changing from right to left-hand traffic,
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept Approach lighting is switched on with the and vice versa.
switched on to work as home safe lighting remote control key, see Remote control key -
after the car has been locked. functions (p. 163), and is used to switch on Active Xenon headlamps*
03 the car's lighting at a distance.
1. Remove the remote control key from the No adjustment of the headlamp pattern is
ignition switch. When the function is activated with the necessary for cars without the Active High
remote control, the parking lamps, door mir- Beam* function. The headlamp pattern is
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward designed in such a way that oncoming traffic
ror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof
the steering wheel to the end position and is not dazzled.
lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.
release it. The function can be activated
in the same way as with main beam flash; The length of time for which the approach Headlamp pattern adjustment is required for
see Main/dipped beam (p. 92). lighting should be kept on can be set in the cars with Active High Beam. The car must be
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113). stationary with the engine running when the
3. Get out of the car and lock the door. headlamp pattern is shifted between right and
When the function is activated, dipped beam, Related information left-hand traffic.
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number • Home safe light duration (p. 100) The headlamp pattern is changed in the menu
plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
lighting are switched on.
Halogen headlamps
The length of time for which the home safe
No adjustment of the headlamp pattern is
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
necessary. The headlamp pattern is designed
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
in such a way that oncoming traffic is not
Related information dazzled.
• Approach lighting (p. 100)

Wipers and washing Intermittent wiping detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
Wipers and washers clean the windscreen Set the number of sweeps per time the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned unit with the thumbwheel when thumbwheel.
with high-pressure washing. intermittent wiping is selected. When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in
Continuous wiping the button is illuminated and the rain sensor
Windscreen wipers12
The wipers sweep at normal speed. symbol is shown in the combined
instrument panel.
The wipers sweep at high speed. Activating and setting the sensitivity 03
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in posi-
IMPORTANT tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
switch must be in position 0 or in the position
Before activating the wipers during winter for a single sweep.
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but-
screen is scraped away. ton . The windscreen wipers make one
sweep.
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers. IMPORTANT Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to
Rain sensor, on/off Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers make an extra sweep.
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sen-
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency screen must be wet when the windscreen
sitivity and downward for lower sensitivity.
wipers are operating.
Windscreen wipers off (An extra sweep is made when the thumb-
Move the stalk switch to position 0 wheel is turned upward.)
Service position wiper blade
to switch off the windscreen wipers. Deactivate
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades
and replacement of wiper blades, see Wiper Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to blades (p. 366) and Car washing (p. 388). button or move the stalk switch down
make one sweep. to another wiper program.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
12 For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 366). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 368).
}}

||
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated Washing the windscreen Wiping and washing the rear window
when the remote control key is removed from Move the stalk switch toward the steering
the ignition switch or five minutes after the wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
engine has been switched off. washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several
IMPORTANT more sweeps and the headlamps are washed
The windscreen wipers could start and be once the stalk switch has been released.
damaged in an automatic car wash.
03 Switch off the rain sensor while the car is Heated washer nozzles*
in motion or when the remote control key The washer nozzles are heated automatically
is in position I or II. The symbol in the in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
combined instrument panel and the lamp freezing solid.
in the button go out.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Washing the headlamps and windows High-pressure headlamp washing consumes
a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, Rear window wiper – continuous speed
the headlamps are washed automatically at
every fifth windscreen wash cycle. Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow
in the illustration above) to initiate rear win-
Reduced washing dow washing and wiping.
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains
in the reservoir and the message that you NOTE
should fill the washer fluid is shown in the
The rear window wiper is equipped with
combined instrument panel, then the supply
overheating protection which means that
of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched the motor is switched off if it overheats.
off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the The rear window wiper works again after a
windscreen and the visibility through it. cooling period (30 seconds or longer,
depending on the heat in the motor and
Washing function. the outside temperature).

Wiper – reversing Power windows WARNING

Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen All power windows can be operated using the
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear win- Check that no rear seat passengers are
control panel for the driver's door - the con- trapped when the windows are closed
dow wiping13. The function stops when trol panels for the other doors operate their from the driver's door.
reverse gear is disengaged. respective power window.
If the rear window wiper is already on at con-
WARNING
tinuous speed, no change is made.
Check that children or other passengers
NOTE are not trapped if the windows are closed, 03
even when the remote control key is used.
On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is
activated during reversing if the sensor is
activated and it is raining. WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember
Related information to always switch off the power supply to
• Washer fluid - filling (p. 368) the power windows by selecting key posi-
tion 0 and then take the remote control key
• Washer fluid - quality and volume with you when leaving the car. For infor-
(p. 407) mation on key positions - see Key posi-
Driver's door control panel.
tions - functions at different levels (p. 81).
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons;
see Child safety locks - electrical activa-
tion* (p. 181).
Rear window controls
Front window controls
13 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
}}

||
Operating movement. It is possible to override the pinch Resetting
protection when closing has been interrupted, If the battery is disconnected then the func-
e.g. if there is ice forming. After two succes- tion for automatic opening must be reset so
sive closing interruptions the pinch protection that it can work correctly.
will be forced and the automatic function
1. Gently raise the front section of the but-
deactivated for a short while, now it is possi-
ton to raise the window to its end position
ble to close by continually holding the button
and hold it there for one second.
pulled up.
2. Release the button briefly.
03
NOTE 3. Raise the front section of the button again
One way to reduce the pulsating wind for one second.
noise when the rear windows are open is
to also open the front windows slightly. WARNING
Operating the power windows.
A reset must take place for pinch protec-
Operating without auto Operating without auto tion to work.
Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down gently.
The power windows move up/down as long
All power windows can be operated using the as the control is held in position.
control panel for the driver's door - the con- Operating with auto
trol panels for the other doors can only each Move one of the controls up/down to the end
operate their respective power window. Only position and release it. The window runs
one control panel can be operated at a time. automatically to its end position.
In order for the power windows to be used, Operating with the remote control key
the key position must be at least I - see Key and central locking
positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).
To remotely operate the power windows from
The power windows can be operated for a
the outside with the remote control key or
few minutes after the engine has been
from inside with central locking, see Remote
switched off and after the remote control key
control key (p. 159) and Locking/unlocking -
has been removed - although not after a door
from the inside (p. 176).
has been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
104

Door mirrors WARNING The function can be activated/deactivated in

The door mirror positions are adjusted with the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
Both mirrors are the wide-angle type to (p. 113).
the joystick in the driver's door controls. provide optimal vision. Objects may
appear further away than they actually are. Automatic retraction when locking14
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
Storing settings14 remote control key the door mirrors are auto-
The settings for the rearview and door mirrors matically retracted/extended.
and the positions of the driver's seat can be The function can be activated/deactivated in 03
stored for each remote control key in the car the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
key memory*, see Remote control key - per- (p. 113).
sonalisation* (p. 160).
Resetting to neutral
Angling the door mirror when parking14 Mirrors that have been moved out of position
The door mirror can be angled down for the by an external force must be reset electrically
driver to view the side of the road when park- to the neutral position for electric retracting/
Door mirror controls. ing for example. extending to work correctly:
– Engage reverse gear and press the L or R 1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-
Adjusting
button. tons.
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror 2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-
door mirror. The light in the button illumi- automatically returns to its original position tons.
nates. after approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by press-
ing the button labelled L or R respectively. 3. Repeat the above procedure as neces-
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the sary.
centre. Automatic angling of the door mirror The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light when parking14
should no longer be illuminated. When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror Automatic dimming*
is automatically angled down so that the For the door mirrors to be fitted with this
driver can see the side of the road when function requires that the interior rearview
parking for example. When reverse gear is mirror also has automatic dimming, see Rear-
disengaged the mirror automatically returns view mirror - interior (p. 107).
to its original position after a short time.
14 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 83).
}}

||
Retractable power door mirrors* Windows and rearview and door +7 °C. Automatic defrosting can be selected
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv- mirrors - heating in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
ing in narrow spaces: The defroster is used to quickly remove mist- (p. 113).
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultane- ing and ice from the rear window and door
ously (key position must be at least I). mirrors.
2. Release them after Rear window and door mirror

approximately 1 second. The mirrors defrosters
automatically stop in the fully retracted
03
position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended posi-
tion.
Home safe and approach lighting

The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates
when approach lighting (p. 100) or home safe
lighting (p. 100) is selected.
Related information Heating, rear window and door mirrors

• Rearview mirror - interior (p. 107)
The function is used to remove ice and mist-
• Windows and rearview and door mirrors -
ing from the rear window and door mirrors.
heating (p. 106)
One press of the button starts the heating.
The light in the button indicates that the func-
tion is active. Switch off the heating as soon
as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to
load the battery unnecessarily. However, the
function is switched off automatically after a
certain time.
The door mirrors and rear window are demis-
ted/defrosted automatically if the car is
started in an outside temperature lower than

Rearview mirror - interior for manual dimming is not available on mir- Compass*
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed rors with automatic dimming. The rearview mirror contains an integrated
with a control in the mirror's lower edge. The rearview mirror contains two sensors - display that shows the compass direction in
Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims auto- one forward facing and one rearward facing - which the front of the car is pointing.
matically. that work together to identify and eliminate
Operation
dazzling light. The forward facing sensor
detects ambient light, while the rearward fac-
ing sensor detects the light from vehicle
headlights behind. 03
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or
objects in the seats or in the cargo area in
such a way that light is prevented from
reaching the sensors, then the dimming
function of the interior rearview and door
mirrors is reduced.
Control for dimming Rearview mirror with compass.
The compass (p. 107) can only be specified The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
Manual dimming for a rearview mirror with automatic dimming. mirror has an integrated display that shows
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the compass direction in which the front of
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use Related information the car is pointing. Eight different directions
dimming with the dimming control when • Door mirrors (p. 105) are shown with English abbreviations: N
lights from behind are distracting: (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south
1. Use dimming by moving the control in east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west)
towards the passenger compartment. and NW (north west).
2. Return to normal position by moving the The compass is activated automatically when
control towards the windscreen. the car is started or when key position II is
active, see Key positions - functions at differ-
Automatic dimming* ent levels (p. 81). To deactivate/activate the
Bright light from behind is automatically compass - press in the button on the under-
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control
}}

||
side of the mirror using a paper clip for exam- 7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the
ple. character C is shown in the display when
the heated windscreen is activated, per-
Calibration form the calibration in accordance with
The compass may need calibrating to show point 6 above with the heated windscreen
the correct compass direction. activated, see Demisting and defrosting
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. the windscreen (p. 132).
The compass should be calibrated if the car
is moved across several magnetic zones. 8. Repeat the above procedure as neces-
03 sary.
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
G030295
1. Stop the car in a large open area free
from steel structures and high-voltage Magnetic zones.
power lines.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) See the map of magnetic zones for the
and ensure that all doors are closed. compass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing
NOTE the character C, or hold the button on the
Calibration may fail or not start at all if underside of the rearview mirror
electrical equipment is not switched off. depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the
character C is shown.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
rearview mirror depressed (use a paper more than 10 km/h until a compass direc-
clip or similar) for approx. 3 seconds. The tion is shown in the display, indicating
number of the current magnetic zone is that calibration is complete. Then drive a
shown. further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.

Sunroof* Opening WARNING

The sunroof can be operated with a control in For maximum sunroof opening, move the
control back to the position for automatic If there are children in the car:
the roof panel.
opening and release. Remember to always switch off the power
The sunroof's inner sunscreen is closed man- supply to the sunroof by selecting key
ually. Open manually by pulling the control back- position 0 and then take the remote con-
wards to the point of resistance for manual trol key with you when leaving the car. For
The sunroof has a wind deflector. opening. The sunroof moves to maximum information on key positions - see Key
The sunroof controls are located in the roof open position as long as the button is kept positions - functions at different levels
depressed. (p. 81). 03
panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically
at the rear edge and horizontally. Key position Closing
I or II is required for the sunroof to be Close manually by pushing the control for- Vertical opening
opened. wards to the point of resistance for manual
closing. The sunroof moves to closed posi-
Horizontal opening tion as long as the button is kept depressed.
WARNING
Risk of crushing when the sunroof is
closed. The sunroof's pinch-protection
function only operates during automatic
closing, not manual.
G028900
Close automatically by pressing the control to
the position for automatic closing and then
Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.
release it.
G017823
Open by pressing the rear edge of the

The power supply to the sunroof is switched control upward.
Horizontal opening, backward/forward. off by selecting key position 0 and removing
Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-
Opening, automatic the remote control key from the ignition
trol down.
switch.
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
}}

||
Closing using the remote control key or Pinch protection Menu navigation - combined
central locking button The sunroof's pinch protection function is instrument panel
triggered if it is blocked by an object during The left-hand stalk controls the menus
automatic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will (p. 111) shown on the information display in
stop and automatically open to the previous the combined instrument panel (p. 66). Which
position. menus are shown depends on the key posi-
tion (p. 81).
Wind deflector
03
G021345
One long press on the lock button closes the

sunroof and all the windows, see Remote
control key - functions (p. 163) and Locking/
unlocking - from the inside (p. 176). The
doors and the tailgate are locked. To interrupt
closing, press the lock button again. Display and controls for menu navigation.
The sunroof has a wind deflector that is
folded up when the sunroof is in the open OK – access to message list and mes-
WARNING sage confirmation.
position.
If the sunroof is closed with the remote Thumbwheel – browse between menu
control key, check that no one risks being options.
trapped.
RESET – reset the active function. Used
in certain cases to select/activate a func-
Sunscreen tion, see the explanation under each
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior respective function.
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-
If there is a message (p. 111) then it must be
matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip
acknowledged with OK in order that the
the handle and slide the screen forward to
menus shall be shown.
close it.
110

Related information Menu overview - combined Messages

• Messages - handling (p. 112) instrument panel When a warning, information or indicator
Which menus are shown in the combined symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
instrument panel's information display appears on the information display.
depends on the key position (p. 81).
Message Specification
Some of the following menu options require
the function and hardware to be installed in Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the
the car. engine. Serious risk of
03
damage - consult a work-
Settings*
shopB.
Themes
Stop engineA Stop and switch off the
Contrast mode/Colour mode engine. Serious risk of
Service status damage - consult a work-
shopB.
Messages15
Service Contact a workshopB to
Oil level16
urgentA check the car immedi-
Preconditioning ately.
Trip computer reset Service Contact a workshopB to
requiredA check the car as soon as
Related information possible.
• Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 67) See manualA Read the owner's man-
• Menu navigation - combined instrument ual.
panel (p. 110)
Book time Time to book regular
for mainte- service - contact a work-
nance shopB.
15 The number of messages is indicated in brackets.

16 Certain engines.
}}

||
Message Specification Message Specification Messages - handling
Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge
Time for reg- Time for regular service - Transmission Critical fault. Stop the car and browse among messages (p. 111) that
ular mainte- contact a workshopB. The hot Stop immediately in a safe are shown in the information display of the
nance timing is determined by safely Wait manner and contact a combined instrument panel.
the number of kilometres for cooling workshopB.
driven, number of months When a warning, information or indicator
since the last service, Temporarily A function has been tem- symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
engine running time and offA porarily switched off and appears in the display at the same time. An
03 is reset automatically error message is stored in a memory list until
oil grade.
while driving or after star- the fault has been rectified.
Maintenance If the service intervals are ting again.
Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to
overdue not followed then the
Low battery The audio system is acknowledge a message. Scroll through mes-
warranty does not cover
charge switched off to save sages with the thumbwheel (p. 110).
any damaged parts -
contact a workshopB. Power save energy. Charge the bat-
mode tery. NOTE
Transmission Contact a workshopB to If a warning message appears while you
A Part of message, shown together with information on
Oil change check the car as soon as where the problem has arisen. are using the trip computer, the message
needed possible. B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. must be read (press OK) before the previ-
C For more information regarding the automatic gearbox, see
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 272). ous activity can be resumed.
Transmission The gearbox cannot han-
Reduced dle full capacity. Drive Related information
Related information
performance carefully until the mes- • Messages - handling (p. 112)
sage clearsC. • Menu overview - combined instrument
• Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 111)
If shown repeatedly - panel (p. 110)
contact a workshopB.
Transmission Drive more smoothly or

hot Reduce stop the car in a safe
speed manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clearsC.
112

MY CAR vary, depending on the equipment selected and

the market.
MY CAR is a menu source that handles many
of the car's functions, e.g. City Safety™, locks MY CAR - opens the menu system MY
and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the CAR.
clock, etc. OK/MENU - press the button in the cen-
tre console or the thumbwheel on the
Certain functions are standard, others are steering wheel to select/tick in the high-
optional - the range also varies depending on lighted menu option or store the selected
the market. function in the memory. 03
Operation TUNE - turn the knob in the centre con-
Navigation in the menus is carried out using sole or the thumbwheel on the steering
buttons in the centre console or with the wheel to scroll up/down through the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad*. menu options.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on
when EXIT is depressed briefly, and on which
menu level, one of the following may occur:
• phone call is rejected
• current function is interrupted
• input characters are deleted
• most recent selections are undone
• leads up in the menu system.
A long press on EXIT leads to the normal
view for MY CAR or if you are in the normal
Control panel in centre console and steering
wheel keypad. The figure is schematic - the num- view, to the highest menu level (main source
ber of functions and layout of the buttons both menu).
}}

||
Menu options and search paths Trip computer Related information
For a description of the menu options and The car's trip computer can record, calculate • Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 120)
search paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus and show information while driving. • Trip computer - supplementary informa-
Infotainment supplement. tion (p. 119)
• Trip computer - content (p. 115)
Checking and settings can be made immedi-
ately after the combined instrument panel is
automatically illuminated in connection with
03 unlocking. If none of the trip computer's con-
trols are actuated within approx. 30 seconds
after the driver's door has been opened then
the instrument extinguishes, after which
either key position II (p. 81) or engine starting
is required in order to operate the trip com-
puter.
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the
trip computer is used then the message
must first be acknowledged before the trip
computer can be reactivated.
• Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Group menus
The trip computer has two different group
menus:
• Functions
• Heading in combined instrument panel
The trip computer's functions or headings
are each listed in an infinite loop.

Trip computer - digital combined Functions

instrument panel Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
functions:
The trip computer's menu is in a variable
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
computer's three displays extinguish - this
two presses on RESET.
also marks the start/end of the loop.
2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK. 03
4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after

completed checking/adjustment.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:
Information displays and stalk switch controls.

OK - Opens the loop with the trip com-
puter's functions + Activates the selected
option.
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.
}}
115

||
Functions Information
Trip computer reset Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2 - see table under next sec-
tion "Headings" and section "Resetting - Average speed/consumption" for information on the
• Average
process.
• Average speed
Messages For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 112).
03 Themes The appearance of the combined instrument panel (p. 66) is selected here.
Settings* Select Auto On or Off.

For more information, see General information about heaters (p. 144).
Contrast mode/Colour mode Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.
Preconditioning For a description of programming the timer, see Timer - setting (p. 140).
• Direct start
• - Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
• - Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
Service status Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.
Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 355).
A Certain engines.

Headings One of the heading combinations in the fol-

lowing table can be selected for constant dis-
play in the combined instrument panel. Pro-
ceed as follows to determine which:
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
two presses on RESET.
2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head-
ing combinations are shown in a loop. 03
3. Stop on desired heading combination.
Three trip computer headings can be displayed

simultaneously - one in each "window".
Heading combinations Information

Battery status Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Distance to empty bat- • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
tery
Average Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Average speed • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty tank • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
Instantaneous Meter reading kmh<>mph kmh<>mph - see section "Digital speed display" (p. 119).
No trip computer information. This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays - it also
marks the beginning/end of the loop.
The combined instrument panel's heading • Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the Resetting - Trip meter
combination for the trip computer can be desired heading. Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading
changed to another option at any time during combination containing the trip meter to be
the journey. Proceed as follows: reset:
}}
117

||
• Give a long press on RESET - selected
trip meter is zeroed.
Resetting - Average speed/

consumption
1. Select function Trip computer
reset and activate with OK.
2. Select one of the following options with
03
the thumbwheel and activate with OK:
• l/100 km
• km/h
• Reset both
3. Finish with RESET.
Related information
• Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 119)
• Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 120)

Trip computer - supplementary No guaranteed range remains when the head- conservation. The more consumers there are
information ing Distance to empty shows "----". (stereo, electric heating in windows/mirrors/
Supplementary information covering several seats, very cold air from the climate control
• In which case, refuel as soon as possible.
system, etc.) that are active - the shorter the
functions follows below.
The calculation is based on the average fuel potential mileage.
Average consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity.
Average fuel consumption is calculated from NOTE
the last resetting. Distance to empty battery In addition to high current take-off in the
NOTE No guaranteed range remains when the dis- passenger compartment, sudden acceler- 03
play shows "---- km to empty battery". The ation and braking, high speed, heavy
There may be a slight error in the reading if display shows the approximate distance that loads, low outside temperature and uphill
a fuel-driven heater* has been used. gradients also reduce the possible driving
can be driven with the energy quantity
distance.
remaining in the hybrid battery.
Average speed
The calculation is based on the average fuel
The average speed is calculated for the driv- Digital speed display
consumption with normally loaded car, with
ing distance driven since the last reset to The speed is shown in the opposite unit
normal driving and not too many power con-
zero. (kmh/mph) in relation to the main instrument.
sumers (stereo, AC, seat heating, etc).
If it is calibrated in mph then the trip com-
Instantaneous puter shows the corresponding speed in
The information for current fuel consumption NOTE km/h and vice versa.
is updated continuously - approximately once There may be a slight error in the reading if
per second. When the car is driven at low the driving style has been changed. Change unit
speed the consumption is shown per time You can change unit (km/miles) for distance
unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to and speed in the menu system MY CAR, see
An economic driving style generally results in
mileage. MY CAR (p. 113).
a longer driving distance. For more informa-
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for tion on how energy consumption can be influ-
the display - see section "Change unit" enced, see Volvo Car Corporation 's Environ- NOTE
(p. 119). mental Philosophy (p. 21). In addition to in the trip computer, these
units are also changed in Volvo's naviga-
Range - distance to empty tank Mileage for electric operation tion system*.
The trip computer shows the approximate In order to achieve the longest possible mile-
distance that can be driven with the fuel age for electric operation, the driver of an
Related information
quantity remaining in the tank. electric car also has to think about energy
• Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 120)

Trip computer - trip statistics* 10 km - the cursor on the far right changes
Information is stored about completed trips position between up and down in relation to
containing average fuel consumption and the scale selected.
average speed, which can be viewed in the
Operation
centre console's screen as a bar chart.
Different settings can be made in the menu
Function system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113) -
there, find Trip statistics.
03 With the "Reset when vehicle has been off

for minimum 4h" option highlighted, all sta-
tistics are deleted automatically once driving
is complete and the car has been stopped for
4 hours. Trip statistics start again from zero
the next time the engine is started.
• Reset when vehicle has been off for
minimum 4h - highlight the box by
selecting ENTER and go back out of the
menu by selecting EXIT.
Trip statistics17. If a new driving cycle is started before
4 hours have elapsed then the current period
Fuel and electricity consumption are shown in must first be deleted manually using the
separate graphs. Electricity consumption is "Start new trip" option.
"net" consumption, i.e. energy consumed
minus regenerated energy created during • Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete
braking. all previous statistics, go back out of the
menu by selecting EXIT.
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven
See also information on Eco guide (p. 71).
distance, depending on the scale selected -
the bar at the far right shows the value for the Related information
current kilometre or 10 km. • Trip computer - supplementary informa-
Using the TUNE control, the scale for the tion (p. 119)
bars can be changed between 1 km and
17 The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.

CLIMATE CONTROL

04 Climate control
General information on climate NOTE misting, keep the windows clean and use
control window cleaner.
Air conditioning (AC) (p. 131) can be
The car is equipped with electronic climate switched off, but to ensure the best possi- Related information
control (p. 128). The climate control system ble climate comfort in the passenger com- • Actual temperature (p. 123)
cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air partment, and to prevent the windows
in the passenger compartment. from misting, it should always be switched • Menu settings - climate control (p. 125)
on. • Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 128)
When the climate control system is activated
it is recommended that the panel's air vents
• Air distribution in the passenger compart-
To bear in mind ment (p. 126)
are fully open in order to obtain the most effi-
cient air conditioning possible. • To ensure that the air conditioning works • Air cleaning (p. 123)
optimally, the side windows, and sunroof*
If there is no heat from the coolant then the should be closed.
electrically-driven heater is used primarily. In • Total airing function (p. 177) opens/
04
colder weather the car's fuel-driven heater closes all side windows simultaneously
can also be started. and can be used for example to quickly
The engine block heater, fuel-driven heater air the car during hot weather.
and electrically-driven heater are used as • Remove ice and snow from the climate
heat sources during driving. The heat control system air intake (the grille
source(s) used depends on the prevailing between the bonnet and the windscreen).
conditions, e.g. ambient temperature. • When running at idling speed, precondi-
During driving the car automatically starts the tioning or charging the hybrid battery
systems needed to maintain comfort inside (p. 302) in hot weather, condensation
the passenger compartment - except in drive from the air conditioning may drip under
mode (p. 265) PURE, when climate comfort the car. This is normal.
is deprioritised, e.g. AC and certain electri- • When the engine requires full power, e.g.
cally-driven sources are switched off. for full acceleration or driving uphill with a
trailer, the air conditioning can be tempo-
The climate in the car's passenger compart- rarily switched off. There may then be a
ment can be preconditioned (p. 136) (accli- temporary increase in temperature in the
matised) before departure, in both hot and passenger compartment.
cold climates.
• Remove misting on the insides of the win-
dows primarily by using the defroster
function (p. 132). To reduce the risk of

04 Climate control
Actual temperature Sensors - climate control Air cleaning

The temperature you select in the passenger The climate control system has a number of The interior in a passenger compartment is
compartment corresponds to the physical sensors to help control the temperature designed to be pleasant and comfortable,
experience with reference to factors such as (p. 123) in the car. even for people with contact allergies and for
ambient temperature, air speed, humidity and asthma sufferers.
solar radiation etc. in and around the car at • The sun sensor is located on the top side
the time. of the dashboard. • Passenger compartment filter (p. 124)
• The temperature sensor for the passen- • Material in the passenger compart-
The system includes a sun sensor (p. 123) ger compartment is located below the cli- ment (p. 125)
which detects on which side the sun is shin- mate control panel.
ing into the passenger compartment. This
• Clean Zone Interior Package
• The outside temperature sensor is (CZIP) (p. 124)*
means that the temperature can differ located in the door mirror.
between the right and left-hand air vents • Interior Air Quality System
despite the controls being set for the same • The humidity sensor* is located by the (IAQS) (p. 125)* 04
interior rearview mirror.
temperature on both sides. Related information
Related information NOTE • General information on climate control
(p. 122)
• General information on climate control Do not cover or block the sensors with
(p. 122) clothing or other objects.
• Temperature control in the passenger
compartment (p. 131)
Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 122)

04 Climate control
Air cleaning - passenger Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior NOTE

compartment filter Package (CZIP)*
To keep the CZIP standard in cars with
All air entering the car's passenger compart- CZIP comprises a series of modifications that CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed after
ment is cleaned with a filter. keep the passenger compartment even 15 000 km or once per year depending on
clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing sub- whichever occurs first. However, up to
The filter must be replaced at regular inter- stances. 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without
vals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for CZIP and where the customer does not
the recommended replacement intervals. If The following is included: want to keep the CZIP standard the IAQS
the car is used in a severely contaminated filter must be changed at a regular service.
environment, it may be necessary to replace
• An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the filter more often. the remote control key. The fan fills the For more information on CZIP, see the bro-
passenger compartment with fresh air. chure included with the purchase of the car.
NOTE The function starts when required and is
04 disengaged automatically after a time or Related information
There are different types of passenger
compartment filter. Make sure that the cor- when one of the passenger compartment • General information on climate control
rect filter is fitted. doors is opened. The amount of time the (p. 122)
fan runs is reduced gradually due to • Air cleaning (p. 123)
reduced need up until the car is 4 years
Related information old.
• Air cleaning (p. 123)
• The air quality system IAQS (p. 125) is a
fully automatic system that cleans the air
in the passenger compartment from con-
taminants such as particles, hydrocar-
bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone.

04 Climate control
Air cleaning - IAQS* Air cleaning - material Menu settings - climate control
The air quality system IAQS separates gases Tested materials have been developed in It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
and particles to reduce the levels of odours order to minimise the quantity of dust in the the default settings for six of the climate con-
and pollution in the passenger compartment. passenger compartment and to contribute to trol system's functions via the centre console.
making the passenger compartment easier to
If the outside air is contaminated then the air keep clean. • Fan level during automatic climate control
intake is closed and the air is recirculated. (p. 130).
The carpets in both the passenger compart- • Recirculation timer (p. 132).
It is possible to activate/deactivate the func-
ment and the cargo area are removable and
tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a
easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
• Automatic start of rear window defroster
description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).
agents and car care products recommended
(p. 113). • Interior air quality system (p. 125)*.
by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 390).
• Automatic start of seat heating driver
NOTE Related information (p. 129). 04
The air quality sensor must always be ena- • Air cleaning (p. 123)
• Automatic start of steering wheel heating
bled to ensure the best air in the passen- (p. 88).
ger compartment.
More information is available in the descrip-
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so tion of the menu system (p. 113).
as to prevent misting.
The climate control system's functions can be
In the event of misting, the air quality sen-
sor should be disengaged, and the reset in the menu system MY CAR to the
defroster functions for the windscreen and default settings. For a description of the
side windows, as well as the rear window, menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).
should be used.
Related information
Related information • General information on climate control
(p. 122)
(p. 122)
• Air cleaning (p. 123)
• Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Pack-
age (CZIP)* (p. 124)

04 Climate control
Air distribution in the passenger Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars
compartment
The incoming air is divided between a number
of different vents in the passenger compart-
ment.
04
Open Closed
Closed Open
Lateral airflow Lateral airflow
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO Vertical airflow Vertical airflow

mode.
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist-
If necessary it can be controlled manually; remove misting. ing in cold weather.
see the air distribution table (p. 134).
Aim the vents into the passenger compart-
ment to maintain a comfortable climate in the
rear seat in hot weather.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sen-
sitive to air flows and draughts.
126

04 Climate control
Air distribution
The selected air distribution is shown in the cen-

tre console display screen. 04
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Related information
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - ventilation floor (p. 122)
• Auto-regulation (p. 130)
The figure consists of three buttons. When
pressing the buttons the corresponding figure • Air distribution - recirculation (p. 132)
is illuminated in the display screen (see fol-
lowing figure) and an arrow in front of each
part of the figure shows the air distribution
that is selected. For more information, see the
air distribution table (p. 134).
127

04 Climate control
Electronic climate control - ECC compartment and can be set separately for The auto function is used to automatically
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the driver's side and passenger side. control temperature, air conditioning, fan
the temperature selected in the passenger speed, recirculation and air distribution.
04
Temperature control (p. 131), left-hand Electrically heated front seat (p. 129),
side right side
Electrically heated front seat (p. 129), left Temperature control (p. 131), right-hand
side side
Max. defroster (p. 132) Recirculation (p. 132)
Fan (p. 130) AUTO - Automatic climate control

(p. 130)
Air distribution (p. 126) - ventilation floor
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 131)
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Related information
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrost- (p. 122)
ers (p. 106)
128

04 Climate control
Heated front seats* • Lowest heat level - one orange field illu- Heated rear seat*
The front seat heating has three positions for minates in the screen. The heating for the rear seat's1 outer posi-
increasing the comfort for driver and passen- • Switch off the heat - no field illuminates. tions has three positions for increasing the
ger when it is cold. comfort for passengers when it is cold.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation
or who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Other-
wise they may suffer burn injuries.
Automatic start of driver's seat heating 04

With the automatic start of the driver's seat
heating activated, the driver's seat will have
the highest heat level when the engine is
started.
Current heat level is shown in the centre console Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's
display screen. Automatic start takes place when the car is lamps.
cold and the ambient temperature is lower Press the button repeatedly in order to acti-
than approx. +10 °C. vate the function:
It is possible to activate/deactivate the func- • Highest heat level - three lamps illumi-
tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a nate.
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 113).
• Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.
• Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.
Press the button repeatedly in order to acti- Related information
vate the function: • Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.
• Highest heat level - three orange fields (p. 122)
illuminate in the centre console's screen • Heated rear seat* (p. 129)
(see figure above).
• Lower heat level - two orange fields illu-
minate in the screen.
}}

04 Climate control
||
WARNING Fan Auto-regulation
The fan should always be activated in order to The auto function automatically regulates
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase avoid misting on the windows. temperature (p. 131), air conditioning
in temperature due to a lack of sensation (p. 131), fan speed (p. 130), recirculation
or who otherwise have problems operating NOTE (p. 132) and air distribution (p. 126).
the controls for the heated seats. Other- If the fan is fully switched off then the air
wise they may suffer burn injuries. If you select one or more
conditioning is not engaged - which can manual functions, the other
cause a risk of misting on the windows.
functions continue to be
Related information controlled automatically. All
• General information on climate control Fan knob manual settings are disen-
(p. 122) Turn the knob to increase or gaged when AUTO is
• Heated front seats* (p. 129) decrease fan speed. If AUTO pressed. The display screen
04 is selected, then the fan shows AUTO CLIMATE.
speed is regulated automati-
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in
cally (p. 130) - the fan speed
the menu system MY CAR. For a description
previously set is disengaged.
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Related information Related information
(p. 122) (p. 122)
• Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 128)
1 Heated rear seat is not specified with the option for integrated two-stage booster seat (p. 51).

04 Climate control
Temperature control in the passenger Related information Air conditioning

compartment • General information on climate control The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
When the car is started, the most recent tem- (p. 122) incoming air as required.
perature setting is resumed. • Actual temperature (p. 123)
In drive mode (p. 265) PURE
• Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 128) the AC is preset not to start.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by When the lamp in the AC
selecting a higher or lower temperature button illuminates, the air
than the actual desired temperature. conditioning is controlled by
the system's automatic func-
tion.
When the lamp in the AC button is switched
off the air conditioning is disconnected. Other 04
functions are still controlled automatically.
When the max. defroster function (p. 132) is
activated, the air conditioning is switched on
automatically so that the air is dehumidified at
the maximum setting.
Current temperature for each side is shown in

the centre console's display screen.
The temperature can be
adjusted with the knob -
separately for the driver's
side and the passenger side.
131

04 Climate control
Demisting and defrosting the Related information Air distribution - recirculation

windscreen • General information on climate control Select recirculation to shut out bad air,
Max. defroster is used to quickly remove mist- (p. 122) exhaust gases etc. from the passenger com-
ing and ice from the windscreen and side win- partment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the
dows. car when this function is activated.
Air flowing to the windows. When recirculation is

The light in the defroster but- engaged the orange lamp in
ton illuminates when the the button illuminates.
function is active.
04 The following also takes place in order to pro-

vide maximum dehumidification in the pas- IMPORTANT
senger compartment: If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of misting on the insides of
• the air conditioning is automatically
the windows.
engaged
• recirculation and the air quality system
are automatically disengaged. Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
NOTE
according to a time that depends on the out-
The noise level increases as the fan is side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
operating at max. misting and bad air.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the func-
When the defroster is switched off the climate tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a
control returns to the previous settings. description of the menu system, see MY CAR
In drive mode PURE, activation of the (p. 113).
defroster function may cause the internal
combustion engine to start and change to NOTE
drive mode (p. 265) HYBRID.
When max. defroster is selected, recircula-
tion is always deactivated.
132

04 Climate control
Related information
(p. 122)
• Air distribution in the passenger compart-
ment (p. 126)
• Air distribution - table (p. 134)
04
133

04 Climate control
Air distribution - table

Three buttons are used to select the distribu-
tion (p. 126) of the air.
Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not to remove ice and misting quickly.
recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.
Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate,
04
flows from the air vents. (not at too low fan speed to enable this).
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents. to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Airflow to the head and chest from dashboard air vents. to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
134

04 Climate control
Air distribution Use

Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in
air vents. cold or humid weather.
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.
04
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and win- to direct heat or cold to the floor.
dows.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. to provide cooling along the floor in hot, dry weather or
warming upwards in cold weather.
Related information
(p. 122)
• Air distribution - recirculation (p. 132)
135

04 Climate control
General information about NOTE When the car is plugged into the mains
preconditioning power circuit
The compressor can operate and cool the
The climate in the car's passenger compart- hybrid battery even when passenger com- • Heating/cooling can last up to 50
ment can be preconditioned (acclimatised) partment cooling is not selected or minutes.
before departure, in both hot and cold cli- required. The compressor emits noise. • Seat and steering wheel heating can be
mates. activated during preconditioning.
In different cases, the preconditioning uses NOTE When the car is not plugged into the
the car's fuel-driven and electrically-driven mains power circuit*
The car's doors and windows should be
heaters and the car's AC system: closed during the preconditioning of the
• Heating can last up to 50 minutes.
• In a cold climate the fuel-driven heater passenger compartment. • Cooling takes place for 2-3 minutes.
heats both the engine and the passenger During preconditioning, the electrically-driven
compartment - the electrically-driven Options for preconditioning heater and AC system use power from the
04 heater only heats the passenger compart- hybrid battery. If the car is not connected to
Select from the following:
ment before departure. the mains power circuit during precondition-
• In a hot climate the AC system cools the • parking inside (p. 137) ing then the mileage for electric operation is
passenger compartment. • parking outside (p. 137). reduced accordingly.
Preconditioning the car reduces wear. Preconditioning can then be activated:
During preconditioning in warm weather, con- • directly (p. 138) via the information dis-
densation from the air conditioning may drip play, remote control key* or mobile*
under the car. This is normal. • with timer (p. 139).
NOTE NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger Volvo recommends that you activate pre-
compartment, the car works to reach com- conditioning via the timer, and then have
fort temperature and not the temperature the car connected to the mains power cir-
set in the climate control system. cuit.
Connection to the mains power circuit

The car can be preconditioned both when
connected (p. 302) and not connected* to the
mains power circuit.

04 Climate control
Preconditioning - parking inside 3. If the setting Indoor parking has already Preconditioning - parking outside
With the Indoor parking option the electri- been made then the symbol for this is With the Outdoor parking option, both the
cally-driven heater is activated during precon- shown in the display, in which case con- electrically-driven heater and the fuel-driven
ditioning (p. 136). tinue from point 7. heater4 are activated during preconditioning
4. If Outdoor parking is selected then the (p. 136).
If you select the Indoor parking
symbol for this (p. 137) is shown instead.
setting then the fuel-driven heater is With the Outdoor parking option,
Scroll with the thumbwheel to the symbol
deactivated during preconditioning. in addition to the electrically-driven
and select with OK.
This heating will have a slightly heater, the fuel-driven heater is also
lower performance than the Outdoor 5. Scroll forward in the next menu to Indoor permitted during preconditioning.
parking setting in outside temperatures parking and select with OK.
lower than 5 °C. 6. Go back in the menu with RESET. WARNING
7. Select whether or not seat heating and Do not use the fuel-driven auxiliary heater 04
NOTE indoors in unventilated areas. Exhaust
steering wheel heating2 should be acti-
The car must be connected to the mains fumes are given off.
vated. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
power circuit before the electrically-driven
heater can be activated. and select with OK.
NOTE
8. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Driver
seat or Passenger seat and select with The car can be started and driven even
WARNING when the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is run-
the OK button if they should be acti-
Do not use the fuel-driven auxiliary heater ning.
vated3 during preconditioning.
indoors in unventilated areas. Exhaust
fumes are given off. 9. Exit the menu with RESET. 1. Press OK to access the menu.
Related information 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
1. Press OK to access the menu.
• Preconditioning - direct start (p. 138) Preconditioning and select with OK.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to • Preconditioning - immediate stop 3. If the setting Outdoor parking has
Preconditioning and select with OK. (p. 139) already been made then the symbol for
this is shown in the display, in which case
continue from point 7.
2 Seat heating and steering wheel heating can only be activated when the car is plugged into the mains power circuit.
3 Tick the box to activate.
4 The fuel-driven heater is not activated if the outside temperature exceeds 15 °C.
}}
137

04 Climate control
||
4. If Indoor parking is selected then the Preconditioning - direct start Direct start via the remote control key*
symbol for this (p. 137) is shown instead. Preconditioning of the car can be started
Scroll with the thumbwheel to the symbol directly.
and select with OK.
Direct start can be performed via:
5. Scroll forward in the next menu to
Outdoor parking and select with OK. • information display
6. Go back in the menu with RESET. • remote control key*
7. Select whether or not seat heating and

• mobile*.
steering wheel heating5 should be acti-
vated. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
NOTE
and select with OK. In the event of direct start of precondition-
ing, Volvo recommends that you activate
04 8. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Driver via the remote control key or mobile. Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*.
seat or Passenger seat and select with
Preconditioning can be activated via the
the OK button if they should be acti-
Direct start via the information display remote control key:
vated5 during preconditioning.
– Hold the button for approach lighting
9. Exit the menu with RESET.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to depressed for 2 seconds.
Related information Preconditioning and select with OK.
Hazard warning flashers provide informa-
• Preconditioning - direct start (p. 138) 3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct tion in accordance with the following:
• Preconditioning - immediate stop start in order to activate the precondi-
(p. 139) tioning and select with OK. • 5 short flashes followed by a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal
4. Exit the menu with RESET. has reached the car and precondition-
ing has been activated.
• 5 short flashes - the signal has
reached the car but preconditioning
has not been activated.
• Hazard warning flashers remain
switched off - the signal has not
reached the car.
5 Seat heating and steering wheel heating can only be activated when the car is plugged into the mains power circuit.

04 Climate control
If the button for information is depressed Preconditioning - immediate stop Preconditioning - timer
when preconditioning is active then the indi- Preconditioning of the car can be deactivated Preconditioning (p. 136) timer is connected to
cator lamp will show the status for this - at directly via the information display. the car's clock.
the same time the car's lock status (p. 165) is
1. Press OK to access the menu. The time when the car shall be used and
shown. While the status is being investigated
acclimatised is specified with the timer.
the indicator lamp emits a pair of short 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
flashes followed by a constant glow if pre- Preconditioning and select with OK. Two different times can be selected using the
conditioning is active. timer (p. 140). The car's electronics select
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Stop in
Status is also shown in the trip computer when preconditioning shall be activated
order to deactivate the preconditioning
while preconditioning is in progress. based on prevailing external climatic condi-
and select with OK.
tions.
Direct start via a mobile* 4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Activation and information about the selected NOTE
settings that can be managed from a mobile Related information 04
phone will be available via the Volvo On Call* • Preconditioning - direct start (p. 138) All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
mobile app. • Preconditioning - timer (p. 139)
Related information
• Preconditioning - messages (p. 142)
Related information
• Preconditioning - timer (p. 139) • Timer - starting (p. 140)
• Preconditioning - immediate stop • Timer - switching off (p. 141)
(p. 139)
• Preconditioning - messages (p. 142)

04 Climate control
Timer - setting Related information Timer - starting

Two different times can be selected using the • Preconditioning - timer (p. 139) The time when the car shall be used and
timer. Here, "time" refers to the time when the • Timer - starting (p. 140) acclimatised is specified with the timer.
car shall be used and acclimatised.
• Timer - switching off (p. 141) When the timer is activated the car's electron-
ics choose when preconditioning should be
NOTE
activated based on prevailing outside climatic
All timer programming will be cleared if the conditions.
car's clock is reset.
1. Press OK to access the menu. 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel (p. 110) to
Preconditioning and select with OK. 3. Select one of the two timers using the
04 thumbwheel and activate with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK. 4. Exit the menu with RESET.
4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours It is also possible to start the timer via the
setting. Volvo On Call* mobile app.
5. Select the required hour using the thumb- Related information
wheel. • Preconditioning - timer (p. 139)
6. Briefly press OK to move to the lit • Timer - setting (p. 140)
minutes setting.
• Timer - switching off (p. 141)
7. Select the required minute using the • Menu navigation - combined instrument
thumbwheel. panel (p. 110)
8. Press OK6 to confirm the setting.
9. Go back in the menu structure using
RESET.
10. Select the other time (continue from step
2) or exit the menu with RESET.
6 Press OK again to activate the timer.

04 Climate control
Timer - switching off

An activated timer for preconditioning, can be
switched off manually.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
> If a timer is set then a clock symbol is
shown next to the set time.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4. Deactivate the timer as follows:
04
• long press on OK or
• short press on OK to continue in the
menu. Then select to stop the timer
and confirm with OK.
A timer activated for preconditioning can also
be deactivated (p. 139) .
Related information
• Preconditioning - timer (p. 139)
• Timer - starting (p. 140)
• Timer - setting (p. 140)
• Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 110)
141

04 Climate control
Preconditioning - messages When one of the timers has been activated, Symbol in the display for activated
Symbols and messages regarding precondi- the symbol for activated timer illuminates in timer.
tioning (p. 136). the display at the same time as the set time is
shown next to the symbol.
When the fuel-driven heater has The table shows symbols and display texts
been activated the heat symbol illu- that appear.
minates in the information display.
Symbol Display Specification

Auto heater ON The fuel-driven heater is switched on and operating.
The heater's timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition
04 switch and leaving the car - the engine and passenger compartment are heated at the set time.
Fuel operated heater stopped The fuel-driven heater is stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.
Battery saving mode The starter battery's charge level is too low.
Fuel operated heater stopped The fuel-driven heater is stopped.

Low fuel level Setting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate star-
ting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.
Fuel operated heater Service The fuel-driven heater is fully or partially disengaged.
required Visit a workshop if the message remains. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Preconditioning interrupted The electrically-driven heater or AC system is stopped.

by power supply change The transfer of energy is interrupted.
142

04 Climate control
Symbol Display Specification

Preconditioning stopped due The electrically-driven heater or AC system is stopped.
to malfunction Visit a workshop. An authorised workshop is recommended.
Preconditioning stopped The electrically-driven heater or AC system is stopped.

Hybrid battery temperature The hybrid battery is too hot, wait until the temperature has returned to normal.
high
A display text clears automatically after a time

or after one press on the indicator stalk
(p. 110) OK button.
• Messages - handling (p. 112)
143

04 Climate control
General information about heaters Electrically-driven heater Fuel-driven heater

The engine needs to be kept warm in order to The car is equipped with electrically-driven The car is equipped with electrically-driven
reduce the environmental impact when it is and fuel-driven heater (p. 144). (p. 144) and fuel-driven heater.
started. As a consequence, the car is equip-
ped with electrically-driven heater and fuel- The electrically-driven heater cannot be con- In colder weather, the car's fuel-driven heater
driven heater. These heaters are used in order trolled manually but is activated automatically can be activated during warming-up. The
to achieve the correct operating temperature when required. heater starts automatically when extra heat is
for the engine and to generate sufficient heat required and is switched off automatically
in the passenger compartment. NOTE when not required.
If the electrically-driven heater is activated
• Electrically-driven heater (p. 144)
then the charging time for the hybrid bat- NOTE
• Fuel-driven heater (p. 144) tery will be extended. The time required for When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is
heating the car is mainly determined by the active, exhaust fumes may be given off
04 outside temperature. from the right-hand wheel housing, which
is perfectly normal.
Related information
• General information about precondition- If you do not want the car's fuel-driven heater
ing (p. 136) to start during preconditioning, activate
• General information about heaters Indoor parking, see Preconditioning - park-
(p. 144) ing inside (p. 137). However, this may prolong
the warming-up time.
The fuel-driven heater cannot be started dur-
ing driving or preconditioning if the outside
temperature exceeds 15 °C. At -5 °C or lower
the maximum running time of the heater is 50
minutes during preconditioning.
If the fuel level in the tank is too low then the
fuel-driven heater is prevented from starting,
with inadequate heating as a result.
144

04 Climate control
NOTE Parking on a hill Fuel-driven heater - auto mode/

If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of deactivation
Make sure that there is sufficient fuel in the the car should point downhill to ensure that
car's regular fuel tank when driving at tem- The fuel-driven heater's automatic start
peratures below +15 °C. there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven sequence can be deactivated if required.
heater.
NOTE
WARNING Starter battery and fuel
If the starter battery has insufficient charge or If the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is deacti-
Do not use the fuel-driven auxiliary heater if the fuel level is too low, the heater will be vated, the diesel engine will start more fre-
indoors in unventilated areas. Exhaust quently in order to meet the need for heat
switched off automatically and a message is
fumes are given off. in drive mode PURE or HYBRID, i.e. elec-
shown in the combined instrument panel. trical operation will be restricted.
Acknowledge the message by pressing the
Refuelling indicator stalk (p. 110) OK button once.
1. Press the indicator stalk (p. 110) OK but-
04
Related information ton to access the menu.
• General information about precondition- 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Settings
ing (p. 136)
and select with OK.
• General information about heaters
(p. 144) 3. Select one of the alternatives Auto
heater ON or Auto heater OFF using
the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
Related information
• General information about precondition-
Warning label on fuel filler flap. ing (p. 136)
• General information about heaters
WARNING (p. 144)
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. • Fuel-driven heater (p. 144)
Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
before starting to refuel.
Check in the combined instrument panel
that the heater is switched off. The heat
symbol is shown when it is operating.
145

LOADING AND STORAGE

05 Loading and storage
Storage spaces
Overview of storage spaces in the passenger
compartment.
05
}}
147

||
Storage compartment in door panel
Storage pocket* on front edge of front

seat cushions
Ticket clip
Glovebox (p. 149)
Storage compartment
Storage compartment, cup

holder (p. 149)
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
WARNING
05 Keep loose objects such as mobile
phones, cameras, remote controls for
accessories, etc. in the glove compartment
or other compartments. Otherwise they
may injure people in the car in the event of
sudden braking or a collision.

Tunnel console Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and Glovebox

The tunnel console is located between the ashtray* The glovebox is located on the passenger
front seats. A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup side.
holder under the armrest. The cigarette lighter
is fitted in the 12 V socket (p. 150) for the
front seat.
The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 149) is

detached by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot.
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
Related information
• Storage spaces (p. 147)
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and The owner's manual and maps can be kept in
USB*/AUX input under the armrest. here for example. There are also holders for 05
Includes cup holder for driver and pas- pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox
senger. If ashtray and cigarette lighter can be locked (p. 177)* using the key blade
(p. 149) are specified, then there is a cig- (p. 167).
arette lighter in the 12 V socket (p. 150)
for the front seat, and a detachable ash- Related information
tray in the cup holder. • Storage spaces (p. 147)
Related information
• Storage spaces (p. 147)

Inlay mats* Vanity mirror Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets

Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the The electrical sockets (12 V) are located next
Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay sun visor. to the cup holder1 and rear of the tunnel con-
mats. sole.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by
the driver's seat is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins so that it does not get
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
Related information
• Cleaning the interior (p. 390)
Vanity mirror with lighting.

05 The light illuminates automatically when the 12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
cover is lifted.
Related information
• Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 365)
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
1 If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.

The electrical socket can be used for various IMPORTANT Loading

accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
screens, music players and mobile phones. Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket
For the socket to supply current, the remote is used at a time. If both sockets in the Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
tunnel console are used simultaneously,
control key must be in at least key position I The total of the weight of the passengers and
7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable.
(p. 81). all accessories reduces the car's payload by
If the compressor for emergency puncture a corresponding weight.
repair is connected to one of the two sock-
WARNING ets, no other current consumer must be For more detailed information on weights, see
Always leave the plug in the socket when connected to the other one. Weights (p. 399).
the socket is not in use. The tailgate is opened via a button
NOTE on the lighting panel or the remote
NOTE control key, see Locking/unlocking -
The compressor for emergency puncture
tailgate (p. 178).
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. repair (p. 332) has been tested and
display screens, music players and mobile approved by Volvo.
phones - which are connected to one of WARNING
the passenger compartment's 12V electri- Related information The car’s driving properties change
cal sockets, could be activated by the cli- depending on the weight and positioning
mate control system, even when the • Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and 05
ashtray* (p. 149) of the load.
remote control key has been removed or
when the car is locked, for example, when • 12 V electrical socket - cargo area*
the parking heater is activated at a preset (p. 153) To bear in mind when loading
time. • Position the load firmly against the rear
For this reason remove the plugs from the seat's backrest.
electrical sockets for optional equipment Note that objects must not prevent the func-
or accessories when not in use because tion of the WHIPS system for the front seats if
the battery could be drained in the event of any of the rear seat's backrests is folded
such an occurrence!
down, see WHIPS - seating position (p. 41).
• Centre the load.
• Heavy objects should be placed as low
as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
}}

||
• Cover sharp edges with something soft to Related information Loading - long load
avoid damaging the upholstery. • Load retaining eyelets (p. 153) To simplify loading (p. 151) in the cargo area,
• Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- • Safety net* (p. 154) the rear seat backrest can be folded down.
lets with straps or web lashings. The passenger seat2 backrest can also be
• Loading - long load (p. 152)
folded for an extra long load*.
WARNING • Roof load (p. 153)
Lowering the rear seat backrest
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h,
carry the impact of an item weighing seat backrest can be folded down, see Seats,
1000 kg. rear (p. 85).
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compro-
mised or eliminated by high loads.
• Never load cargo above the backrest.
05
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy
braking the load may otherwise shift, caus-
ing injury to the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the park-
ing brake when loading/unloading long
items. Otherwise you may accidentally
knock the gear lever or gear selector with
the load into a drive position - and the car
could then move off.
2 Only applies to comfort seats.

Roof load Load retaining eyelets 12 V electrical socket - cargo area*

The load carriers recommended for roof loads The folding load retaining eyelets are used to The electrical socket can be used for various
are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in fasten straps in order to anchor items in the accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display
order to avoid damage to the car and in order cargo area. screens, music players and mobile phones.
to achieve the maximum possible safety dur-
ing a journey.
Carefully follow the installation instructions

supplied with the carriers.
• Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
• Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
• The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load. Lower the cover to access the electrical 05
WARNING socket.
• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering. Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which • The socket also provides voltage when
protrude may cause injury under violent the remote control key is not in the igni-
WARNING braking.
tion switch.
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- Always secure large and heavy objects
racteristics are altered by roof loads. with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps. IMPORTANT
For information about the maximum per-
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).
mitted load on the roof, including load car- Related information
riers and any space box, see Weights • Loading (p. 151)
(p. 399). NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
Related information with the engine switched off involves the
• Loading (p. 151) risk of discharging the car's battery.
}}

||
NOTE Safety net*
A safety net prevents loads from being thrown
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and forward in the passenger compartment in the
approved by Volvo. For information on the event of sudden braking.
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), Emer-
gency puncture repair (p. 332).
Related information
• Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 150)
The two-part safety net cassette is secured

on the rear of the backrest. The narrowest
cassette is secured on the left-hand side
(seen from the tailgate).
05 Storage space, safety net cassettes. 1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward, see
A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes Seats, rear (p. 85).
has a storage space under the cargo area 2. Align the cassette's anchor rails in front of
floor hatch. the backrest attachment lugs .
Securing the net cassettes 3. Slide the cassette into the attachment
A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes lugs .
has a storage space under the cargo area
floor hatch. 4. Fold back and lock the backrests.
• Removing the cassette takes place in
reverse order.

Using the safety net Removing the net cassettes Safety net* combined with cargo
1. Roll the safety nets into the cassettes in cover
accordance with the procedure in the A safety net prevents loads from being thrown
section entitled "Using the safety net", forward in the passenger compartment in the
but in reverse. event of sudden braking.
2. Fold the whole backrest forward.
3. Slide the cassettes out until they loosen
from the anchor rails.
Store the cassettes in their compartment
under the cargo area floor hatch.
WARNING
Pull the net up from the cassettes. The net is Loads in the luggage compartment must
self-locking after approx. one minute if the be anchored well, and also using a cor-
rear seat's backrests are raised. rectly fitted safety net.
Pull up the right-hand section of the net 05
using its strap. Related information Puller-straps for raising the net.
Insert the rod in the mounting on the
• Loading (p. 151) The safety net can also be raised from the
right-hand side and then press it forward • Safety grille (p. 156) rear seat when the cargo cover is extended.
– the rod locks in with a click. Follow the procedure described in the section
Pull out the rod's telescope section and "Using the safety net" (p. 154). The straps for
click it in on the other side. folding up are located by the arrows.
Pull up the left-hand safety net and hook Related information
it into the rod. • Safety net* (p. 154)
• Folding up takes place in reverse order. • Loading (p. 151)
The net can also be used when the rear • Load retaining eyelets (p. 153)
seat's backrests are folded forward.

Safety grille For information about the tools required and Cargo cover
A safety grille prevents loads or pets from methods for fitting/removal, see the installa-
being thrown forward in the passenger com- tion instructions that were included with the
partment in the event of sudden braking. initial purchase.
For safety reasons, the safety grille must
always be correctly fastened and secured
when being refitted.
Related information
• Safety net* (p. 154)
• Loading (p. 151)
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 153)
Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it

into the recesses at the cargo area's rear
posts.
05
Folding up
Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille IMPORTANT
and pull back/up. The protective grille cannot be folded up
or down when the cargo cover is fitted.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up Attaching the cargo cover
or down when a cargo cover is fitted. Move one end piece of the cover into the
recess on the side panel.
Fitting/removal Move the other end piece into the corres-
The safety grille is normally permanently ponding recess.
installed in the car because it can easily be
Press both sides in. A "click" should be
folded up in the roof and so be out of the way
audible and the red marking should dis-
if a longer cargo area is required. However, if
appear.
desired, the safety grille can be dismantled
and removed from the car. > Check that both end pieces are
locked.

Removing the cargo cover

1. Press in one end piece button and lift it
out.
2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the
other end piece loosens automatically.
Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing

disc
In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear
sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the
cargo area when it is fitted.
– Pull the sealing disc back gently, free
from its support shelves, and lower.
Related information
• Loading (p. 151)
• Loading - long load (p. 152)
05
157

LOCKS AND ALARM

06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key All remote control keys have a detachable key Remote control key - losing
Amongst other things, the remote control key blade (p. 166) made of metal. The visible If you lose a remote control key then a new
is used for locking/unlocking and starting the section is available in two versions so that it one can be ordered at a workshop - an
engine. is possible to distinguish between the remote authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
control keys.
There are two variants of remote control key - The remaining remote control keys must be
More remote control keys can be ordered -
Remote control key in basic version and taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the
but not variants other than the one supplied
Remote control key with PCC (Personal Car missing remote control key must be erased
with the car. Up to six keys can be pro-
Communicator)*. from the system as a theft prevention meas-
grammed and used for one single car.
ure.
BasicA with The car is supplied with two remote control
Functionality The current number of keys registered to the
keys
PCCB car can be checked in the menu system MY
CAR. For a description of the menu system,
Locking/unlocking WARNING see MY CAR (p. 113).
and detachable key x x
If there are children in the car:
blade Related information
Remember to switch off the supply to the • Remote control key - functions (p. 163)
Keyless locking/ power windows and sunroof by removing
x the remote control key if the driver leaves
unlocking
the car.
Keyless engine star-
x
ting
Related information
Information button • Remote control key - functions (p. 163) 06
x
and indicator lamps
A 5-button key
B 6-button key
Remote control key with PCC has extended

functionality compared with the remote con-
trol key in the basic version - e.g. support for
Keyless Drive (p. 170) and certain unique
functions (p. 165).

06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key - personalisation* Proceed as follows in order to store the set- WARNING
The key memory in the remote control key tings and use the key memory in the remote
control key: Risk of crushing! Make sure that children
(p. 159) means that certain settings in the car do not play with the controls. Check that
can be individually adapted for different peo- 1. Unlock the car with the remote control there are no objects in front of, behind or
ple. key in whose memory the setting2 shall under the seat during adjustment. Ensure
be stored. that none of the rear seat passengers is in
The key memory function is available in com- danger of becoming trapped.
bination with power* driver's seat. 2. Make the desired settings for e.g. the
seat and the door mirrors.
Settings for door mirrors (p. 105), driver's Changing settings
3. The settings are stored in the current
seat, steering force (p. 254) and the com- If several people each with a remote control
remote control key's memory.
bined instrument panel's theme, contrast and key approach the car, then the settings for
colour mode (p. 67) can be stored in the The next time the car is unlocked with the e.g. seat and door mirrors are implemented
memory, depending on the car's equipment same remote control key, the positions that for the person whose remote control key
level. are stored in the key memory will be set auto- unlocks the driver's door.
matically - providing that they have been
The function1 can be activated/deactivated in changed since the last time the current If the driver's door has been opened by
the menu system MY CAR. For a description remote control key was used. person A with remote control key A, but
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113). person B with remote control key B shall
Emergency stop drive, then the settings can be changed as
When the function is activated, the settings If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
are automatically linked to the key memory. follows:
one of the setting buttons for the seat or
This means that a change in a setting will memory buttons in order to stop the seat. • Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
automatically be saved to the specific remote behind the steering wheel, person B
06 Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
control key's memory. presses the button for unlocking on
the key memory is performed by pressing the his/her remote control key, see Remote
Storing settings unlock button on the remote control key. The control key - functions (p. 163).
Make sure that the key memory function is driver's door must then be open.
• Select one of three possible memories for
activated in the menu system MY CAR. seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
1 Called Car key memory in MY CAR.

2 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.

06 Locks and alarm
Seats, front - electrically operated* Locking/unlocking - indicator Lock indicator

(p. 83). When the car is locked or unlocked using the A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that
• Adjust seat and door mirrors manually, remote control key (p. 159) the direction indi- the car is locked.
see Seats, front - electrically operated* cators confirm that locking/unlocking was
(p. 83) and Door mirrors (p. 105). correctly performed.
Related information • Locking - one flash and the door mirrors
• Remote control key with PCC* - unique are folded3 in.
functions (p. 165)
• Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir-
rors are folded3 out.
After locking the indication is only given if all
locks are activated once the doors have been
closed.
Selecting the function

Different options for indicating locking/
unlocking with light can be set in the car's Same LED as alarm indicator (p. 182).
menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113). NOTE
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also
Related information
have this indicator.
• Keyless drive* (p. 170)
06
• Lock indicator (p. 161)
Related information
• Alarm indicator (p. 182) • Locking/unlocking - indicator (p. 161)
3 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

06 Locks and alarm
Immobiliser Mes- Specification Remote-controlled immobiliser with

The electronic immobiliser is a theft protec- sage tracking system
tion system that prevents an unauthorised Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking
person from starting the car. Insert car Error when reading the system makes it possible to track and locate
key remote control key during the car, and to remotely activate the immobi-
Each remote control key (p. 159) has a unique starting - Remove the key liser to switch off the engine.
code. The car can only be started with the from the ignition switch, press
correct remote control key with the correct it in again and make a new Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more
code. start attempt. information and assistance with activating the
The following error messages in the com- system.
Car key Error reading the remote con-
bined instrument panel's information display Related information
not found trol key during starting - Try
are related to the electronic immobiliser: • Remote control key (p. 159)
to start again.
If the error persists: Insert the • Immobiliser (p. 162)
remote control key into the
ignition switch and try to start
again.
Immobi- Error in immobiliser system

liser Try during starting. If the error
to start persists: Contact a workshop
again - an authorised Volvo work-
06 shop is recommended.
For starting the car, see Starting the engine

(p. 261).
Related information
• Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system (p. 162)
162

06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key - functions Press and hold to open all windows simulta-
The remote control key in basic version has neously. For more information, see Total air-
functions such as locking and unlocking the ing function (p. 177).
doors. The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the
Functions
driver's door only with one press of the but-
ton and, after a further press of the button -
within ten seconds - unlocking the remaining
doors.
The function can be changed in the menu
system MY CAR. For a description of the
Remote control key with PCC*( Personal Car menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Communicator).
Approach light duration – Used to
Information switch on the car's lighting at a distance. For
more information, see Approach lighting
Function buttons (p. 100).
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate The button can also be used for activating
Remote control key in basic version.
while the alarm is activated. preconditioning (p. 138).
Locking
Press and hold to close all the windows and
Tailgate (p. 178) - Unlocks and disarms
Unlocking sunroof* simultaneously. For more informa-
tion, see Total airing function (p. 177). the alarm for the tailgate only. 06
Approach light duration
Panic function – Used to attract atten-
Tailgate WARNING tion in an emergency.
If the sunroof and windows are closed Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec-
Panic function using the remote control key, check that onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to
nobody's hands are trapped. activate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tail- button once it has been active for at least
gate while the alarm is deactivated. 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches
off automatically after approx. 3 minutes.
}}

06 Locks and alarm
||
Related information Remote control key - range Related information
• Remote control key (p. 159) Remote control key functions (in its basic ver- • Remote control key (p. 159)
• Remote control key with PCC* - unique sion) have a range of approx. 20 metres from • Remote control key - functions (p. 163)
functions (p. 165) the car.
• Locking/unlocking - from the outside If the car does not verify a button being
(p. 175) pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
The car can always be locked/unlocked
with the key blade (p. 167).
If the remote control key is removed from the

car when the engine is running or key position
I or II (p. 80) is active, and if all doors are
closed, then a warning message is shown in
the information display in the combined
instrument panel and an audio reminder sig-
nal sounds at the same time.
06
The message is extinguished and the audible
reminder signal stops when the remote con-
trol key is brought back to the car after
either/or:
• The remote control key has been inserted
in the ignition switch.
• Speed exceeds 30 km/h.
• The OK button has been pressed.

06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with PCC* - Using the information button

unique functions – Press the information button .
A remote control key with PCC has enhanced > All indicator lamps flash for approxi-
functionality compared with a remote control mately 7 seconds and the light travels
key in basic version (p. 159) in the form of an around on the remote control key. This
information button and indicator lamps. indicates that information from the car
is being scanned.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is
interrupted.
NOTE Green continuous light – the car is

If none of the indicator lamps illumi- locked.
nates with repeated use of the information Yellow continuous light – the car is
button and in different locations (as well as unlocked.
after 7 seconds and after the light has
travelled around on the PCC), contact a Red continuous light – the alarm has
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop been triggered since the car was locked.
Remote control key with PCC. is recommended. Red light flashing alternately in both indi-
Information button cator lamps – The alarm was triggered
Indicator lamps display information in accord- less than 5 minutes ago.
Indicator lamps 06
ance with the following illustration:
Related information
Using the information button enables access
to certain information from the car via the
• Remote control key with PCC* - range
(p. 166)
indicator lamps.

06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with PCC* - range Related information Detachable key blade
The range of a remote control key with PCC • Keyless Drive* - remote control key range A remote control key contains a detachable
(Personal Car Communicator) for locking, (p. 171) key blade of metal with which some functions
unlocking the doors and tailgate is approx. 20 • Remote control key - range (p. 164) can be activated and some operations carried
metres from the car - the other functions are out.
up to approx. 100 metres.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
If the car does not verify a button being authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-
pressed - move closer and try again. ommended when ordering new key blades.
NOTE Key blade functions

Using the remote control key's detachable
The information button function may be key blade:
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc. • the left-hand front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be acti-
vated with the remote control key, see
Outside the remote control key's range Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
If the remote control key is too far away from (p. 167).
the car for the information to be read then the
status the car was last left in is shown, with-
• the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated
out the light in the indicator lamps travelling
(p. 180).
around on the remote control key.
06 • the right-hand front door and the rear
If several remote control keys are used for the doors can be locked manually (p. 175),
car then it is only the one last used for lock- e.g. in the event of power failure.
ing/unlocking that shows the correct status.
• access to the glovebox and cargo area
(privacy locking (p. 168)*) can be
NOTE blocked.
If no indicator lamps illuminate when • the airbag for front passenger seat
the information button is used within range (PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated
then this may be because the last commu- (p. 36).
nication between the remote control key
and the car was disrupted by surrounding Related information
radio waves, buildings, topographical con- • Remote control key - functions (p. 163)
ditions, etc.
• Remote control key (p. 159)

06 Locks and alarm
Detachable key blade - detaching/ Related information Detachable key blade - unlocking
attaching • Detachable key blade - unlocking doors doors
Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade (p. 167) The detachable key blade (p. 166) can be
(p. 166) is carried out as follows: • Child safety locks - manual activation used if central locking cannot be activated
(p. 180) with the remote control key (p. 159), e.g. if the
Removing the key blade key's battery has run out.
• Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat-
ing* (p. 36)
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are
discharged - then the left-hand front door can
be opened as follows:
1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the
key blade in the door handle's lock cylin-
der. For illustration and more information,
see Keyless drive* - unlocking with the
key blade (p. 173).
NOTE
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
When the door has been unlocked using
At the same time pull the key blade the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered.
straight out backwards.
06
Attaching the key blade 2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in remote control key in the ignition switch.
the remote control key (p. 159).
For cars with the Keyless system, see Key-
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot less drive* - unlocking with the key blade
pointed up and lower the key blade into (p. 173).
its slot.
Related information
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in. • Remote control key - replacing the bat-
tery (p. 169)

06 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking* Activate/deactivate

Privacy locking is intended for when the car is
left for service, with a hotel parking valet or
similar. The glovebox is then locked and the
tailgate lock is disconnected from the central
locking - the tailgate cannot be opened with
either the central locking button in the front
doors or the remote control key (p. 159).
G017870
Active locks for remote control key, without key
blade and privacy locking activated. Activating privacy locking.
This means that the remote control key with- To activate privacy locking:
out key blade can only be used to activate/
deactivate the alarm (p. 181), to open the Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
doors and to drive the car. cylinder.
The remote control key without key blade can Turn the key blade 180 degrees clock-
G017869
then be handed over to the service or hotel wise. The keyhole is vertical in the locked
staff - the loose key blade is retained by the position for privacy locking.
Active locks for remote control key with key
06 blade. car owner. Pull out the key blade. The combined
instrument panel's information display
NOTE shows a message at the same time.
Do not forget to pull out the cargo cover The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate
(p. 156)) over the cargo area before closing can no longer be unlocked with the remote
the tailgate. control key or the central locking button.

06 Locks and alarm
NOTE Remote control key - replacing the

battery
Do not reinsert the key blade into the
remote control key, but keep it in a safe The battery4 for the remote control key may
place instead. need to be replaced.
The battery for the remote control key should

• Deactivation takes place in reverse order. be replaced if:
For information on locking the glovebox only,
• the information symbol in the combined
see Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 177). instrument panel illuminates and the dis-
play shows Low battery in remote
control. Please change batteries.
and/or
• the locks repeatedly do not react to sig-
nals from the remote control key within
20 metres from the car.
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side. 06
At the same time pull the key blade

straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up.
4 Remote control key with PCC has two batteries.

}}
169

06 Locks and alarm
||
NOTE NOTE Keyless drive*
Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a star-
Turn the remote control key over with the Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat- used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil ting and locking system that can be operated
teries falling out when it is opened. UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, keylessly.
sub-section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the
factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo With the keyless starting and locking system
IMPORTANT workshop fulfil the above criteria. the car can be started, locked and unlocked
without the remote control key (p. 159)5
Avoid touching new batteries and their
contact surfaces with your fingers as this inserted in the ignition switch. It is enough to
Assembly
may impair their function. have the remote control key with you in a
1. Press the remote control key together.
pocket. The system makes it easier and more
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot convenient to e.g. open the car when your
Battery replacement pointed up and lower the key blade into hands are full.
Closely study how the battery/batteries its slot.
are secured on the inside of the cover, Both of the remote control keys included with
with regard to their (+) and (–) sides. 3. Lightly press the key blade. You should the car have Keyless functionality. It is possi-
hear a "click" when the key blade is ble to order more remote control keys.
Remote control key (one battery) locked in.
The car's electrical system can be set to
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
three different levels - key position 0, I and II
2. Install a new one with the (+) side down. IMPORTANT (p. 81) - with the remote control key.
Make sure that exhausted batteries are
Remote control key with PCC* (two Related information
disposed of in a manner which is kind to
06 batteries) the environment. • Keyless Drive* - remote control key range
1. Carefully prize out the batteries. (p. 171)
2. First install one new one with the (+) side Related information • Keyless drive* - secure handling of the
up. remote control key (p. 171)
3. Position the white plastic tab in between
• Remote control key - functions (p. 163) • Keyless drive* - interference to remote
and finally install a second new battery control key function (p. 172)
with the (+) side down.
Battery type
Use batteries with the designation
CR2430, 3V - one in the remote control key,
two in the remote control key with PCC.

06 Locks and alarm
Keyless Drive* - remote control key are closed, then a warning message is shown Keyless drive* - secure handling of
range in the information display in the combined the remote control key
In order to unlock the doors or tailgate auto- instrument panel and an audio reminder sig- It is important to handle the car's remote con-
matically without pressing a button on the nal sounds at the same time. trol keys with great care.
remote control key6, a remote control key When the remote control key has been
must be within approx. 1.5 metres from the returned to the car, the warning message If one of the remote control keys7 has been
car's door handle or tailgate. goes off and the audible reminder ceases left in the car then the Keyless functionality is
once either/or: deactivated in case the car is e.g. locked with
The person who wishes to lock or unlock a the other remote control key that belongs to
door must have the remote control key with • a door has been opened and closed the car. This prevents unauthorised entry.
him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock • the remote control key has been inserted The next time the car is unlocked with the
a door if the remote control key is on the in the ignition switch other remote control key the forgotten remote
opposite side of the car. • The OK button has been pressed. control key is reactivated again.
Related information
IMPORTANT
• Keyless Drive* - antenna location (p. 174) Avoid leaving the remote control key with
PCC behind in the car. If someone breaks
into your car and takes the remote control
key, it will e.g. be possible to start the car
by pressing the remote control key in the
ignition switch and then pressing the
START/STOP ENGINE button.
06
Related information
The red rings in the above figure indicate the
range covered by the system's antennas.
If all remote control keys are removed from
the car when the engine is running or key
position I or II (p. 81) is active, and if all doors
5 Only applies to Remote Control Key with PCC.

6 Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).

06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* - interference to Keyless drive* - locking All doors and the tailgate must be closed
remote control key function Cars equipped with Keyless drive have a before the car can be locked - otherwise the
Electromagnetic fields and screening can touch-sensitive area on the outer handle of car is not locked.
interfere with the remote control key's Keyless the doors and a rubberised button next to the
functions (p. 170). tailgate's rubberised pressure plate for lock- NOTE
ing/unlocking. In cars with automatic gearbox selectors,
NOTE the gear selector must be set to the P
Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile position; otherwise the car can be neither
phone or metal object - no closer than locked nor alarmed.
10-15 cm.
Related information
If interference is experienced nonetheless, • Keyless drive* (p. 170)
use the remote control key and the key blade • Alarm indicator (p. 182)
like a remote control key in basic version, see
Remote control key - functions (p. 163).
Related information
• Remote control key - replacing the bat-
tery (p. 169)
The touch-sensitive area on the outer door han-
• Keyless drive* - secure handling of the dles and the rubberised button next to the tail-
remote control key (p. 171) gate's rubberised pressure plate.
06 • Keyless Drive* - remote control key range Lock the doors and the tailgate with one long
(p. 171) press on any of the door handles' touch-sen-
sitive areas or press the smaller of the tail-
gate's two rubberised buttons - the lock indi-
cator (p. 161) in the windscreen confirms that
locking has been completed by starting to
flash.
7 Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).

06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* - unlocking Keyless drive* - unlocking with the 2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cyl-
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a key blade inder and unlock the door.
door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pres- If central locking cannot be unlocked with the 3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
sure plate is actuated - open the door or tail- remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are
gate as normal. discharged, then the left-hand front door can NOTE
be opened using the detachable key blade.
NOTE When the driver's door is unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
The door handles normally register a hand triggered. It is switched off by inserting the
that takes hold of the handle, but with PCC in the ignition switch, see Alarm -
thick gloves on or after a very quick hand remote control key not working (p. 183).
movement a second attempt may be
required, or with the glove taken off.
Related information
Related information
• Keyless drive* (p. 170) • Detachable key blade - detaching/attach-
ing (p. 167)
• Keyless drive* - locking (p. 172)
• Alarm (p. 181)
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.

To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's
plastic cover must be removed - this is also 06
done with the key blade:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight
up into the hole on the underside of the
door handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover loosens automati-
cally by means of the torque when the
blade is pushed straight up and into
the opening.

06 Locks and alarm
Keyless Drive* - lock settings Keyless Drive* - antenna location WARNING

Lock settings for cars equipped with Keyless Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a
People with pacemaker operations should
Drive can be adapted by indicating in the number of built-in antennas positioned at dif- not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless
menu system MY CAR which doors are to be ferent locations in the car. system's antennae with their pacemaker.
unlocked. This is to prevent interference between the
pacemaker and the keyless system.
For a description of the menu system, see
MY CAR (p. 113).
Related information
Related information • Keyless drive* (p. 170)
Rear bumper, centre
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under

06 the floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.

06 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking - from the outside NOTE Manual locking of the door

Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried In certain situations the car must be lockable
Remember that the alarm is triggered
out using the remote control key (p. 159). The when the door is opened after being manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.
remote control key can lock/unlock all doors unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is
and the tailgate simultaneously. Different The left-hand front door can be locked with
switched off when the remote control key
sequences for unlocking can be selected, see is inserted into the ignition switch. its lock cylinder and the remote control key's
Remote control key - functions (p. 163). detachable key blade, see Keyless drive* -
unlocking with the key blade (p. 173).
In order that the lock sequence can be acti- WARNING
Other doors do not have lock cylinders and
vated, the driver's door must be closed - if Be aware of the risk of being locked in the instead have lock knobs on each door's end
any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, car when it is locked from the outside face which must be re-turned - then they are
then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is using the remote control key - it is then not mechanically locked/blocked against opening
activated only when it/they are closed. For possible to open any of the doors from the
from the outside. The doors can still be
cars equipped with keyless locking system* inside with the door controls. For more
information, see Deadlocks* (p. 179). opened from the inside.
all doors and the tailgate must be closed.
NOTE Automatic relocking

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
control key in the car. within two minutes of unlocking, all are
locked again automatically. This function
reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see
remote control key, the battery may be dis- Alarm (p. 181).) 06
charged - lock or unlock the left-hand front
door with the detachable key blade, see Related information
Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching • Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 167). (p. 176)
• Keyless drive* (p. 170) Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up
with child safety locks (p. 180).
– Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob, see Detacha-
ble key blade - detaching/attaching
(p. 167).
}}

06 Locks and alarm
||
The door is blocked against opening from Locking/unlocking - from the inside • Pull the door handle and open the door -
the outside. All of the doors and the tailgate are locked or the door is unlocked and opened in one
The door can be opened from both the unlocked simultaneously using the central operation.
outside and the inside. locking button on the driver's door and pas- Lamp in lock button
senger door*. Central locking is available in two variants -
NOTE the lamp in the central locking button for the
Central locking
• A door's knob control only locks that driver's door has different meanings depend-
particular door - not all doors simulta- ent on the variant.
neously. With central locking button only in the driver's
• A manually locked rear door with an door, other doors have no button:
activated manual child safety lock can-
not be opened from either the outside
• Illuminated lamp means that all doors are
locked.
or the inside, see Child safety locks -
manual activation (p. 180). A rear door With central locking button on both front
that is locked in this way can only be doors and electric lock button in each rear
unlocked with the remote control key door:
or central locking button. • Illuminated lamp means that only that
particular door is locked. When all but-
Related information Central locking. tons are illuminated all doors are locked.
• Remote control key - replacing the bat- • Press one side of the button to lock - Locking
tery (p. 169)
06 the other side to unlock. • Press the central locking button - all
Press and hold to also open all side windows* closed doors are locked.
simultaneously. A long press also closes all side windows and
sunroof simultaneously (see also Total airing
Unlocking function (p. 177)).
A door can be unlocked from the inside in
two different ways:
• Press the central locking button .
A long press also opens all the side windows*
simultaneously (see also Total airing function
(p. 177)).

06 Locks and alarm
Lock button* rear doors Total airing function Locking/unlocking - glovebox

The total airing function opens or closes all The glovebox (p. 149) can only be locked/
side windows simultaneously and can be unlocked using the detachable key blade from
used for example to quickly air the car during the remote control key.
hot weather.
For information on the key blade, see Detach-
able key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 167).
The button's lamp illuminates when the door is

locked.
The rear door lock buttons only lock their
respective rear door.
To unlock the door: Central locking button
• Pull the door handle - the door is A long press on the symbol in the central
unlocked and opened. Locking the glovebox:
locking button opens all side windows simul-
taneously. The same procedure on the Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock 06
Automatic locking
symbol closes all side windows simultane- cylinder.
The doors and tailgate are locked automati-
cally when the car starts to move. ously. Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
The function can be activated/deactivated in Related information position.
the menu system MY CAR. For a description • Locking/unlocking - from the inside
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113). (p. 176) Pull out the key blade.
Related information • Power windows (p. 103) • Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
• Locking/unlocking - from the outside order.
(p. 175) For information on privacy locking, see Pri-
• Alarm (p. 181) vacy locking* (p. 168).
• Remote control key - functions (p. 163)

06 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking - tailgate IMPORTANT The doors remain locked and armed.

The tailgate can be opened, locked and • The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
unlocked in several ways.
• Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the closed - press lightly on the rubberised
rubberised panel. pressure plate under the outer handle and
Manual opening lift the tailgate.
• Do not place the lift force on the rub-
ber panel when opening the rear hatch If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes
- lift the handle. Using too much force then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
may damage the electrical contacts on
the rubber panel.
Unlocking the car from inside
Unlocking with the remote control key
Rubber plate with electrical contact.

The tailgate is held closed by an electrical
lock. To open:
1. Push down gently on the wider of the two
06 rubberised pressure plates under the Unlocking, tailgate
outer handle - the lock is released.
2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully To unlock the tailgate:
open the tailgate. The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* – Press the lighting panel button (1).
and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using
> The tailgate is unlocked and can be
the remote control key's button. opened within 2 minutes (if the car is
The lock indicator (p. 161) on the instrument locked from the inside).
panel stops flashing in order to show that not
all of the car is locked and the alarm's* level
and movement sensors and the sensors for
opening the tailgate are disconnected.

06 Locks and alarm
Locking with the remote control key Deadlocks* Temporary deactivation

– Press the remote control key's button for Deadlocks8 means that all door handles are
locking , see Remote control key - mechanically disengaged, which prevents
functions (p. 163). doors being opened from both inside and
> The lock indicator on the instrument outside.
panel starts flashing, which means that
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
the car is locked and the alarm* has
control key (p. 159) and are set after an
been activated.
approx. ten seconds delay after the doors
Related information have been locked.
• Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 176) NOTE
• Locking/unlocking - from the outside If a door is opened within the delay time
(p. 175) then the sequence is interrupted and the Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
alarm is deactivated. MY CAR
OK MENU
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
control key when the deadlocks function is TUNE knob control
activated. The front left door can also be
unlocked with the detachable key blade EXIT
(p. 166). In addition, it is possible to unlock
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
and open the doors and tailgate on cars 06
doors must be locked from the outside, then
equipped with the Keyless Drive* by touching
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
door handles or the handle on the tailgate.
switched off. This takes place the menu sys-
tem MY CAR. For a description of the menu
WARNING system, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
8 Only in combination with alarm.

}}

06 Locks and alarm
||
NOTE Child safety locks - manual activation WARNING
The child safety locks prevent children from
• Remember that the alarm is activated
being able to open a rear door from the
Each rear door has two knob controls - do
when the car is locked. not mix up the child safety locks with man-
inside. ual door locks.
• If any of the doors are opened from
the inside then the alarm is triggered. Activate/deactivate child safety locks
NOTE
Related information • A door's knob control only blocks that
• Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key particular door - not both rear doors
blade (p. 173) simultaneously.
• Remote control key (p. 159) • Cars with an electric child safety lock
do not have a manual child lock.
Related information
• Child safety locks - electrical activation*
(p. 181)
Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up • Locking/unlocking - from the inside
with manual door lock (p. 175). (p. 176)
The child safety locks are located on the trail- • Locking/unlocking - from the outside
ing edge of the rear doors and are only (p. 175)
06
accessible when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
– Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade (p. 166) to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.

06 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks - electrical 2. Press the button in the driver's door con- Alarm
activation* trol panel. The alarm is a device that warns in the event
Child safety locks with electrical activation > The combined instrument panel's of e.g. a break-in in the car.
prevent children from opening the rear doors information display shows the mes-
or windows from the inside. sage Rear child lock activated and Activated alarm is triggered if:
the button's lamp illuminates - the • a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is
Activation locks are active. opened
The child safety locks can be activated/deac-
tivated in all key positions (p. 80) higher than When the child safety lock is active then the • a movement is detected in the passenger
rear: compartment (if fitted with a movement
0. Activation/deactivation can be performed
detector*)
up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine, • windows can only be opened with the
provided that no door is opened. driver's door control panel • the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
To activate the child safety locks: • doors cannot be opened from inside.
• the battery's cable is disconnected
The current setting is stored when the engine
is switched off - if the child safety locks are • the siren is disconnected.
activated at engine shutdown, the function If there is a fault in the alarm system then the
will remain activated the next time the engine information display in the combined instru-
is started. ment panel shows a message. In which case,
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
Related information workshop is recommended.
• Child safety locks - manual activation
(p. 180)
06
• Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 176)
Control panel driver's door.

1. Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.
}}

06 Locks and alarm
||
NOTE Deactivating a triggered alarm Alarm indicator
– Press the remote control key unlock but- The alarm indicator shows alarm system
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in ton or insert the remote control key in the
the event of movement in the passenger (p. 181) status.
compartment - air currents are also regis- ignition switch.
tered. For this reason the alarm is trig-
gered if the car is left with a window or the
Related information
sunroof open or if the passenger compart- • Alarm indicator (p. 182)
ment heater is used. • Alarm - automatic re-arming (p. 183)
To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof • Alarm - remote control key not working
when leaving the car. If the car's inte- (p. 183)
grated passenger compartment heater (or
a portable electric heater) shall be used -
direct the airflow from the air vents so that
they are not pointing upwards in the pas-
senger compartment. Alternatively,
reduced alarm level can be used, see
Reduced alarm level (p. 184).
Same LED as lock indicator (p. 161).
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
NOTE the alarm system's status:
Do not attempt to repair or alter compo-
nents in the alarm system yourself. Any
• LED not lit – Alarm not armed
such attempts may affect the terms of the • The LED flashes once every other second
06 insurance. – Alarm is armed
• The LED flashes rapidly after disarming
Arming the alarm the alarm (and until the remote control
– Press the remote control key lock button. key is inserted in the ignition switch and
key position I is selected) – Alarm has
Deactivate the alarm been triggered.
– Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton.
182

06 Locks and alarm
Alarm - automatic re-arming Alarm - remote control key not Alarm signals
Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 181) pre- working When the alarm (p. 181) is triggered a siren
vents the car being left with the alarm dis- If the alarm (p. 181) cannot be deactivated sounds and all direction indicators flash.
armed unintentionally. with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's
battery (p. 169) is discharged - the car can be • A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
If the car is unlocked with the remote control alarm is switched off. The siren has its
unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of own battery and works independently of
follows:
the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 the car battery.
minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- 1. Open the driver's door with the detacha- • The direction indicators flash for 5
armed. The car is relocked at the same time. ble key blade (p. 173). minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indi-
Related information
cator (p. 182) flashes rapidly and the
• Reduced alarm level (p. 184)
siren sounds.
06
2. Insert the remote control key in the igni-

tion switch.
> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
3. Start the engine.
183

06 Locks and alarm
Reduced alarm level Type approval - remote control key

Reduced guard means that the movement system
and tilt detectors can be temporarily deacti- Type approval for the remote control key sys-
vated. tem can be read in the table.
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm Lock system, standard
(p. 181) - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or
Country/Area
during transport on a car train or car ferry -
temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt EU
detectors.
The procedure is the same as with the tem-
porary disengaging of deadlocks (p. 179)9.
Related information
• Alarm indicator (p. 182)
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)
Country/Area
EU
06
Related information
9 Only in combination with alarm.
184

DRIVER SUPPORT

07 Driver support
Electronic stability control (ESC) - Active Yaw Control Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA1
general The function checks the driving and brake Trailer stability assist (p. 310) function is to
Stability system ESC (Electronic Stability force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it
Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and stabilise the car. begins to snake. For more information, see
improves the car's traction. Driving with a trailer (p. 305).
Spin Control
The activation of the ESC system The function prevents the driving wheels from
NOTE
during braking may be noticed as a spinning against the road surface during
throbbing sound. The car may acceleration. The function is deactivated if the driver
accelerate slower than expected selects Sport mode.
when the accelerator pedal is depressed. Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and trans- Related information
fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-
WARNING
ning to the one that is not.
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera-
tion (p. 187)
The stability system ESC is supplementary
assistance - it cannot handle all situations Engine drag control - EDC • Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym-
in all road conditions. EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involun- bols and messages (p. 188)
The driver always bears responsibility that tary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or
the vehicle is driven safely and that appli- engine braking when driving in low gears on
cable road traffic rules and regulations are slippery road surfaces.
followed.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's abil-
The ESC system consists of the following ity to steer the car.
functions:
Corner Traction Control - CTC
• Active Yaw Control
CTC compensates for understeer and allows
• Spin Control higher than normal acceleration in a bend
07
• Traction control system without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on
• Engine drag control - EDC an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly
reach the prevailing traffic speed.
• Corner Traction Control - CTC
• Trailer Stability Assist - TSA
1 Trailer Stability Assist is included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.

07 Driver support
Electronic stability control (ESC) - Sport mode is indicated in the com-

operation bined instrument panel by means of
this symbol illuminating with a con-
Selection of level - Sport mode stant glow until the driver deselects
The ESC system is always activated - it can- the function or until the engine is switched off
not be deactivated. - after the next time the engine is started the
ESC system is back in its normal mode again.
However, the driver can
select the Sport mode, Related information
which allows for a more • Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
active driving experience. (p. 186)
Sport mode is selected in • Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym-
the menu system MY CAR. bols and messages (p. 188)
For a description of the menu system, see
MY CAR (p. 113).
In Sport mode the system detects whether
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move-
ments and cornering are more active than in
normal driving and then allows controlled
skidding with the rear section up to a certain
level before it intervenes and stabilises the
car.
If, for example, the driver stops a controlled
skid by releasing the accelerator pedal, then
the ESC system intervenes and stabilises the
car.
07
With Sport mode, maximum traction is also
obtained if the car has become stuck, or
when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or
deep snow.
187

07 Driver support
Electronic stability control (ESC) -

symbols and messages
Table
Symbol Message Specification
ESC Temporarily OFF ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature - the function is
reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
ESC Service required ESC system disengaged.

• Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Message" There is a text message in the combined instrument panel (p. 66) - Read it!
and
Constant glow for System check when the engine is started.

2 seconds.
07 Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow. Sport mode is activated.

NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode - it is partially reduced.
188

07 Driver support
Related information
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 186)
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera-
tion (p. 187)
07
189

07 Driver support
Road Sign Information (RSI)* WARNING Road sign information (RSI)* -

The road sign information function (RSI – operation
RSI does not work in all situations but is
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to designed merely as a supplementary aid. The road sign information function (RSI –
remember which speed-related road signs the Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
car has passed. The driver always bears ultimate responsi- remember which speed-related road signs the
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable road traffic rules car has passed.
and regulations are followed. The function is operated as follows:
Related information
• Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 190)
• Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 192)
Examples of readable speed related signs2.

The RSI function gives information on current
speed, e.g. that a motorway or road is star- Recorded speed information3.
ting/ending and when overtaking is prohibi-
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
ted.
imposed speed, the combined instrument
If both a sign for motorway/road for motor- panel displays the sign as a symbol.
ised traffic and a sign showing the maximum
Together with the symbol for
07 permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to
the current speed limit, a
show the sign symbol for maximum permitted
sign showing that overtaking
speed.
is prohibited may also be
displayed where appropriate.
2 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

07 Driver support
End of restriction or motorway Additional signs

A corresponding road sign is shown in the
combined instrument panel for
approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI
detects a sign that involves the end of a
speed limit - or other speed-related informa-
tion, e.g. end of a motorway.
Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a
Examples of such signs are: specific distance or at a certain time of day.
The driver's attention is drawn to the situation
by means of a symbol for an additional sign
under the symbol showing speed.
Display of additional information

Examples of additional signs3.
Sometimes different speed limits are signpos-
End of all restrictions. ted for the same road - an additional sign
then indicates the circumstances under which
the different speeds apply. The road section
may be particularly susceptible to accidents
in rain and/or fog, for example. A symbol for additional sign in the form of an
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed empty frame under the combined instrument
only if the windscreen wipers are in use. panel's speed symbol means that the RSI has
End of motorway. detected an additional sign with supplemen-
The speed applicable on an
tary information for the current speed limit.
Following which, the sign information is hid- exit is indicated in certain
den until the next speed-related sign is markets by means of an Setting in MY CAR
additional sign containing an 07
detected. There are options for RSI in the MY CAR
arrow. menu system; see MY CAR (p. 113).
Speed signs linked to this
type of additional sign are displayed only if
the driver is using the direction indicator.
}}
191

07 Driver support
||
Road sign information On/Off exceeded. The function can be activated/ Road sign information (RSI)* -
deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For limitations
a description of the menu system, see MY The road sign information function (RSI –
CAR (p. 113). Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
remember which speed-related road signs the
Related information
car has passed. The function has the follow-
• Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 190)
ing limitations.
• Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 192) The RSI function's camera sensor has limita-
• MY CAR (p. 113) tions just like the human eye - read more
about camera sensor limitations (p. 229)).
The combined instrument panel's speed sym- Signs which indirectly provide information on
bol display can be disabled. The function can a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for
be activated/deactivated in the menu system towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI
MY CAR. For a description of the menu sys- function.
tem, see MY CAR (p. 113). Here are several examples of what can dis-
rupt the function:
Speed warning
• Faded signs
• Signs positioned on bends
• Rotated or damaged signs
• Concealed or poorly positioned signs
• Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt.
• Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 190)
• Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
The driver can opt to receive a warning when (p. 190)
the applicable speed limit is exceeded by
5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the
symbol showing the applicable maximum
speed temporarily flashing when this speed is

07 Driver support
Speed limiter* Related information Speed limiter* - getting started

A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a • Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 193)
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates • Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation Switch on and activate
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is and standby mode (p. 194) When the speed limiter is active, its symbol
prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- (6) is shown in combination with a mark (5) by
• Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee-
the set maximum speed in the combined
selected/set speed by the speed limiter. ded (p. 195)
instrument panel.
Overview • Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 195)
Selection and storage of the highest possible
speed in the memory can be made both dur-
ing a journey and while stationary.
While driving
1. Press the steering wheel button to
switch on the speed limiter.
> The symbol (6) for speed limiter illumi-
nates in the combined instrument
panel.
2. When the car is moving at the desired
highest possible speed: Press one of the
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument steering wheel buttons or until the
panel. combined instrument panel shows a
Speed limiter - On/Off. mark (5) by the desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
Standby mode ceases and the stored selected max. speed is stored in the
speed is resumed. memory.
07
Standby mode.
When stationary
Activate and adjust the max. speed. 1. Press the steering wheel button to
switch on the speed limiter.
Selected speed.
Speed limiter active.
}}

07 Driver support
||
2. Scroll with the button until the com- Speed limiter* - changing speed Speed limiter* - temporary
bined instrument panel shows a mark (5) deactivation and standby mode
by the desired maximum speed. Changing the stored speed A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
> The speed limiter is then active and the Stored maximum speed is changed with reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
selected max. speed is stored in the short or long presses on the or button. the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
memory. To adjust +/- 5 km/h: prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-
selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Related information • Use short presses - each press gives
• Speed limiter* (p. 193) +/- 5 km/h. Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To adjust +/- 1 km/h: To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter
and set it in standby mode:
• Hold the button depressed and release
when the combined instrument panel's – Press .
mark is by the desired maximum speed. > The mark (5) in the combined instru-
Last press made is stored in the memory. ment panel changes colour from
GREEN to WHITE and the driver can
Related information temporarily exceed the set maximum
• Speed limiter* (p. 193) speed.
The speed limiter is reactivated with
one press on . The mark (5) then
changes colour from WHITE to GREEN
and the car's maximum speed is lim-
ited once again.
Temporary deactivation with the

accelerator pedal
07 The speed limiter can also be set in standby
mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rap-
idly accelerating the car out of a situation:

07 Driver support
– Depress the accelerator pedal fully. Speed limiter* - alarm for speed Speed limiter* - deactivation
> The combined instrument panel shows exceeded A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
the stored maximum speed with a col- A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
oured mark (5) and the driver can tem- reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
porarily exceed the set maximum the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-
speed - the mark (5) changes colour prevented from accidentally exceeding a selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
during this time from GREEN to pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
WHITE. To deactivate the speed limiter:
On a steep downhill gradient the speed limit- –
The speed limiter is automatically reac- Press the steering wheel button .
er's engine braking effect may be inadequate
tivated after the release of the acceler- and the selected maximum speed is excee- > The combined instrument panel's sym-
ator pedal and the car's speed is ded. The driver is alerted about this with an bol for speed limiter (6) and the selec-
slowed down to below the selected/ acoustic signal. tion of the set speed (5) both extin-
stored maximum speed - the display's guish - the set/stored speed is thus
mark (5) changes colour from WHITE The signal is active until the driver has slowed cleared and cannot then be resumed
to GREEN and the car's maximum to below the selected maximum speed.
with the button.
speed is again limited.
NOTE The driver can then use the accelerator
Related information pedal to choose a speed without limi-
The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds
• Speed limiter* (p. 193)
if the speed has been exceeded by at least
tation.
• Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 193) 3 km/h provided that none of the buttons Related information
• Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 194) or has been depressed during the • Speed limiter* (p. 193)
last half minute.
• Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 195) • Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 193)
• Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee-
Related information • Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
ded (p. 195) and standby mode (p. 194)
• Speed limiter* (p. 193)
• Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 194) • Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee- 07
ded (p. 195)
• Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 193)
• Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 194)
• Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 195)

07 Driver support
Cruise control* WARNING

The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
The driver must always be observant with
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in regard to the traffic conditions and inter-
a more relaxed driving on motorways and vene when the cruise control is not main-
long, straight roads in regular traffic flows. taining a suitable speed and/or suitable
distance.
Overview
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
safely.
Related information
The steering wheel buttons and combined instru- • Cruise control* - managing speed
ment panel in cars with speed limiter4. (p. 197)
Cruise control - On/Off. • Cruise control* temporary deactivation
Standby mode ceases and the stored • Cruise control* - resume set speed
speed is resumed. (p. 198)
Standby mode • Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 198)
The steering wheel buttons and combined instru-
ment panel in cars without speed limiter4. Activate and adjust the speed. • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 199)
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol

(GREY = Standby mode).
07
4 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

07 Driver support
Cruise control* - managing speed • Use short presses - each press gives Cruise control* temporary
It is possible to activate, set and change the +/- 5 km/h. deactivation and standby mode
stored speed. To adjust +/- 1 km/h: The function can be temporarily deactivated
and set in standby mode.
Activating and setting the speed • Hold the button depressed and release
when the combined instrument panel's
To enable cruise control: Temporary deactivation - standby mode
mark is by the desired speed.
To temporarily disengage cruise control and
• Press the steering wheel button for Last press made is stored in the memory. set it in standby mode:
CRUISE (without speed limiter) or
(with speed limiter). If speed is increased using the accelerator • Press the steering wheel button .
> The cruise control symbol (6) in the com- pedal prior to pressing the / button,
> The combined instrument panel's
bined instrument panel illuminates - then it is the car's current speed when the
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
cruise control is in standby mode. button is pressed that is stored.
from WHITE to GREY - cruise control is
To activate cruise control: A temporary increase in speed with the accel- temporarily disengaged.
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
• At the required speed - press the steering affect the setting - the car returns to the last Standby mode due to driver intervention
wheel button or . stored speed when the accelerator pedal is Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
> The current speed is stored in memory released. automatically set in standby mode if:
and the combined instrument panel's • the foot brake is used
marking (5) illuminates at the selected NOTE • the clutch pedal is depressed
speed and the symbol (6) changes from
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are • the gear lever/selector is moved to N
GREY to WHITE - the car then follows the held depressed for several minutes then it
stored speed. position
is blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be • the driver maintains speed higher than
NOTE stopped and the engine restarted. the stored speed for longer than
1 minute.
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at
speeds below 30 km/h. Related information The driver must then regulate the speed. 07
• Cruise control* (p. 196) A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
Changing the stored speed erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
Stored speed is changed with short or long affect the setting - the car returns to the last
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
presses on the or button.
released.
To adjust +/- 5 km/h:
}}

07 Driver support
||
Automatic standby mode Cruise control* - resume set speed Cruise control* - deactivate
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
set in standby mode if: the driver to maintain an even speed. How it is deactivated is described here.
• wheels lose traction After temporary deactivation and standby Cruise control is switched off with the steer-
• engine speed is too low/high mode (p. 197) it is possible to resume the set ing wheel button (1) or by switching off the
speed. engine - the set/stored speed is thus cleared
• speed falls below approx. 30 km/h.
and cannot then be resumed with the but-
The driver must then regulate the speed. To reactivate the cruise control from standby
ton.
mode:
Related information
• Related information
• Cruise control* (p. 196) Press the steering wheel button .
• Cruise control* (p. 196)
• Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 197) > The combined instrument panel's
• Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 197)
• Cruise control* - resume set speed marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
(p. 198) from GREY to WHITE - the car then fol- • Cruise control* temporary deactivation
lows the last stored speed. and standby mode (p. 197)
• Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 198)
• Cruise control* - resume set speed
NOTE (p. 198)
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Related information
• Cruise control* (p. 196)
• Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 197)
07
• Cruise control* temporary deactivation
• Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 198)

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* WARNING Related information

The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive • Adaptive cruise control* - function
The driver must always be observant with (p. 200)
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an regard to the traffic conditions and inter-
even speed combined with a pre-selected vene when the adaptive cruise control is • Adaptive cruise control* - overview
time interval to the vehicle ahead. not maintaining a suitable speed or suita- (p. 201)
ble distance. • Adaptive cruise control* - managing
The adaptive cruise control provides a more
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle speed (p. 202)
relaxing driving experience on long journeys
all traffic, weather and road conditions. • Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval
on motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows. Read all the sections about the adaptive (p. 203)
cruise control in the owner's manual in • Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
The driver sets the desired speed (p. 202) order to learn about its limitations, of deactivation, and standby mode (p. 204)
and time interval (p. 203) to the car in front. which the driver should be aware before it
When the radar detector detects a slower is used. • Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
vehicle in front of the car, the speed is auto- another vehicle (p. 205)
matically adapted to that. When the road is maintaining the correct distance and • Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
clear again the car returns to the selected speed, even when the adaptive cruise con- (p. 205)
speed. trol is being used. • Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assis-
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off tance (p. 206)
or set to standby mode (p. 204) and the car IMPORTANT • Radar sensor (p. 207)
comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the • Radar sensor - limitations (p. 208)
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
driver is warned instead by the Distance
components must only be performed at a • Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
Warning (p. 213) function about the short workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop and action (p. 210)
distance. is recommended.
• Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 211)
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced 07
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue assistance (p. 206) function.

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - function WARNING takes place if the speed of the vehicle in front
It consists of a cruise control system and a exceeds the stored speed.
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
coordinated spacing system. avoidance system. The driver must inter- The adaptive cruise control aims to control
vene if the system does not detect a vehi- the speed in a smooth way. In situations that
Function overview cle in front. demand sudden braking the driver must
The adaptive cruise control does not brake brake himself/herself. This applies with large
for humans or animals, and not for small differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy- brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar
cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary sensor (p. 208) braking may come unexpect-
vehicles and objects. edly or not at all.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for The adaptive cruise control can be activated
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
to follow another vehicle at speeds from
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy 30 km/h6 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding below 30 km/h or if the engine speed
roads or on slip roads. becomes too low, the cruise control is set in
standby mode (p. 204) at which automatic
Function overview5. The distance to the vehicle ahead (p. 203) is braking ceases - the driver must then take
primarily measured by a radar sensor over himself/herself to maintain a safe dis-
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
(p. 207). The cruise control function regulates tance to the vehicle ahead.
Steering wheel keypad (p. 201) the speed with acceleration and braking. It is Warning lamp - braking by driver
normal for the brakes to emit a low sound
Radar sensor (p. 207) required
when they are being used by the adaptive
Adaptive cruise control has a braking
cruise control.
capacity that is equivalent to more than 40%
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the of the car's braking capacity.
vehicle ahead in the same lane according to
07
what the driver set for time interval (p. 203). If
the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in
front then the car will instead maintain the
speed set and stored by the driver. This also
5 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
6 Queue Assist (p. 206) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h.

07 Driver support
WARNING Adaptive cruise control* - overview

Operation of the adaptive cruise control and
The adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles which the radar sensor has steering wheel keypad varies depending on
detected. Hence the warning may not be whether or not the car is equipped with speed
given, or it may be given with a certain limiter8.
delay. Do not wait for a warning without
braking when so required. Adaptive cruise control with Speed
limiter
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control
is primarily intended for use when driving on
level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in
1. Collision warning system warning lamp and
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
warning sound7.
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes,
If the car needs to be braked more heavily with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which
than the adaptive cruise control capacity and case, be extra attentive and ready to slow
the driver does not brake, then the warning down.
lamp and warning sound from the Collision
warning system (p. 223) are used in order to Related information
alert the driver that immediate intervention is • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 199)
required. • Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate Cruise control - On/Off.
(p. 205)
NOTE Standby mode ceases and the stored
• Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
speed is resumed.
The warning lamp may be difficult to see in another vehicle (p. 205)
strong sunlight or when wearing sun- Standby mode
glasses.
Time interval - Increase/decrease. 07
Activate and adjust the speed.
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =

standby mode).
7 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
8 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
}}

07 Driver support
||
Time distance Related information Adaptive cruise control* - managing
• Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 199) speed
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol
(WHITE = standby mode). • Adaptive cruise control* - function
(p. 200) To enable ACC:
Adaptive cruise control without Speed • Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and • Press the steering wheel button -a
limiter messages (p. 211) similar WHITE symbol illuminates in the
combined instrument panel (8) which
shows that the adaptive cruise control is
in standby mode (p. 204).
To activate ACC:
• At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button or .
> The current speed is stored in the mem-
ory, the combined instrument panel
shows a "magnifying glass" (6) around
the stored speed for a second or so and
its marking changes from WHITE to
GREEN.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed. When this symbol changes colour
from WHITE to GREEN, the ACC is
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
active and the car maintains the
Time interval - Increase/decrease. stored speed.
Activate and adjust the speed. Only when the symbol shows
an image of another vehicle
07 (Not used) is the distance to the vehicle
in front controlled by the
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = ACC.
standby mode).
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol

(WHITE = standby mode).

07 Driver support
At the same time a speed stored speed when the accelerator pedal is Adaptive cruise control* - set time
range is marked: released. interval
Different time intervals to the

NOTE vehicle in front can be
If any of the adaptive cruise control but- selected and shown in the
tons are held depressed for several combined instrument panel
• the higher speed with GREEN marking is minutes then the function is blocked and as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
the pre-programmed speed deactivated. To be able to reactivate it, the more lines the longer the
• the lower speed is the speed of the vehi- car must be stopped and the engine time interval. One line corre-
cle in front. restarted.
sponds to approximately 1 second to the
In certain situations it cannot be reactiva- vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately
Changing the stored speed ted - in which case, the combined instru- 3 seconds.
Stored speed is changed with short or long ment panel (p. 211) shows Adaptive
presses on the or button. cruise control unavailable. To set/change the time distance:
To adjust +/- 5 km/h: • Turn the thumbwheel on the steering

Related information wheel keypad (p. 201) (or use the /
• Use short presses - each press gives • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 199) buttons for cars without Speed limiter).
+/- 5 km/h.
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview At low speed, when the distances are short,
To adjust +/- 1 km/h: (p. 201) the adaptive cruise control increases the time
• Hold the button depressed and release • Adaptive cruise control* - function interval slightly.
when the combined instrument panel's (p. 200) The adaptive cruise control allows the time
mark is by the desired speed.
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
Last press made is stored in the memory. in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle
If speed is increased using the accelerator in front smoothly and comfortably.
pedal prior to pressing the / button, Note that a short time interval only allows the 07
then it is the car's current speed when the driver a short time to react and take action if
button is pressed that is stored. any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel- The same symbol is also shown when Dis-
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not tance Warning (p. 213) function is activated.
affect the setting - the car returns to the last
}}

07 Driver support
||
NOTE Adaptive cruise control* - temporary The driver must then regulate the speed.
deactivation, and standby mode A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations. The adaptive cruise control can be temporar- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
ily deactivated and set in standby mode. affect the setting - the car returns to the last
If the adaptive cruise control does not
appear to react when activated, this may stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
Temporary deactivation/standby mode - released.
be because the time distance to the vehi-
with speed limiter
cle in front is preventing an increase in
speed. To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise Automatic standby mode
control and set it in standby mode: The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
The higher the speed the longer the calcu-
other systems, e.g. Stability system ESC
lated distance in metres for a given time • Press the steering wheel button
interval. (p. 186). If any of these systems stops work-
This symbol and the stored speed's ing, the adaptive cruise control is deactivated
marking then change colour from automatically.
Read more how speed is handled (p. 202). GREEN to WHITE.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
Related information Temporary deactivation/standby mode - will sound and the message Adaptive cruise
• Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 199) without speed limiter control cancelled is shown in the combined
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise instrument panel. The driver must then inter-
(p. 201) control and set it in standby mode: vene and adapt the speed and distance to
the vehicle ahead.
• Adaptive cruise control* - function • Press the steering wheel button
(p. 200) An automatic deactivation can be due to:
• Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate Standby mode due to driver intervention • the driver opens the door
(p. 205) The adaptive cruise control is temporarily dis-
engaged and set automatically in standby • the driver takes off his seatbelt
mode if: • engine speed is too low/high
• the foot brake is used • speed has fallen below 30 km/h9

07
• the gear selector is moved to N position • wheels lose traction
(automatic gearbox) • brake temperature is high
• the driver maintains speed higher than • the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
the stored speed for longer than snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
1 minute.
9 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assist - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h.

07 Driver support
Resume set speed Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is another vehicle
reactivated with one press on the steering Keypad with Speed limiter
wheel button - the speed is then set to the When the car is following another vehicle and The adaptive cruise control is switched off
last stored speed. the driver indicates an impending overtaking with the steering wheel button in the
manoeuvre with the direction indicator10, the steering wheel keypad (p. 201) - the set/
NOTE adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accel- stored speed is thus cleared and cannot then
erate the car towards the vehicle in front. be resumed with the button.
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting This function is active at speeds
above 70 km/h. Keypad without Speed limiter
. With a short press on the steering wheel but-
WARNING ton the adaptive cruise control is set in
Related information standby mode (p. 204). It is switched off with
• Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 199) Be aware that this function can be acti- an additional short press - the set/stored
vated in more situations other than during
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview speed is thus cleared and cannot then be
overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator
(p. 201) is used to indicate a change of lane or exit resumed with the button.
• Cruise control* (p. 196) to another road - the car will then acceler-
Related information
ate briefly.
• Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 199)
Related information • Adaptive cruise control* - function
• Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 199) (p. 200)
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview • Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and

(p. 201) messages (p. 211)
• Adaptive cruise control* - function

(p. 200)
07
10 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.

07 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue The adaptive cruise control can follow NOTE
assistance another vehicle within the range 0-200 km/h.
Queue Assist can hold the car stationary
Queue assistance also provides the adaptive for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the
cruise control with enhanced functionality at NOTE parking brake is applied and the adaptive
speeds below 30 km/h. A vehicle in front must be within a reason- cruise control is disengaged.
able distance in order to enable activation • The parking brake must be released
The adaptive cruise control is supplemented of the adaptive cruise control at a speed
by the queue assistance function (also called before the adaptive cruise control can
lower than 30 km/h. be reactivated.
"Queue Assist").
Queue assistance has the following functions: For shorter stops in connection with inching
Change of target
• Extended speed range - also below in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is
30 km/h and when stationary automatically resumed if the stops do not
exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer
• Change of target
before the car in front starts moving again
• Automatic braking ceases when station- then the Adaptive cruise control is set in
ary standby mode with automatic braking. The
• Automatic activation parking brake. driver must then reactivate it in one of the fol-
Note that the lowest programmable speed for lowing ways:
the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h - even • Press the steering wheel button .
though it is capable of following another vehi-
or If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then
cle down to a standstill, a speed lower than there may be stationary traffic in front.
30 km/h cannot be selected/stored. • Depress the accelerator pedal.
When the adaptive cruise control is following
Extended speed range > The adaptive cruise control will then another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and
resume following the vehicle in front. changes target from a moving to a stationary
NOTE vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will slow
07 down for the stationary vehicle.
In order to activate the adaptive cruise
control, the driver's door must be closed
and the driver must be wearing the seat-
belt.

07 Driver support
WARNING Queue assistance releases the foot brake and Radar sensor
sets the adaptive cruise control in standby The function of the radar sensor is to detect
When the adaptive cruise control is follow- mode in the following situations:
ing another vehicle at speeds in excess of cars or larger vehicles in the same direction,
30 km/h and the target is changed from a • the driver puts his/her foot on the brake in the same lane.
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the pedal
adaptive cruise control will ignore the sta- The radar sensor is used by the following
tionary vehicle and instead select the
• the parking brake is applied functions:
stored speed. • the gear selector is moved to P, N or R
• Distance Warning*
position
• The driver must intervene him/herself • Adaptive cruise control*
and brake. • the driver sets the adaptive cruise control
in standby mode. • Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Pedestrian Detection*
Automatic standby mode with change Automatic activation parking brake
of target In certain situations queue assistance applies IMPORTANT
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged the parking brake in order to keep the car
In the event of visible damage to the car's
and set in standby mode: remaining stationary.
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sen-
• when the speed is below 5 km/h and the This takes place if: sor may be damaged:
adaptive cruise control is uncertain • Contact a workshop - an authorised
whether the target object is a stationary
• the driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seatbelt Volvo workshop is recommended.
vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed
bump. • ESC is changed from Normal to Sport The function may completely or partially
mode disappear - or malfunction - if the grille,
• when the speed is below 5 km/h and the the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged
vehicle in front turns off so the adaptive • Queue assistance has held the car sta- or has loosened.
cruise control no longer has a vehicle to tionary for more than 4 minutes
follow. • the engine is switched off
Modification of the radar sensor could result
Termination of automatic braking at a • the brakes have overheated.
in it being illegal to use. 07
standstill Related information
In certain situations, queue assistance stops Related information
• Radar sensor - limitations (p. 208)
automatic braking at a standstill. This means
that the brakes are released and the car may • Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 201)
start to roll - the driver must therefore inter- • Collision warning system* (p. 223)
vene and brake the car himself/herself in • Adaptive cruise control* - function
order to maintain its position. (p. 200) • Distance Warning* (p. 213)

07 Driver support
Radar sensor - limitations WARNING

A radar sensor (p. 207) has certain limitations
The driver must always be observant with
- due to its limited field of vision for example. regard to the traffic conditions and inter-
vene when the adaptive cruise control is
The capacity of the adaptive cruise control to
not maintaining a suitable speed or suita-
detect a vehicle in front is significantly ble distance.
reduced if:
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
• the speed of vehicles in front is signifi- all traffic, weather and road conditions.
cantly different from your own speed
Read all the sections about the adaptive
• its radar sensor becomes blocked - e.g. cruise control in the owner's manual in
in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects order to learn about its limitations, of
have collected in front of the radar sen- which the driver should be aware before it
sor. is used.
NOTE maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the adaptive cruise con-
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor trol is being used.
clean - see subheading "Maintenance"
(p. 227).
WARNING
Field of vision Accessories or other objects such as auxil-
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. ACC field of vision. iary lamps must not be fitted in front of the
In some situations another vehicle is not Sometimes the radar sensor is late at grille.
detected, or the detection is made later than detecting vehicles at close distances -
expected. e.g. a vehicle that drives in between the
car and vehicles in front.
07
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the
lane can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
208

07 Driver support
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must inter-
vene if the system does not detect a vehi-
cle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy-
cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on slip roads.
Related information
• Collision warning system* (p. 223)
• Distance Warning* (p. 213)
07

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing sensor (p. 207) cannot detect other vehicles sion Warning with Auto Brake (p. 223) are
and action in front of the car. working.
This message indicates that neither of the The following table presents examples of
If the combined instrument panel shows the
functions for Distance Alert (p. 213) or Colli- possible causes for a message being shown
message Radar blocked See manual then it
along with the appropriate action:
means that the adaptive cruise control's radar
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road
radar signals. surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.
Related information
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 201)
(p. 200)
• Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 211)
07

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols are some examples - follow the recommenda-
and messages tion given if appropriate:
Sometimes the adaptive cruise control may
display a symbol and/or text message. Here

The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.
The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
Set ESC to Normal to ena- The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability system (ESC) (p. 186) has been set
ble Cruise in Normal mode.
Adaptive cruise control The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
cancelled
Adaptive cruise control The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.

unavailable This could be due to:
• brake temperature is high
• the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
Radar blocked See manual The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
07
• The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 208).
Adaptive cruise control The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.

Service required
• Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
}}

07 Driver support
||
Press brake to hold vehicle The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to
+ acoustic alarm take over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.
(Only with Queue Assist) • The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the
driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
Below 30 km/h Lead vehi- Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehicle in
cle required front within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).
(Only with Queue Assist)
Related information
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 201)
(p. 200)
07

07 Driver support
Distance Warning* NOTE tion is handled by the car's menu system MY

Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function CAR, MY CAR (p. 113) - once there, search
Distance warning is deactivated during the for the Distance Alert function..
that informs the driver about the time interval time the adaptive cruise control is active.
to vehicles in front.
Set time interval
Distance Warning is active at speeds above WARNING
30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
front of the car, in the same direction. No dis- Distance warning only reacts if the dis-
tance information is provided for oncoming, tance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preset value - the speed of the driver's
slow or stationary vehicles. vehicle is not affected.
Operation
Controls and symbol for time interval.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - On.

Different time intervals to the
Orange-coloured warning lamp11. vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
An orange-coloured warning lamp in the
combined instrument panel
windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if
Press the button in the centre console to as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter 07
switch the function on or off. The function is more lines the longer the
than the set time interval.
switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the time interval. One line corre-
button. sponds to approximately 1 second to the
Some combinations of the selected equip- vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately
ment leave no vacant space for a button in 3 seconds.
the centre console - in which case the func-
}}

07 Driver support
||
The same symbol is also shown when Adap- Distance Warning* - limitations
tive cruise control (p. 200) is activated. Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function
that informs the driver about the distance to
NOTE vehicles in front. The function uses the same
The higher the speed the longer the calcu- radar sensor as the Adaptive cruise control
lated distance in metres for a given time (p. 199) and Collision warning with auto brake
interval. (p. 223), has some limitations.
The set time interval is also used by the
function adaptive cruise control (p. 200). NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-
local traffic regulations. tions in light intensity, as well as wearing
sunglasses, could mean that the warning
light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Related information
Poor weather or winding roads could
• Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 214) affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect
vehicles in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illumi-
nates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance
than that set due to limitations in sensor
range.
07 For further information on radar sensor limita-

tions, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 208)
and (p. 228).
Related information
• Distance Warning* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)

07 Driver support
Distance Warning* - symbols and to vehicles in front. The function has certain
messages limitations.
Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function
that informs the driver about the time interval
SymbolA Message Specification

Radar blocked See Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
manual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush
has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Collision warning Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.
Service required Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
• Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 214)
07

07 Driver support
City Safety™ IMPORTANT City Safety™ - function

City Safety™ is a function for helping the City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
Maintenance and replacement of City
driver to avoid a collision when driving in Safety™ components must only be per- car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge
queues, amongst other things, when changes formed by a workshop - an authorised of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in Volvo workshop is recommended. of collision, City Safety™ will automatically
attention, could lead to an incident. brake the car, which may be experienced as
sudden braking.
The City Safety™ function is active at speeds WARNING
under 50 km/h and it helps the driver by auto-
City Safety™ does not engage in all driv-
matically braking the car in the event of immi- ing situations or traffic, weather or road
nent risk of collision with vehicles in front, conditions.
should the driver not react in time by braking
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles
and/or steering away.
driving in a different direction from the car,
City Safety™ is activated in situations where to small vehicles and motorcycles or to
the driver should have started braking earlier, humans and animals.
which is why it cannot help the driver in every City Safety™ can prevent collision at a
situation. speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at
a higher speed difference, it is only possi-
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as ble to reduce collision speed. In order to
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary obtain full brake function, the driver must
intervention. depress the brake pedal.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse Never wait for City Safety™ to engage.
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If The driver always bears responsibility for
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do maintaining the proper distance and
the braking, there will be a collision sooner or speed.
later.
07
The driver or passengers normally only notice Related information
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the • City Safety™ - limitations (p. 218)
car is extremely close to being in a collision. • City Safety™ - function (p. 216)
If the car is also equipped with Collision • City Safety™ - operation (p. 217)
Warning with Auto Brake (p. 223)* these two • City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 220)
systems complement each other. • City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 222)

07 Driver support
When the function is activated and brakes, City Safety™ - operation

the combined instrument panel shows a text City Safety™ is a function for helping the
message to the effect that the function is/has driver to avoid a collision when driving in
been active. queues, amongst other things, when changes
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in
NOTE attention, could lead to an incident.
When City Safety™ brakes, the brake On and Off
lights come on.
NOTE
Related information
• City Safety™ - limitations (p. 218) The City Safety™ function is activated
automatically when the engine is started.
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window12. • City Safety™ (p. 216)
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation • City Safety™ - operation (p. 217) In certain situations, it may advisable to disa-
to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can • City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 220) ble City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches
completely prevent a collision. • City Safety™ - symbols and messages could sweep over the bonnet and/or wind-
City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking (p. 222) screen.
and stops the car in normal circumstances, City Safety™ handled in the menu system
just behind the vehicle in front. For most dri- MY CAR, MY CAR (p. 113) and after starting
vers this is well outside normal driving style the engine the function can be deactivated as
and may be experienced as being uncomfort- follows:
able.
• Search in MY CAR for Driver support
If the difference in speed between the vehi- system and select the Off option at City
cles is greater than 15 km/h then City Safety.
Safety™ may not prevent the collision on its
However, the function will be enabled the 07
own. To obtain full brake force, the driver
next time the engine is started, regardless
must depress the brake pedal. This could
of whether the system was enabled or
then make it possible to prevent a collision,
disabled when the engine was switched
even at speed differences above 15 km/h.
off.
}}
217

07 Driver support
||
WARNING City Safety™ - limitations tems will provide best possible braking force
The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to with maintained stability.
The laser sensor also transmits laser light
when City Safety™ is disabled manually. detect cars and other large vehicles in front of When your own car is reversing, City Safety™
the car irrespective of whether it is day or is temporarily deactivated.
night.
Related information City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds -
• City Safety™ (p. 216) However, the function does have some limita- under 4 km/h, which is why the system does
tions. not intervene in situations where a vehicle in
• City Safety™ - limitations (p. 218)
front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
• City Safety™ - function (p. 216) The sensor's limitations mean that City
when parking.
Safety™ has poorer functionality - or none at
• City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 220)
all - in e.g. heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, Driver commands are always prioritised,
• City Safety™ - symbols and messages dust storms or white-out situations. Misting, which is why City Safety™ does not intervene
(p. 222) dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may also in situations where the driver is steering or
• MY CAR (p. 113) disrupt the function. accelerating in a clear manner, even if a colli-
sion is unavoidable.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxili- When City Safety™ has prevented a collision
ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than with a stationary object the car remains sta-
the bonnet limit the function. tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov-
The laser beam from the sensor in City
ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed
Safety™ measures how the light is reflected.
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
The sensor cannot detect objects with low
reflection capacity. The rear sections of the On a car with manual gearbox the engine
vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently stops when City Safety™ has stopped the
thanks to the number plate and rear light car, unless the driver manages to depress the
reflectors. clutch pedal beforehand.
07
On slippery road surfaces the braking dis-
tance is extended, which may reduce the
capacity of City Safety™ to avoid a collision.
In such situations the ABS13 and ESC14 sys-
13 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system.

14 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.
218

07 Driver support
NOTE Cause Action IMPORTANT

• Keep the windscreen surface in front The windscreen sur- Clean the wind- If there are cracks, scratches or stone
of the laser sensor free from ice, snow chips in the windscreen in front of either of
face in front of the screen surface in the laser sensor's "windows" and they
and dirt (see the illustration for sensor
laser sensor is dirty or front of the sensor cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm
location (p. 216)).
covered with ice or from dirt, ice and (or larger), then a workshop must be con-
• Do not affix or mount anything on the snow. snow. tacted for replacement of the windscreen
windscreen in front of the laser sensor. (see the illustration for sensor location
• Remove ice and snow from the bonnet The laser sensor field Remove the (p. 216)) - an authorised Volvo workshop is
- snow and ice must not exceed a of vision is blocked. blocking object. recommended.
height of 5 cm. Failure to take action may result in
reduced performance for City Safety™.
Fault tracing and action To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
If the message Windscreen sensors reduced operation for City Safety™, the
following also applies:
blocked See manual is shown in the com-
bined instrument panel it indicates that the • Volvo recommends that you do not
laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect repair cracks, scratches or stone chips
vehicles in front of the car. This means in turn in the area in front of the laser sensor -
that City Safety™ is not operational. instead, the whole windscreen should
be replaced.
The Windscreen sensors blocked See
manual message is not shown for all situa- • Before replacing a windscreen, con-
tact an authorised Volvo workshop to
tions in which the laser sensor is blocked.
verify that the correct windscreen is
The driver must therefore be diligent about
ordered and fitted.
keeping the windscreen and area in front of
the laser sensor clean. • The same type or Volvo-approved
windscreen wipers must be fitted dur-
The following table presents possible causes ing replacement. 07
for the message being shown, along with
suggestions for appropriate action.
Related information
• City Safety™ (p. 216)
• City Safety™ - function (p. 216)
• City Safety™ - operation (p. 217)
219

07 Driver support
City Safety™ - laser sensor • IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies WARNING

The City Safety™ function includes a sensor with FDA (U.S. Food Administration)
standards for laser product design with If any of these instructions are not followed
which transmits laser light (see illustration then there is a risk of eye injury!
(p. 216) for sensor location). Contact a quali- the exception of deviations in accordance
with "Laser Notice No. 50" from • Never look into the laser sensor (which
fied workshop in the event of a fault or if the
26 July 2001. emits spreading invisible laser radia-
laser sensor needs servicing - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. It is abso- tion) at a distance of 100 mm or closer
Radiation data for the laser sensor with magnifying optics such as a mag-
lutely essential to follow the prescribed The following table specifies the laser sen- nifying glass, microscope, lens or simi-
instructions when handling the laser sensor. sor's physical data. lar optical instruments.
The following two labels relate to the laser • Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
Maximum pulse energy 2.64 µJ and/or replacement of the laser sen-
sensor:
sor's spare parts must only be carried
Maximum average output 45 mW
out by a qualified workshop - we rec-
Pulse duration 33 ns ommend an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Divergence (horizontal x verti- 28° × 12° • To avoid exposure to harmful radia-
cal) tion, do not carry out any readjust-
ments or maintenance other than
those specified here.
• The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the
laser sensor.
• Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A
The upper label in the figure describes the removed laser sensor does not fulfil
07 laser beam's classification: laser class 3B as per standard IEC
60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-
• Laser radiation - Do not look into the safe and therefore entails a risk of
laser beam with optical instruments - injury.
Class 1M laser product.
• The laser sensor's connector must be
The lower label in the figure describes the unplugged before removal from the
laser beam's physical data: windscreen.
220

07 Driver support
• The laser sensor must be fitted onto

the windscreen before the sensor's
connector is plugged in.
• The laser sensor transmits a laser light
when the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 81) even if the engine is
switched off.
Related information
• City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 222)
07
221

07 Driver support
City Safety™ - symbols and symbols may illuminate in the combined by briefly pressing the OK button on the
messages instrument panel and a text message may be direction indicator stalk.
In conjunction with automatic braking by the shown. A text message can be acknowledged
City Safety™ (p. 216) system, one or more
Symbol Message Meaning/Action

Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen sensors blocked The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
See manual
• Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about laser sensor limitations (p. 218).
City Safety Service required City Safety™ is not operational.

Related information
• City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 220)
07
222

07 Driver support
Collision warning system* Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" function • Collision warning system* - operation
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and may appear in two variants: (p. 227)
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to Level 1 • Collision warning system* - limitations
assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- (p. 228)
ing with a pedestrian, cyclist or vehicle in The driver is merely warned15 of occurring
obstacles by means of visual and acoustic
• Collision warning system* - camera sen-
front that are stationary or moving in the same sor limitations (p. 229)
direction. signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the
driver must himself brake. • Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 231)
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Level 2
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is activated
The driver is warned of occurring obstacles
in situations where the driver should have
by means of visual and acoustic signals - the
started braking earlier, which is why it cannot
car is braked automatically if the driver him-
help the driver in every situation.
self does not act within a reasonable time.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is designed IMPORTANT
to be activated as late as possible in order to
avoid unnecessary intervention. Maintenance of the internal components of
the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection"
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" can pre- must only be performed at a workshop -
vent a collision or reduce collision speed. an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must not
be used as an excuse for the driver to change
Related information
his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies • Collision warning system* - function
(p. 224)
on Collision Warning with Auto Brake to do
• Collision warning system* - detection of 07
the braking, there might be a risk of a colli-
sion sooner or later. pedestrians (p. 226)
• Collision warning system* - detection of
Two system levels cyclists (p. 225)
Depending on how the car is equipped, the
15 No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".

07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - function 1 - Collision warning If in this situation the driver has not yet
The driver is first warned of a potentially started to take evasive action and the risk of
imminent collision. collision is imminent then the automatic brak-
ing function is deployed - this takes place
The collision warning system can detect
irrespective of whether or not the driver
pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are sta-
brakes. Braking then takes place with full
tionary or moving in the same direction in
brake force in order to reduce collision speed,
front of the driver's vehicle.
or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian, avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and
cyclist or a vehicle then the driver's attention full brake intervention may come very late or
is attracted with a flashing red warning signal simultaneously.
(1) and an acoustic signal.
2 - Brake support17
Function overview16. If the risk of collision has increased further
after the collision warning then the brake sup-
Audio-visual warning signal in the event
port is activated.
of a collision risk.
This means that the brake system is prepared
Radar sensor17
for rapid braking by applying the brakes
Camera sensor lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
three steps in the following order: quickly then full brake function is imple-
mented.
1. Collision warning
Brake support also reinforces the driver's
2. Brake support17
braking if the system considers that the brak-
07 3. Auto Brake17 ing is not sufficient to avoid a collision.
The collision warning system and City
Safety™ (p. 216) complement each other. 3 - Auto Brake17
The automatic brake function is activated
last.
17 With system Level 2 only.

07 Driver support
WARNING Collision warning system* - detection tours, directly from behind and in the car's cen-
of cyclists tre line.
The collision warning system does not Optimal performance of the system requires
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision that the system function that detects a cyclist
warning system does not react to vehicles receives as unambiguous information as pos-
or cyclists driving in another direction to sible about the body and bicycle contours -
the car or to animals. this implies the opportunity to identify the
Warning only activated in the event of a bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper
high risk for collision. This section "Func- and lower body combined with a normal
tion" and the section "Limitations" inform human pattern of movement.
about limitations that the driver must be
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle
aware of before using the Collision Warn-
ing system with Auto Brake. are not visible to the function's camera then
the system cannot detect a cyclist.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at • For the function to be able to detect a
a vehicle speed exceeding 80 km/h. The function only "sees" cyclists from behind, cyclist, he/she must be an adult and rid-
who are travelling in the same direction. ing a "senior bicycle".
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists do not work in • The bicycle must be equipped with a
darkness and tunnels - not even when highly visible and approved18 rearward-
streetlights are lit. facing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm
The auto-brake function can prevent a col- above the roadway.
lision or reduce collision speed. To ensure • The function can only detect cyclists
full brake performance, the driver should directly from behind and who are travel-
always depress the brake pedal - even ling in the same direction - not at an
when the car auto-brakes.
angle from behind, not from the side.
Never wait for a collision warning. The • Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand
driver is always responsible that the cor- 07
edge of the car's imagined/extended side
rect distance and speed are maintained -
even when the collision warning system lines may be detected late or not at all.
with auto-brake is used. • The function's capacity to detect cyclists
Optimum examples of what the system interprets at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the
as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle con- human eye.
Related information
18 The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.
}}

07 Driver support
||
• The function's capacity to detect cyclists Collision warning system* - detection • In order for a pedestrian to be detected
is deactivated when driving in darkness of pedestrians he/she must appear full-length and have
and tunnels - even when streetlights are a height of at least 80 cm.
lit. • The camera sensor's ability to see pedes-
• For optimum bicycle detection, the City trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just
Safety™ function must be activated, see like the human eye.
City Safety™ (p. 216). • The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
WARNING darkness and tunnels - even when street-
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & lights are lit.
Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance.
The function cannot detect: WARNING
• all cyclists in all situations and does "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
not see partially obscured cyclists, for Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is a
example. Optimal examples of what the system regards as means of assistance. The function cannot
pedestrians with clear body contours. detect all pedestrians in all situations and
• cyclists in clothing that obscures the does not see, for example:
contours of the body or who are Optimal performance of the system requires
approaching from the side. that the system function that detects pedes- • partially obscured pedestrians, people
trians receives as unambiguous information in clothing that hides their body con-
• bicycles that have no rearward-facing tour or pedestrians shorter than
red reflector. as possible about the contours of the body -
80 cm.
this implies the opportunity to identify the
• bicycles loaded with large objects.
head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower • pedestrians who are carrying larger
The driver is always responsible that the body combined with a normal human pattern objects.
vehicle is driven properly and with a safety
of movement. The driver is always responsible that the
distance adapted to the speed.
vehicle is driven properly and with a safety
If large parts of the body are not visible to the distance adapted to the speed.
07
Related information function's camera then the system cannot
detect a pedestrian.
• Collision warning system* (p. 223) Related information

07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - operation Settings for the collision warning system are • Search for Warning distance in
made via the centre console's screen and the Collision Warning in the menu system
Warning signals On and Off menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113). MY CAR, MY CAR (p. 113) - and there
select Long, Normal or Short.
Light and acoustic signals
When the collision warning system's light and The warning distance determines the sys-
acoustic warnings are activated, the warning tem's sensitivity. Warning distance Long pro-
lamp (no. [1] in previous illustration) is tested vides an earlier warning. First test with Long
each time the engine is started by briefly illu- and if this setting produces too many warn-
minating the warning lamp's separate points ings, which could be perceived as irritating in
of light. certain situations, then change to warning
distance Normal.
After starting the engine, both the light and
acoustic signals can be switched off: Only use warning distance Short in excep-
tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
• Search for Collision Warning in Driver
support systems in the menu system
1. Acoustic and visual warning signal in the event NOTE
MY CAR, MY CAR (p. 113) - and there
of a collision risk.19 select to uncheck the function. When the adaptive cruise control is in use
You can select whether the collision warning the warning lamp and warning sound will
Acoustic signal
system's acoustic and visual warning signals be used by the cruise control even if the
After starting the engine the warning sound collision warning system is switched off.
should be switched on or off. can be activated/deactivated separately:
The collision warning system warns the
When starting the engine, the setting that was • Search for Warning sound in Collision driver in the event of a risk of a collision,
selected when the engine was switched off is Warning in the menu system MY CAR, but the function cannot shorten driver
obtained automatically. MY CAR (p. 113) - and there select On or reaction time.
Off. In order for the collision warning system to
NOTE Following which, the collision warning system be effective, always drive with Distance
is only indicated with a light signal. Warning (p. 213) set at time interval 4–5. 07
The Brake Support and Auto Brake func-
tions are always enabled - they cannot be
deactivated. Set warning distance
The warning distance regulates the distance
at which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed.
19 The illustration is schematic - car model and details may differ.

}}

07 Driver support
||
NOTE Maintenance Collision warning system* - limitations
The function has certain limitations - for
Even if the warning distance has been set
to Long warnings could be perceived as example, it is not active until approx. 4 km/h.
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
The collision warning system's visual warning
there are large differences in speed or if
vehicles in front brake heavily. signal (see (1) in the illustration (p. 224)) may
be difficult to notice in the event of strong
sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are
WARNING being worn or if the driver is not looking
No automatic system can guarantee straight ahead. The warning sound should
100 % correct function in all situations. therefore always be activated.
Therefore, never test Collision Warning On slippery road surfaces the braking dis-
with Auto Brake by driving at people or tance is extended, which may reduce the
vehicles - this may cause severe damage
Camera and radar sensor20. capacity to avoid a collision. In such situa-
and injury and risk lives.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must tions the ABS and ESC (p. 186) systems will
be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be provide best possible braking force with
Checking settings maintained stability.
cleaned regularly with water and car sham-
The current settings can be controlled via the
poo.
centre console's screen and the menu sys- NOTE
tem (p. 113) MY CAR.
NOTE The visual warning signal can be temporar-
ily disengaged in the event of high passen-
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
ger compartment temperature caused by
will reduce their function and may prevent
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs
measurement.
then the warning sound is activated even if
it is deactivated in the menu system.
Related information • Warnings may not appear if the dis-
07 • Collision warning system* (p. 223) tance to the vehicle in front is small or
if steering wheel and pedal move-
ments are large, e.g. a very active driv-
ing style.

07 Driver support
WARNING Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo- Collision warning system* - camera
rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged. sensor limitations
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti- "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
situation or external influences mean that vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect why the system does not intervene in situa- assist the driver when there is a risk of collid-
a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front tions where the car is approaching a vehicle ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
correctly. in front very slowly, e.g. when parking. front that are stationary or moving in the same
The sensor system has a limited range for direction.
In situations where the driver demonstrates
pedestrians and cyclists21 - the system The function uses the car's camera sensor,
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision
can provide effective warnings and brake
warning may be postponed slightly in order to which has certain limitations.
interventions for them at vehicle speeds up
to 50 km/h. For stationary or slow-moving keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as
vehicles, warnings and brake interventions When Auto Brake has prevented a collision well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake
are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h.
with a stationary object the car remains sta- - by the functions:
tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov-
• Automatic main/dipped beam dim-
vehicles could be disengaged due to dark- ming (p. 93)
ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed
ness or poor visibility. • Road sign information (p. 190)
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
Warnings and brake interventions for • Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 233)
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at On a car with manual gearbox the engine
vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h. stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car, • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 237)
unless the driver manages to depress the
clutch pedal beforehand. NOTE
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as the Adaptive cruise control Related information Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
(p. 199). Read more about radar sensor limi- camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
tations (p. 208).
Do not stick or attach anything to the 07
If warnings are perceived as being too fre-
windscreen in front of the camera sensor
quent or disturbing then the warning distance as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
can be reduced (p. 227). This would lead to one or more of the systems dependent on
the system warning at a later stage, which the camera to stop working.
reduces the total number of warnings.
21 For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.
}}

07 Driver support
||
The camera sensors have limitations similar At the same time, this means that - besides Cause Action
to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Auto-
darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick matic main/dipped beam dimming, Road sign The windscreen Wait. It may take
fog for example. Under such conditions the information, Driver Alert Control and Lane surface in front of several minutes for
functions of camera-dependent systems Departure Warning functions will not have full the camera has the camera to
could be significantly reduced or temporarily functionality either. been cleaned but measure the visibil-
disengaged. the message ity.
The following table presents possible causes
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car- for a message being shown along with the remains.
riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, appropriate action. Dirt has appeared Visit a workshop to
dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings between the inside have the wind-
could also significantly reduce camera sensor Cause Action of the windscreen screen inside the
function when it is used to scan the carriage- and the camera. camera cover
way and detect pedestrians and other vehi- The windscreen Clean the wind- cleaned - an author-
cles. surface in front of screen surface in ised Volvo work-
the camera is dirty front of the camera shop is recom-
The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim-
or covered with ice from dirt, ice and mended.
ited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and
or snow. snow.
vehicles cannot be detected in some situa-
tions, or they are detected later than anticipa- Thick fog, heavy No action. At times Related information
ted. rain or snow means the camera does • Collision warning system* (p. 223)
During very high temperatures the camera is that the camera not work during
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes does not work suffi- heavy rain or snow-
after the engine is started in order to protect ciently well. fall.
camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action

07 If the display shows the message
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
then this means that the camera sensor is
blocked and cannot detect pedestrians,
cyclists, vehicles or road markings in front of
the car.

07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - symbols assist the driver when there is a risk of collid-
and messages ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and front that are stationary or moving in the same
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to direction.

Collision warning sys- Collision warning system switched off.
tem OFF Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warning sys- The collision warning system cannot be activated.

tem Unavailable Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto Braking was acti- Auto Brake has been active.

vated The message clears after one press of the OK button.
Windscreen sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

blocked See manual Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 229).
07
}}

07 Driver support
||

Radar blocked See Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
manual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or
if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Collision warning Serv- Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
ice required
Related information
• Collision warning system* - function
(p. 224)
pedestrians (p. 226)
cyclists (p. 225)
• Collision warning system* - operation
(p. 227)
• Collision warning system* - limitations
(p. 228)
07
• Collision warning system* - camera sen-
sor limitations (p. 229)

07 Driver support
Driver Alert System* Driver Alert Control (DAC)* driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist The DAC function is intended to attract the DAC issues a warning.
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or driver's attention when he/she starts to drive
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes dis- NOTE
driving on. tracted or starts to fall asleep. The function must not be used to extend a
period of driving. Always plan breaks at
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly
The Driver Alert System consists of different regular intervals, and make sure you are
deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily well rested.
functions which can either be switched on at
intended for major roads. The function is not
the same time or individually:
intended for city traffic.
• Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 234). Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warn-
• Lane Departure Warning - LDW (p. 237).
ing despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
A switched-on function is set in standby example:
mode and is not activated automatically until
speed exceeds 65 km/h.
• in strong side winds
• on rutted road surfaces.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h. NOTE
Both functions use a camera which is The camera sensor has certain limitations
dependent on the lane having side markings (p. 229).
painted on each side.
Related information
WARNING A camera detects the side markings painted • Driver Alert System* (p. 233)
Driver Alert System does not work in all on the carriageway and compares the section
situations but is designed merely as a sup- of the road with the driver's steering wheel
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 234)
plementary aid. movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle 07
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- does not follow the carriageway evenly. • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 235)
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven In some cases driving ability is not affected
safely.
despite driver fatigue. In which case there
may not be any warning issued for the driver.
Related information For this reason it is always important to stop
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 233) and take a break in the event of any signs of
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 237)

07 Driver support
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation WARNING

Settings are made from the centre console
An alarm should be taken very seriously,
display screen and its menu system. as a sleepy driver is often not aware of
his/her own condition.
On/Off In the event of an alarm or a feeling of
The Driver Alert function can be set in tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as
standby mode via the menu system MY CAR soon as possible and rest.
(p. 113):
Studies have shown that it is equally as
• Checked box - function activated. dangerous to drive while tired as it is under
the influence of alcohol.
• Unchecked box - the function is deacti-
vated.
Function Related information
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds • Driver Alert System* (p. 233)
65 km/h and remains active as long as the • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 233)
speed is over 60 km/h.
If the vehicle is being driven errati-
cally, the driver is notified by an
acoustic signal plus the text mes-
sage Driver Alert Time for a break
- the linked symbol is illuminated in the com-
bined instrument panel at the same time. The
warning is repeated after a time if driving abil-
ity does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
07
• Press the left stalk switch OK button.

07 Driver support
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols or in the centre console's display screen in
and messages different situations.
DAC (p. 233) can show symbols and text
messages on the combined instrument panel
Combined instrument panel

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
break
Windscreen sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

blocked See manual Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Driver Alert system Serv- The system is disengaged.

ice required
Display
Sym- Message Specification
bolA 07
Driver Alert OFF The function is disengaged.
Driver Alert Available The function is activated.
}}

07 Driver support
||
Sym- Message Specification
bolA
Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disen-
gaged. Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 229).
Related information
• Driver Alert System* (p. 233)
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 233)
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 234)
07

07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* NOTE Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -

Lane Departure Warning is one of the func- function
The driver is only warned once each time
tions in the Driver Alert System - sometimes the wheels cross a line. So there is no Certain settings can be made for the Lane
also referred to as LDW (Lane Departure acoustic alarm when there is a line Departure Warning function.
Warning). between the car's wheels.
Off & On
The function is intended for use on motor-
ways and similar major roads in order to WARNING
reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally
leaving its own lane in certain situations. LDW is merely a driver's aid and does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
Principle for LDW weather or road conditions.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
safely and that applicable laws and road
traffic regulations are followed.
Related information
• Driver Alert System* (p. 233)
LDW is engaged or disengaged using a but-
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita- ton on the centre console. An indicator lamp
tions (p. 239) in the button illuminates when the function is
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function switched on.
(p. 237)
This function is complemented in the com-
(The figure is schematic - not model specific.)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera- bined instrument panel with intuitive graphics
LDW consists of a camera that detects the tion (p. 238) in different situations.
side lines painted on the road/lane. • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols 07
and messages (p. 240) Personal preferences
If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand
Settings are made from the centre console's
side line of the carriageway without due
screen via the menu system in MY CAR. For
cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic
a description of the menu system, see MY
signal.
CAR (p. 113).
Select from the options:
}}

07 Driver support
||
• On at start-up - The function enters Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - Related information
standby mode every time the engine is operation • Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 237)
started. Otherwise the same value as
when the engine was switched off is
LDW is complemented in the combined • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
instrument panel with intuitive graphics in dif- tions (p. 239)
obtained.
ferent situations. Here are some examples: • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
• Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity (p. 237)
increases, an alarm is triggered earlier
and fewer limitations apply. • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 240)
Related information
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions (p. 239)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera-
tion (p. 238)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
The LDW function's side lines (marked in red in

the figure).
• The LDW symbol has WHITE side lines -
the function is active and detects/"sees"
one side line, or both.
• The LDW symbol has GREY side lines -
the function is active but detects neither
left nor right side line.
07
or
• The LDW symbol has GREY side lines -
the function is in standby mode because
the speed is below 65 km/h.
• The LDW symbol has no side lines - the
function is deactivated.

07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -

limitations
The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is
restricted in a similar way to the human eye.
For more information, read about camera

sensor limitations (p. 229).
NOTE
There are some situations where LDW
does not give any warning, such as:
• Direction indicators are switched on
• The driver has his/her foot on the
brake pedal22
• In the event of rapid depression of the
accelerator pedal22
• In the event of rapid steering wheel
movements22
• If turning is so sharp that the car rolls.
Related information
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 237)
07
tion (p. 238)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
22 When "Increased sensitivity" is selected a warning is still given, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 237).

07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - instrument panel in combination with an Message examples:
symbols and messages explanatory message - follow the recommen-
In situations where there is no LDW function a dation given if appropriate.
symbol may be shown in the combined

Lane Departure Warning ON/ The function is switched on/off.
Lane Departure Warning OFF Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after 5 seconds.
Lane Depart. Warning Unavaila- The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
ble at this speed
Lane Depart. Warning Unavaila- The lane does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
ble Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 229).
Lane Depart. Warning Available The function scans the lane's side markings.
Windscreen sensors blocked The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

See manual Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Driver Alert system Service The system is disengaged.

07
required
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
240

07 Driver support
Related information
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions (p. 239)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 237)
tion (p. 238)
07

07 Driver support
Park Assist* Related information Park assist syst* - function

Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- • Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors The parking assistance system is automati-
ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on (p. 245) cally activated when the engine is started -
the centre console's display screen indicate • Park assist syst* - function (p. 242) the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
the distance to the detected obstacle. • Park assist syst* - forward (p. 244) parking assistance is switched off with the
button, the lamp goes out.
Parking assistance sound level can be • Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 245)
adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal • Park assist syst* - backward (p. 243)
using the centre console's VOL knob. The
sound level can also be adjusted in the audio
• Park assist camera* (p. 246)
settings menu, which is accessed by pressing
SOUND or in the car's menu system (p. 113)
MY CAR23.
Parking assistance is available in two vari-
ants:
• Rear only
• Both front and rear.
WARNING On/Off for parking assistance and CTA*.
• Parking assistance does not relinquish If the car is equipped with CTA (p. 251) the
the driver's own responsibility during indicator lamps flash for BLIS (p. 249) once,
parking. then parking assistance is activated using the
button.
• The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
07 • Be aware of e.g. people or animals
near the car.
23 Depending on the audio and media system.

07 Driver support
IMPORTANT Park assist syst* - backward

Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or
low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
and are then temporarily not detected by the centre console's display screen indicate
the sensors - the pulsating tone may then the distance to the detected obstacle.
unexpectedly stop instead of changing
over to the expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects,
such as projecting loading docks.
• In such situations, pay extra attention
and manoeuvre/reposition the car par-
ticularly slowly or stop the current
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left
front and right rear.
parking manoeuvre - there may be a
high risk of damage to vehicles or
The centre console's display screen shows other objects since the sensors are
an overview of the relationship between the temporarily unable to function opti-
car and detected obstacle. mally.
Marked sectors show which of the four sen-
sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the Related information The distance covered to the rear of the car is
car symbol a selected sector box is, the • Park Assist* (p. 242) about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
shorter the distance between the car and a obstacles behind comes from one of the rear
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
loudspeakers.
detected obstacle. (p. 245)
The frequency of the signal increases the • Park assist syst* - forward (p. 244) Rear parking assistance is activated when
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of reverse gear is engaged.
• Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 245)
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the tow-
system is muted automatically. • Park assist syst* - backward (p. 243) 07
bar, rear parking assistance is switched off
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
• Park assist camera* (p. 246) automatically - otherwise the sensors would
constant and the active sensor's field nearest react to the trailer.
the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is
within the distance for the constant tone both
behind and in front of the car, then the tone
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
}}

07 Driver support
||
NOTE Park assist syst* - forward NOTE
Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike Front parking assistance is deactivated
carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genu- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on when the parking brake is applied or P
ine trailer wiring - parking assistance may the centre console's display screen indicate mode is selected in a car with an auto-
need to be switched off manually in order the distance to the detected obstacle. matic gearbox.
that the sensors do not react to them.
The parking assistance system is automati-
cally activated when the engine is started - IMPORTANT
Related information the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
• Park Assist* (p. 242) parking assistance is switched off with the When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
button, the lamp goes out. that these must not obscure the sensors -
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived
(p. 245) as an obstacle.
• Park assist syst* - function (p. 242)
• Park assist syst* - forward (p. 244) Related information
• Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 245) • Park Assist* (p. 242)
• Park assist camera* (p. 246) • Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 245)
• Park assist syst* - backward (p. 243)
The distance covered in front of the car is

about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for
07 obstacles in front comes from one of the front
loudspeakers.
Front park assist is active up to
approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is
illuminated in order to indicate that the sys-
tem is activated. When the speed is below
10 km/h the system is reactivated.

07 Driver support
Park assist syst* - fault indication Park assist syst* - cleaning the
Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- sensors
ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-
the centre console's display screen indicate ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the distance to the detected obstacle. the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
If the combined instrument panel's
information symbol illuminates with The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
constant glow and the text message ensure that they work properly. Clean them
Park Assist System Service required is with water and car shampoo.
shown then parking assistance is disen-
gaged.
Sensor location, rear.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assis- NOTE
tance system may produce incorrect warn- Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
ing signals that are caused by external may cause incorrect warning signals.
sound sources that emit the same ultra-
sonic frequencies that the system works
with. Related information
Examples of such sources include horns, • Park Assist* (p. 242)
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes • Park assist syst* - function (p. 242)
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Sensor location, front. • Park assist syst* - forward (p. 244)
Related information
• Park Assist* (p. 242) • Park assist syst* - backward (p. 243)
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors • Park assist camera* (p. 246) 07
(p. 245)
• Park assist syst* - forward (p. 244)
• Park assist syst* - backward (p. 243)

07 Driver support
Park assist camera* Function and operation where the car's rear wheels will roll with the
Parking camera is an auxiliary system, which current steering wheel angle - this facilitates
is activated when the reverse gear is selected. parallel parking, reversing into tight spaces
and for hitching a trailer. The car's approxi-
The camera image is shown on the centre mate external dimensions are illustrated by
console's screen. means of dashed lines. The park assist lines
can be deactivated - see section Settings
NOTE (p. 248).
When a towbar is configured with the car's If the car is also equipped with Parking assis-
electrical system, the protrusion of the tance sensors (p. 242)* then their information
towbar is included when the function is shown graphically as coloured areas in
measures the parking space. order to illustrate distances to detected
obstacles, see heading "Cars with reversing
Camera location next to the opening handle. sensors" later in the text.
WARNING
The camera shows what is behind the car The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
• The parking camera serves as an aid. and if something appears from the sides.
It does not relieve the driver of respon- reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
sibility when reversing. The camera shows a wide area behind the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h forward or
car and part of the bumper and any towbar. 35 km/h backward.
• The camera has blind spots, where
obstacles cannot be detected. Objects on the screen may appear to tilt Light conditions
• Be aware of people and animals in the slightly - this is normal. The camera image is adjusted automatically
vicinity of the car. according to prevailing light conditions.
NOTE Because of this, the image may vary slightly
in brightness and quality. Poor light condi-
Objects on the display screen may be
closer to the car than they appear to be on tions can result in a slightly reduced image
the screen. quality.
07
If another view is active then the parking NOTE

camera system takes over automatically and Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow
its camera image is displayed on the screen. and ice to ensure optimum function. This
is particularly important in poor light.
When reverse gear is selected, two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate

07 Driver support
Park assist lines IMPORTANT Cars with reversing sensors*

Bear in mind that the screen only shows
the area behind the car - pay attention to
the sides and front of the car when
manoeuvring during reversing.
Boundary lines
Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis- Four coloured areas (one per sensor) show dis-
played for the driver. tance.
The lines on the screen are projected as if If the car is also equipped with Parking assis-
they were at ground level behind the car and tance (p. 242) the distance is shown with col-
are directly related to steering wheel move- oured fields for each sensor that registers an
ment, which shows the driver the path the car obstacle.
will then take - also when the car is turning.
The system's different lines. The colour of the areas changes with
decreasing distance to the obstacle - from
NOTE Boundary line, free reversing zone
light yellow to yellow, via orange to red.
• When reversing with a trailer which is "Wheel tracks"
not connected electrically to the car, Colour / paint Distance (metres)
the lines on the display show the route The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to
the car will take - not the trailer. about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also Light yellow 0,7–1,5 07
the limit of the car's most protruding parts,
• The screen shows no lines when a
such as door mirrors and corners - also when Yellow 0,5–0,7
trailer is connected electrically to the
the car is turning.
car's electrical system. Orange 0,3–0,5
• The parking camera is deactivated The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and Red 0–0.3
automatically when towing a trailer if a
Volvo genuine trailer cable is used. can extend about 3.2 m back from the
bumper if no obstacle is in the way.
}}

07 Driver support
||
Related information Park assist camera - settings 3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/
• Park assist camera - settings (p. 248) MENU once and go back out with EXIT.
• Park assist camera - limitations (p. 249) Activate switched-off camera
If the camera function is switched off when Towbar
• Park Assist* (p. 242) reverse gear is selected, it is activated in the The camera can be used to advantage when
following way: hitching a trailer. A park assist line for the
towbar's intended "trajectory" toward the
trailer can be shown on the screen - exactly
as for the "wheel tracks".
A choice can be made between showing the
"wheel tracks" or the towbar's trajectory
- both options cannot be shown simultane-
ously.
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown.
2. Turn to reach the Tow bar trajectory
guide line option with TUNE.
3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/
• Press CAM - the screen shows the cur- MENU once and go back out with EXIT.
rent camera view. Zoom
If precise manoeuvring is required then the
Change setting camera view can be zoomed in:
The default setting is that the camera is acti-
vated when reverse gear is selected. • Press CAM or turn TUNE - repeated
press/turn changes back to the normal
The settings for the parking camera can be view.
07 changed when the screen shows a camera
If more options are available, they are in a
view:
loop - press/turn until the desired camera
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is view is shown.
shown - the screen changes to a menu
with various options.
2. Turn to reach the desired option with
TUNE.

07 Driver support
Automatic zoom Park assist camera - limitations BLIS*

In cars with Parking assistance (p. 242) and BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a
towbar, Automatic zoom is also available as NOTE function designed for providing support for
an option in the camera menu. With this the driver when driving in dense traffic on
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted
option selected, the camera zooms into the on the rear of the car could obscure the roads with several lanes in the same direction.
towbar automatically when the car camera's view.
approaches an object/trailer. BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a
warning about:
See the earlier heading "Change setting" for To bear in mind
how a menu option is activated. Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
• vehicles in the car's blind spot
only looks like a relatively small part of the • rapidly approaching vehicles in the left
Related information image is obscured, it could be a relatively and right-hand lanes closest to the car.
• Park assist camera* (p. 246) large sector that is hidden from view. Obsta- The BLIS function CTA (p. 251) (Cross Traffic
• Park Assist* (p. 242) cles could thereby go undetected until they Alert) is a driver's aid intended to provide a
are very close to the car. warning about:
• Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice • crossing traffic when the car is reversed.
and snow.
• Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- WARNING
warm water and car shampoo - take care
BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not
not to scratch the lens. work in all situations.
Related information BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving
• Park assist camera* (p. 246) style and the use of rearview and door mir-
rors.
• Park assist camera - settings (p. 248)
BLIS can never replace the driver's
• Park Assist* (p. 242) responsibility and attention - it is always
the driver's responsibility to change lanes 07
in a safe manner.
}}

07 Driver support
||
Overview BLIS* - operation
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a
function designed for providing support for
the driver when driving in dense traffic on
roads with several lanes in the same direction.
Activate/deactivate BLIS
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in
the door panels flashing once.
The BLIS function can be deactivated/acti-
vated the car's menu system (p. 113) MY
Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand CAR.
BLIS lamp location24. side.
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp
Indicator lamp • To ensure optimal functionality the areas
in the button extinguishes/illuminates and the
in front of the sensors must be kept
BLIS symbol clean. combined instrument panel confirms the
change with a text message. The door panel
Related information indicator lamps flash once upon activation.
NOTE • BLIS* - operation (p. 250) To extinguish the message:
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car • BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 253)
• Press the left stalk switch OK button.
where the system has detected the vehi-
cle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at
• CTA* (p. 251)
or
the same time then both lamps illuminate.
• Wait approx. 5 seconds - the message
extinguishes.
Maintenance
07 The sensors for the BLIS functions are
located inside the rear wing/bumper on each
corner of the car.

07 Driver support
When BLIS operates WARNING CTA*

The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
a driver aid intended to warn about crossing
BLIS does not work when the car is being traffic when the car is reversing. CTA is a sup-
reversed. plement to BLIS (p. 249).
Limitations Activate/deactivate CTA

• Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can CTA is activated when the engine is started.
reduce functionality and make it impossi- This is confirmed by the indicator lamps for
ble to provide warnings. BLIS cannot BLIS in the door panels flashing once.
detect hazards if it is covered.
• Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone
for rapidly approaching vehicle. • BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con-
nected to the car's electrical system.
The BLIS function is active at speeds above
approx. 10 km/h. IMPORTANT
The system is designed to react when: Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions'
• the driver's vehicle is overtaken by other components or repainting the bumpers
vehicles must only be performed by a workshop -
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
• the driver's vehicle is rapidly caught up mended.
by another vehicle. On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a Related information The CTA function can be deactivated/acti-
quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the vated separately with the Parking assistance
• BLIS* (p. 249)
door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a con- (p. 242) On/Off button. The BLIS lamps flash
stant glow. If the driver activates the direction • BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 253)
once on reactivation.
07
indicator on the same side as the warning in
this situation then the BLIS lamp will change However, the BLIS function remains activated
from a constant glow to flashing with a more after the CTA has been deactivated.
intense light.
}}

07 Driver support
||
WARNING CTA is only active during reversing and is
activated automatically when the gearbox's
CTA is a supplementary aid and does not reverse position is selected.
work in all situations.
CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style
• If CTA detects something approaching
from the side, an acoustic warning signal
and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
sounds. The signal comes from either the
CTA can never replace the driver's respon- left or the right-hand speaker, depending
sibility and attention - it is always the driv- on the direction from which the object is
er's responsibility to reverse in a safe man- approaching.
ner.
• CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS
lamps.
When CTA operates
• An additional warning is provided in the
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
form of an illuminated icon in the display
screen's PAS graphics (p. 242). Blind CTA sector.
Limitations Sector where CTA can detect/"see".

CTA does not perform optimally in all situa-
tions, but has a certain limitation - for exam-
ple, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through
other parked vehicles or obstructing objects.
Here are some examples of when CTA's "field
of vision" may be limited from the beginning
and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
Principle for CTA.
CTA supplements the BLIS function by being
07
able to see crossing traffic from the side dur-
ing reversing, such as when reversing out of a
parking space. In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely
"blind" on one side.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles.
In favourable conditions, it may also be able However, when the driver is slowly reversing
to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists the car, the angle is changed in relation to the
and pedestrians.
252

07 Driver support
vehicle/object that is blocking, at which the BLIS - symbols and messages

blind sector rapidly decreases. In situations where the BLIS (Blind Spot
Examples of further limitations: Information System) (p. 249) and CTA (Cross
Traffic Alert) (p. 251) functions fail or are inter-
• Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can rupted, the combined instrument panel may
reduce functionality and make it impossi-
show a symbol, supplemented by an explana-
ble to provide warnings. CTA cannot
tory message. Follow any recommendation
detect hazards if it is covered.
given.
• CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con-
nected to the car’s electrical system. Message examples:
IMPORTANT Message Specification

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand
side. CTA OFF CTA is manually switched
components or repainting the bumpers
off - BLIS is active.
must only be performed by a workshop - • To ensure optimal functionality the areas
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- in front of the sensors must be kept BLIS and BLIS and CTA are tempo-
mended. clean. CTA OFF rarily non-operational
• Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in Trailer because a trailer is con-
Maintenance the area of the sensors. attached nected to the car's electri-
The sensors for the BLIS and CTA functions cal system.
are located inside the rear wing/bumper on Related information
each corner of the car. • BLIS* (p. 249) BLIS and BLIS and CTA are non-
• BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 253) CTA Serv- operational.
ice required • Visit a workshop if the
message remains - an
authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended. 07
A text message can be acknowledged by

briefly pressing the OK button on the direc-
tion indicator stalk.
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 249)

07 Driver support
Adjustable steering force* Type approval - radar system

Speed related power steering causes the Type approval for the radar system can be
steering wheel force to increase with the read in the table.
speed of the car in order to give the driver
enhanced sensitivity. Coun-
try/
On motorways the steering feels firmer.
Area
Steering is light and requires no extra effort
when parking and at low speed. Europe
The driver can choose between three differ- Delphi Electronics &
ent levels of steering force for road respon- Safety hereby declares that
siveness or steering sensitivity in the menu L2C0038TR and L2C0049TR
system MY CAR, MY CAR (p. 113): are in compliance with the
essential requirements and
• Once there, search for Steering wheel
other relevant provisions of
force and select Low, Medium or High.
Directive 1999/5/EC. This dec-
This setting is not accessible when the car is laration of conformity may, if
moving. necessary, be consulted with
Delphi Electronics & Safety /
NOTE One Corporate Center /
In certain situations the power steering Kokomo, Indiana 46904-9005
may become too hot and then needs to be USA.
temporarily cooled - during this time the
power steering operates with reduced Related information
power and turning the steering wheel may • Radar sensor (p. 207)
then be perceived to be slightly heavier.
07 In parallel with the temporarily reduced
steering assistance the combined instru-
ment panel shows a message.
Related information
• MY CAR (p. 113)

STARTING AND DRIVING

Alcolock* Alcolock* - functions and operation Indicator Battery status

The function of the Alcolock1 is to prevent the lamp (4)
car from being driven by individuals under the Functions
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be Green flash- Charging in progress
started the driver must take a breath test that ing
verifies that he/she is not under the influence
Green Fully charged
of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in Yellow Semi-charged
force for driving legally.
Red Discharged - fit the charger
WARNING in the holder or connect the
power supply cable from
The Alcolock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is the glovebox.
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely. NOTE
Nozzle for breath test.
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
Related information Switch. keep the built-in battery fully charged and
• Alcolock* - functions and operation the Alcolock is activated automatically
(p. 256) Transmission button. when the car is opened.
• Alcolock* - storage (p. 257)
Lamp for battery status.
• Alcolock* - before starting the engine Related information
(p. 257) Lamp for result of breath test. • Alcolock* (p. 256)
• Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 259)
Lamp indicates ready for breath test. • Alcolock* - storage (p. 257)
• Alcolock* - symbols and text messages • Alcolock* - before starting the engine
(p. 260) Operation - battery (p. 257)
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta- • Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 259)
tus: • Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 260)
08
1 Also called Alcoguard.

Alcolock* - storage • Alcolock* - symbols and text messages Alcolock* - before starting the engine
Store the Alcolock in its holder. Release the (p. 260) The Alcolock is activated automatically and is
handheld unit by depressing it slightly in its then ready for use when the car is opened.
holder and releasing it - it then springs out
and can be removed from the holder.
Nozzle for breath test.
Handheld unit storage and charging station. Switch.

• Replace the handheld unit in the holder Transmission button.
by pushing it in until it engages.
• Store the handheld unit in the holder - Lamp for battery status.
this provides it with the best protection
Lamp for result of breath test.
and keeps its batteries fully charged.
Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Related information
• Alcolock* (p. 256)
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the
• Alcolock* - functions and operation Alcolock is ready for use.
(p. 256)
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
• Alcolock* - before starting the engine the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
(p. 257) unlocked then it must first be activated 08
• Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 259) with the switch (2).
}}

||
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath Result after breath test • Alcolock* - storage (p. 257)
and blow with an even pressure until a • Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 259)
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. Indicator lamp Specification
The result will be one of the alternatives in (5) + Display • Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
the following table Result after breath text (p. 260)
test.
Green lamp + Start the engine - no
4. If no message is shown then the trans- Alcoguard alcohol content meas-
mission to the car may have failed - in Approved test ured.
which case, press the button (3) to trans-
mit the result to the car manually. Yellow lamp + Engine starting possi-
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alco- Alcoguard ble - measured alcohol
lock in its holder. Approved test content is above
0.1 promille but below
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it the limit value in
must be repeated. forceA.
Red lamp + Dis- Engine starting not

approved test possible - measured
Wait 1 minute alcohol content is
to try again above the limit value in
forceA.
A Limit values vary from country to country. Find out what
applies in your country. See also Alcolock* (p. 256)
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
08 • Alcolock* (p. 256)
• Alcolock* - functions and operation
(p. 256)

Alcolock* - to bear in mind The message can be cleared by pressing the Emergency situation
In order to obtain correct function and as send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out In the event of an emergency situation or the
accurate a measurement result as possible: on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to
reappears each time the engine is started - bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
• Avoid eating or drinking approx. only recalibration at a workshop2 can clear
5 minutes before the breath test. the message permanently. NOTE
• Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
All Bypass activation is logged and saved
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes in memory, see Recording data (p. 18).
an incorrect measurement result.
before the Alcolock is ready for use:
Change of driver After the Bypass function has been activated
Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat- the combined instrument panel shows
In order to ensure that a new breath test is
ing time (sec- Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time
carried out in the event of a change of driver -
onds) while driving and can only be reset by a work-
depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
shop2.
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
+10 to +85 10
which point the car returns to start inhibition The Bypass function can be tested without
mode and a new approved breath test is -5 to +10 60 the error message being logged - in which
required before starting the engine. case, carry out all the steps without starting
-40 to -5 180 the car. The error message is cleared when
Calibration and service the car is locked.
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated At temperatures below -20 ºC or above When the Alcolock is installed, either the
at a workshop2 every 12 months. +60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
30 days before recalibration is necessary the supply. The combined instrument panel the bypassing option. This setting can be
combined instrument panel shows the mes- shows Alcoguard Please insert power
changed afterwards at a workshop2.
sage Alcoguard Calibration required See cable. In which case, connect the power
manual. If calibration is not carried out within supply cable from the glovebox and wait until Activating the Bypass function
these 30 days then normal engine starting will indicator lamp (6) is green. • Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
be blocked - only starting with the Bypass In extremely cold weather the heating time switch OK button and the button for haz-
function will then be possible, see the follow- can be reduced by taking the Alcolock ard warning flashers simultaneously for
ing heading "Emergency situation". indoors. approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru-
ment panel first shows Bypass activated 08
Please wait for 1 minute and then
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

}}

||
Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after Alcolock* - symbols and text Display text Meaning/Action
which the engine can be started. messages
This function can be activated several times. In addition to the previously described mes- Alcoguard Blowing too hard - blow
The error message shown during driving can sages related to how the alcolock works Please blow more gently.
only be cleared at a workshop2. before starting the engine (p. 257) the com- softer
bined instrument panel's display can also
Activating the Emergency function Alcoguard Blowing too weak -
show the following:
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalk Please blow blow harder.
switch OK button and the button for haz- harder
Display text Meaning/Action
ard warning flashers simultaneously for
Alcoguard Heating not finished -
approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru- Alcoguard The engine has been
preheating wait for text Alcoguard
ment panel shows Alcoguard Bypass Restart possi- switched off for less
enabled and the engine can be started. than 30 minutes - Please wait Please blow for 5 sec-
ble
engine starting possible onds.
This function can be used once, after which a
reset must be made at a workshop2. without new test. A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information Alcoguard Contact a workshopA. Related information

Service • Alcolock* (p. 256)
• Alcolock* - functions and operation
required
(p. 256) • Alcolock* - functions and operation
• Alcolock* - storage (p. 257) Alcoguard No Transmission failed - (p. 256)
• Alcolock* - before starting the engine signal send manually with but- • Alcolock* - storage (p. 257)
(p. 257) received ton (3) or take a new • Alcolock* - before starting the engine
breath test. (p. 257)
• Alcolock* (p. 256)
• Alcolock* - symbols and text messages Alcoguard Test failed - take a new • Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 259)
(p. 260) Please try breath test.
again
Alcoguard Blowing too short - blow

Please blow for longer.
longer
08

Starting the engine 1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- IMPORTANT
The engine is started and switched off using tion switch and press it in to its end posi-
tion. Note that if the car is equipped with If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
the remote control key and the START/STOP wait for 3 minutes before making a further
ENGINE button. Alcolock* then a breath test must first be
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
approved before the engine can be battery is allowed to recover.
Diesel engine started. For more information on the
Alcolock, see Alcolock* (p. 256).
WARNING
2. Fully depress the brake pedal3.
Never remove the remote control key from
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button the ignition switch after starting the engine
and then release it. or when the car is being towed.
When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its WARNING
overheating protection triggers.
Always remove the remote control key
When starting the engine in normal conditions from the ignition switch when leaving the
the car's electric drive motor is prioritised - car, and make sure that the key position is
the diesel engine remains switched off. This 0 - in particular if there are children in the
means that after pressing the START/STOP car. For information on how this works -
Ignition switch with remote control key extrac- ENGINE button the electric motor has see Key positions (p. 80).
ted/inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button. "started" and the car is ready to drive. A
started motor is indicated by the combined NOTE
IMPORTANT instrument panel's indicator lamps extin-
guishing and its preset theme illuminating The idling speed can be noticeably higher
Do not press in the remote control key than normal for certain engine types during
incorrectly turned - hold the end with the (see Digital combined instrument panel -
overview (p. 67)). cold starting. This is done in order that the
detachable key blade, see Detachable key emissions system can reach normal oper-
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 167). ating temperature as quickly as possible,
However, there are situations where the die-
sel engine is started instead, e.g. in the event which minimises exhaust emissions and
of the temperature being too low or if the protects the environment.
hybrid battery needs charging.
08
3 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine.
}}

||
Keyless drive* Switching off the engine Steering lock
Follow steps 2-3 for keyless (p. 170) starting The engine is switched off using the START/ The steering lock makes steering difficult if
of the engine. STOP ENGINE button. the car is e.g. taken unlawfully.
NOTE To stop the engine: Function

• Press START/STOP ENGINE - the • The steering lock unlocks when the
A prerequisite for the engine to start is that remote control key is in the ignition
one of the car's remote control keys with engine stops.
switch4 and the START/STOP ENGINE
the Keyless drive function is in the passen- If the gear selector is not in P position or if
ger compartment or cargo area. button is depressed.
the car is moving:
• The steering lock locks when the driver's
• Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or door is opened after the engine has been
WARNING hold the button depressed until the switched off.
engine stops.
Never remove the remote control key from A mechanical noise can be perceived when
the car while driving or during towing. Related information the steering lock unlocks or locks.
• Key positions (p. 80)
Related information
Related information
• Switching off the engine (p. 262)
• Starting the engine (p. 261)
• Key positions (p. 80)
• Steering wheel (p. 87)
08
4 Cars with Keyless drive only need to have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.

Jump starting with battery 2. Check that the donor battery has a volt- 7. Connect one of the black jump lead's
If the starter battery (p. 369) is discharged age of 12 V. clamps to the donor battery's negative
then the car can be started with current from terminal (3).
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
another battery. car - switch off the donor car's engine 8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding
and make sure that the two cars do not point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at
touch each other. the top, the outer screw head (4).
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's 9. Check that the jump lead clamps are
clamps to the donor battery's positive affixed securely so that there are no
terminal (1). sparks during the starting procedure.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
IMPORTANT allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid slightly higher than idle
short circuits with other components in the approx. 1500 rpm.
engine compartment.
When jump starting the car, the following

steps are recommended to avoid short cir-
cuits or other damage:
1. Set the car's electrical system in key
position 0, see Key positions - functions
at different levels (p. 81).
IMPORTANT
After key position 0: Wait approx. 2 5. Open the clips on the front cover of the
minutes before connecting the donor bat- battery in your car and remove the
tery, in order to allow the control system to cover.
first set the necessary parameters.
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2). 08
}}
263

||
11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- WARNING Drive systems
charged battery with the remote control This V60 Plug-in Hybrid is a so-called parallel
key inserted and a press the START/ • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
hybrid, which means that it has two separate
STOP ENGINE button, see Starting the gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is con-
drive systems: an electric motor and a diesel
engine (p. 261). engine. Depending on the driver-selected
nected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode. drive mode and available electric energy, the
NOTE two drive systems can be used either individ-
• The battery contains sulphuric acid, ually or in parallel.
When starting the engine in normal condi- which can cause serious burns.
tions the car's electric drive motor is priori-
tised - the diesel engine remains switched • If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with Two drive systems
off. This means that after pressing the
large quantities of water. If acid An advanced control system combines the
START/STOP ENGINE button the electric
motor has "started" and the car is ready to splashes into the eyes - seek medical properties of both drive systems in order to
drive. A started motor is indicated by the attention immediately. provide optimum driving economy.
combined instrument panel's indicator
lamps extinguishing and its preset theme
illuminating. Related information
• Starting the engine (p. 261)
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the
start procedure. There is a risk of sparks
forming.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -

first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the
clamp connected to the red jump lead!
08 13. Refit the front cover for the battery in your

car.
264

• Drive system - symbols and messages Drive system - drive modes

(p. 269) Both of the car's drive systems are used
either individually or in parallel. The driver can
select between different drive modes while
driving. Regardless of selected drive mode,
the control system checks that the combina-
tion of drivability, driving experience, environ-
mental impact and fuel economy is always
optimal in relation to the selected drive mode.
If a drive mode cannot be activated then the

reason is explained with a text message in
the combined instrument panel.
Hybrid battery
High-voltage generator5 NOTE

Diesel engine The drive cannot set the "wrong" drive
mode - if any parameter is not met in a
Electric motor specific situation, the system will automati-
cally choose another, more appropriate
The electric motor primarily drives the car at drive mode.
low speeds, the diesel engine at higher
speeds and during more active driving.
Both the diesel engine and electric motor can
generate motive force directly to the wheels.
The diesel engine can also charge the electric
motor's hybrid battery with a special high-
voltage generator.
Related information
• Drive system - drive modes (p. 265)
• Energy flow (p. 268) 08
5 Combined high-voltage generator and starter motor - ISG (Integrated Starter Generator).
}}
265

||
Since the mileage in electric operation is con- – HYBRID
nected to the car's total energy consumption, This option is the car's pre-
deductions are made for functions that limit set start mode. The control
mileage, e.g. climate and dynamic perform- system uses both the electric
ance. To obtain the maximum possible mile- motor and diesel engine -
age the air conditioning (p. 131) is therefore individually or in parallel -
switched off - however, it can be activated and calculates the optimal
with the AC button if necessary. use with regard to perform-
ance, fuel consumption and comfort.
NOTE
The capacity to run solely with the electric
In the event of misting, press AC, AUTO or motor in the HYBRID drive mode depends on
the defroster button. the hybrid battery's energy level and, for
Controls for drive modes.
example, the requirement for heating/cooling
Please note in the passenger compartment. At high level
WARNING the capacity for solely driving with electric
This drive mode can only be selected when
• Do not leave the car in an unventilated the hybrid battery has a sufficiently high operation is same as in PURE mode, i.e. the
area with drive mode activated and the energy level. car is easy to drive as an electric car (high
diesel engine switched off - the engine electrical power output available).
will start automatically when the The diesel engine can start automatically in
certain cases, despite the PURE drive mode At low energy level (hybrid battery is almost
energy level in the hybrid battery is
low, and the exhaust fumes may cause being selected, for example.: empty) the battery's energy level must also
serious harm to humans and animals. be maintained at the same time, leading to
• if the speed exceeds 125 km/h the diesel engine starting more often.
• if the driver requests more motive force
To restore the function to run solely on elec-
– PURE than electric drive can provide
tricity in HYBRID mode:
This option focuses on elec- • if the hybrid battery's energy level is too
tric operation as well as low low and it must be charged • Charge the hybrid battery from a 230
energy consumption, and VAC socket with the charging cable (see
• in the event if system/component limita- Charging current (p. 295)) or use the
helps the driver to maximise tions, e.g. low outside temperature, see
driving on the hybrid battery. SAVE function.
Energy flow (p. 268).
08 Please note
• The diesel engine may even start with a
high energy level in the hybrid battery,
266

such as to raise/lower the temperature in Please note ation will maintain the hybrid battery's current
the passenger compartment. • The diesel engine runs continuously. energy level.
– POWER • This drive mode results involves Regardless of selected drive mode, charging
increased fuel consumption. of the hybrid battery is activated temporarily
This option sets the car in
the best response and per- in the background - similar to the SAVE func-
– SAVE tion - then an automatic DPF (p. 293) regen-
formance mode, by means of This function starts charging
both the electric motor and eration is performed.
the hybrid battery and
diesel engine being activated ensures that its energy level Please note
the whole time. The car has does not fall below a • This drive mode results involves
sportier characteristics and capacity equivalent to increased fuel consumption.
faster response to accelerating. approx. 20 km driving with • After the diesel engine has charged the
During active driving, the use of a lower gears electric operation. The idea hybrid battery to the SAVE level the con-
is prioritised, leading to a delayed upshift. is to be able to save this energy for later trol system will stop/start the diesel
when electric operation is more suitable, e.g. engine in the same way as for low energy
Please note for urban driving. level in HYBRID mode.
• The diesel engine runs continuously.
If the hybrid battery's energy level is low Drive modes in MY CAR
• The car is driven by both the front and when pressing the SAVE button then the die-
rear wheels. The car's menu system (p. 113) contains brief
sel engine will first charge it to a capacity descriptions about the car's different drive
• This drive mode results involves equivalent to approx. 20 km driving with elec- modes.
increased fuel consumption. tric operation.
1. Go to MY CAR HYBRID Driving
– AWD Driving with the electric motor saves more
modes.
The mode activates all-wheel fuel at low speeds than at higher speeds.
drive, which improves the Therefore, select SAVE primarily when the 2. There, select between PURE, HYBRID,
car's grip and traction. The hybrid battery's energy level is high and a POWER, AWD and SAVE and confirm
mode is primarily designed planned journey shall start with a longer dis- with OK.
for low speed on slippery tance at higher speeds (e.g. on motorways)
and end with a distance at low speeds when Start/Stop function
road surfaces, but all-wheel
electric operation is required. The control system determines when the die-
drive also has a stabilising
sel engine can be stopped and be switched
effect at higher speeds. Pressing the SAVE button when the hybrid 08
off, as well as for how long. This is equivalent
battery's energy level is equivalent to more to the Start/Stop function in conventional
than approx. 20 km driving with electric oper- cars with fuel-driven engines.
}}
267

||
Trip statistics Energy flow
The car stores the statistics (p. 120) of con- The centre console's screen can graphically
sumed electricity/diesel related to mileage display whether the engine or motor is driving
travelled. the car and how the energy is flowing - it
Apart from via the trip computer, the trip sta- shows, for example, whether the hybrid bat-
tistics can also be accessed via the MY CAR tery is charging or providing energy to the
menu system: electric motor.
• Go to MY CAR Trip statistics and

confirm with OK.
Related information
• Drive systems (p. 264)
• Drive system - symbols and messages
(p. 269)
• Energy flow (p. 268)
The function to display the energy flow is

activated in the menu system MY CAR:
• Search for HYBRID Power flow and
confirm with OK.
Related information
08
268

Drive system - symbols and This symbol illuminates in combina- The same thing happens if an unbelted driver
messages tion with a text message and an starts the engine with the driver's door open.
In some situations the drive system can dis- acoustic warning signal if an unbel-
Here are some examples of messages, their
play a message in the combined instrument ted driver opens the driver's door
meaning and suggestions for action:
panel - follow the recommendation given if with the diesel engine or electric motor run-
appropriate. ning.
Message Specification Action

PURE not available due to low hybrid One or more components in the drive system have Drive in HYBRID mode until the message
system temperature not reached the correct operating temperature. changes to PURE available - then press
the PURE button.
PURE not available due to temporary Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating tem- Drive in HYBRID mode until the message
hybrid system limitations perature not correct. changes to PURE available - then press
the PURE button.
PURE not available due to low battery The hybrid battery's energy level is too low. Drive in SAVE mode until the message
charge changes to PURE available or charge the
battery with a charging cable and 230 VAC
- then press the PURE button.
PURE not available when gear lever in The gear selector is in manual "+/-" position. Move the gear selector to the side, to auto-
manual position matic mode and then press the PURE but-
ton.
PURE available The PURE mode is available again after the previ- –
ous limitation.
POWER not available due to temporary Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating tem- –
hybrid system limitations perature not correct.
08
}}
269

||
Message Specification Action
SAVE not available due to temporary Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating tem- –
AWD not available due to temporary Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating tem- –
Related information
08
270

Gearboxes Gear shift indicator* Combined instrument panel "Digital" with

An V60 Plug-in Hybrid is driven and operated The gear shift indicator notifies the driver gear shift indicator.
in the same way as a car with a conventional when it is appropriate to engage the next The framed number indicates the current
internal combustion engine and automatic higher or lower gear. gear.
gearbox.
An essential detail in connection with environ- Related information
The exception is that with the gear selector in mental driving is to drive in the right gear and
manual gear position (+/-) the diesel engine
• Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 272)
to change gear in plenty of time.
will always be running. The driver must then
change manually and the car engine brakes An indicator is available as an aid on some
when the accelerator pedal is released, see variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 272). notifies the driver when it is appropriate to
engage the next higher or lower gear in order
IMPORTANT to obtain the lowest possible fuel consump-
tion.
To prevent damage to any drive system
components, the working temperature of However, taking into consideration characte-
the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of ristics such as performance and vibration-free
overheating, a warning symbol is illumi- running, it may be advantageous to change
nated in the combined instrument panel in gear at a higher engine speed. The framed
conjunction with a text message being number indicates the current gear.
shown. Follow the recommendation given
in the text message. Automatic gearbox
Related information
• Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 272)
08

Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic Parking position - P WARNING

The Geartronic gearbox has two different gear Select position P when starting the engine or
when the car is parked. Always apply the parking brake when
modes - Automatic and Manual. parking on a slope - the automatic trans-
• In order to be able to move the gear mission's P position is not sufficient to
selector from P-position, the brake pedal hold the car in all situation.
must first be depressed firmly.
Reverse position - R
NOTE The car must be stationary when R position is
When starting the engine there is an auto- selected.
matic function check of the brake system
when the driver depresses the brake pedal Neutral position - N
to take the gear selector from the P-posi- No gear is engaged and the engine can be
tion. During the function check the pedal started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
travel is slightly longer than during normal stationary with the gear selector in N position.
braking.
Drive position - D
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear D is the normal driving position. Shifting up
positions. S6: Sport mode*. The gearbox is mechanically blocked when
the P position is engaged. Also apply the and down takes place automatically based on
Combined instrument panel (p. 66) shows the parking brake (p. 280), as a precaution. the level of acceleration and speed. The car
position of the gear selector using the follow- must be stationary when the gear selector is
ing indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc. moved to D position from R position.
NOTE
Gear positions The gear selector must be in P position to Geartronic – Manual gear positions
Automatic gear positions are allow the car to be locked and alarmed. (+S-)
indicated on the right of the With the gear selector in manual gear position
combined instrument panel. "+S-" the diesel engine is permanently in
(Only one marker is illumi-
IMPORTANT
operation. The driver must then change man-
nated at a time - the one The car must be stationary when posi- ually and the car engine brakes when the
showing the current gear tion P is selected. accelerator pedal is released.
selector position.)
08
6 The "Sport mode" function is not available in a V60 Plug-in Hybrid - only "+" and "-".

The manual gear position is reached ment panel changes indication from D to down in this way at high engine speed – the
by moving the lever to the side from the figure 1. original gear remains engaged.
position D to the end position at 2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever When kick-down is activated the car can
"+S-". The combined instrument forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the dis- change one or more gears at a time depend-
panel's symbol "+S-" changes colour from play shifts the indication from 1 to 3. ing on engine speed. The car changes up
WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3 etc.
3. Release the brake and accelerate care- when the engine reaches its maximum speed
are displayed in a box, corresponding to the fully. in order to prevent damage to the engine.
gear that has just been selected.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the
• Move the lever forwards towards "+" car moves off with a lower engine speed and Towing
(plus) to change up a gear and release the reduced engine power on the drive wheels. If the car has to be towed - see important
lever, which returns to its rest position information in the section Towing (p. 312).
between + and –. Kick-down
or When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the Related information
way to the floor (beyond the position normally • Transmission fluid - grade and volume
• Pull the lever back towards "–" (minus) to
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is (p. 406)
change down a gear and release it.
immediately engaged. This is known as kick- • Gearboxes (p. 271)
The manual gearshift mode "+S–" can be down.
selected at any time while driving.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the down position, the gearbox automatically
driver allows the speed to decrease lower changes up.
than a level suitable for the selected gear, in
order to avoid jerking and stalling. Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
To return to automatic driving mode:
Safety function
• Move the lever to the side to the end
position at D. To prevent overrevving the engine, the gear-
box control program has a protective down-
Geartronic - Winter mode shift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads function.
if 3rd gear is engaged manually. Geartronic does not permit downshifting/
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the kick-down which would result in an engine 08
gear selector from D position to the end speed high enough to damage the engine.
position at "+S–" - the combined instru- Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift
273

Gear selector inhibitor Parking position (P) Deactivate automatic gear selector
There are two different types of gear selector Stationary car with engine running: inhibitor
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
• Keep your foot on the brake pedal when
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor moving the gear selector to another posi-
tion.
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock

Parking position (P)
To be able to move the gear selector from P
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the remote control key
must be in key position II (p. 81).
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)

If the gear selector is in N position and the
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
G021351
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds

starter battery, the gear selector must be
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
M: Manual shifting7 - "+/-" or "Sport" mode8. moved from the P position so that the car can
then the gear selector is locked.
be moved.
The gear selector can be moved forward and To be able to move the gear selector from N
back freely between N and D. Other positions Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
are locked with a latch that is released with behind the centre console and locate a
be depressed and the remote control key
the inhibitor button on the gear selector. hole9 for the key blade (p. 167) in the bot-
must be in key position II, see Key positions
tom of the compartment.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever (p. 80).
can be moved forwards or backwards Search for a spring-loaded button down
between P, R, N and D. in the hole with the key blade; depress
the button with the blade and hold.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
Move the gear selector from the P posi-
The automatic gearbox has special safety
tion and pull up the key blade.
systems:
4. Set the rubber mat back in place.
08
7 The illustration is schematic.

8 Not on the V60H.
9 There may be 2 holes - one for the key blade and one that fixes the rubber mat.
274

Related information Hill start assist (HSA)* All Wheel Drive - AWD
• Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 272) The foot brake can be released before setting Optimal traction is achieved with all-wheel
off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start drive.
Assist) function means that the car does not
roll backwards. Use this button on the centre
console to activate all-wheel
The function means that the pedal pressure in drive (AWD – All Wheel
the brake system remains for several seconds Drive), see Drive system -
while the driver's foot is moved from brake drive modes (p. 265). The
pedal to accelerator pedal. mode is primarily intended
for use at low speed in slip-
The temporary braking effect releases after
pery driving conditions. All-wheel drive also
several seconds or when the driver acceler-
has a stabilising effect at higher speeds.
ates.
To achieve the best possible traction and pre-
Related information vent wheel spin the motive force is distributed
• Starting the engine (p. 261) automatically to the wheels with the best grip.
Under normal driving conditions, the majority
of power is transmitted to the front wheels.
08

Foot brake For more general information on heavy loads Battery charging with engine braking is indi-
The foot brake is used to reduce the car's on the car, see Engine oil - adverse driving cated in the combined instrument panel
speed while driving. conditions (p. 402). (p. 67) with animation.
This function is active in the speed range
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If Function check when the engine is 150-5 km/h - for harder braking, as well as
a brake circuit is damaged then the brake started outside the speed range, the braking is com-
pedal will engage deeper and a higher pres- A V60 Plug-in Hybrid is equipped with a so- plemented by the hydraulic brake system.
sure on the pedal is needed to produce the called "brake by wire" brake system. After
normal braking effect. each time the engine is started there is an Cleaning the brake discs
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted automatic function check of the brake system Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
by a brake servo. when the driver depresses the brake pedal to may result in delayed brake function. With
take the gear selector from the P position, wet road surfaces, prior to long-stay parking
see Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 272). and after the car has been washed, it is there-
WARNING In connection with the function check, in fore advisable to carry out cleaning by brak-
The brake servo doesn't operate until after some cases, the information display may ing gently for a short period while driving.
the engine has been started, see Starting show a message and a symbol, see examples
the engine (p. 261). in the table at the end of this section. Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-
ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as
If the foot brake is used in a de-energised car NOTE
specified in the Service and Warranty Book-
with the electricity and diesel engine switched During the function check the pedal travel let.
off - e.g. if the car is being towed - then pedal is slightly longer than during normal brak-
travel is slightly longer and a higher pedal ing.
pressure must be used to brake the car. IMPORTANT
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a The wear on the brake system's compo-
Light braking - hybrid battery charging nents must be checked regularly.
heavy load the brakes can be relieved by The electric motor's engine brake is used
using engine braking. Engine braking is most during light braking. The car's kinetic energy Contact a workshop for information about
efficiently used if the same gear is used the procedure or engage a workshop to
is then converted to electrical energy instead,
downhill as up. carry out the inspection - an authorised
which is used to charge the hybrid battery. Volvo workshop is recommended.
08
276

Symbols and messages

Constant glow – Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the
cause of the brake fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started - automatic function check.
Fully depress the brake Foot pressure on the brake pedal is too low.
pedal in order to leave
• Depress the pedal further.
the P-position
Brake pedal characte- May be shown in very cold weather or if the gear selector has been moved from the P position with the
ristics changed Service brake pedal insufficiently depressed.
required
• Switch off the engine by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button - start the engine again and
depress the brake pedal.
If the error message remains: Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
08
}}
277

||
WARNING
If and illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake sys-
tem.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
nearest workshop and have the brake sys-
tem checked - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur-
ther before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
Related information
• Parking brake (p. 280)
• Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers
(p. 279)
• Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 279)
• Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 279)
08
278

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system Foot brake - emergency brake lights Foot brake - emergency brake
The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock and automatic hazard warning assistance
Braking System), prevents the wheels from flashers Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency
locking up during braking. Emergency brake lights are activated to alert Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The force and so reduce the braking distance.
The function allows the steering ability to be function means that the brake light flashes
maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid instead of - as in normal braking - shining with EBA detects the driver's braking style and
a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in a constant glow. increases the braking force when necessary.
the brake pedal when this is engaged and this The brake force can be reinforced up to the
is normal. Emergency brake lights are activated at level when the ABS system is engaged. The
A short test of the ABS system is made auto- speeds above 50 km/h in the event of sudden EBA function is interrupted when the pressure
matically after the engine has been started braking. After the car's speed has been on the brake pedal is reduced.
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A slowed below 10 km/h the brake light returns
further automatic test of the ABS system may from flashing to the normal constant glow - NOTE
be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The while at the same time the hazard warning
When EBA is activated the brake pedal
test may be experienced as pulses in the flashers (p. 97) are activated, and they flash
lowers slightly more than usual, depress
brake pedal. until the driver changes engine speed with the (hold) the brake pedal as long as neces-
accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with sary. If the brake pedal is released then all
Related information their button. braking ceases.
• Foot brake (p. 276)
Related information
• Foot brake (p. 276) Related information
• Foot brake - emergency brake lights and • Foot brake (p. 276)
automatic hazard warning flashers • Parking brake (p. 280)
(p. 279) • Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 279) • Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
• Foot brake - emergency brake assistance automatic hazard warning flashers
(p. 279) • Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 279)
(p. 279)
• Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 279)
08
279

Parking brake Applying the parking brake LOCK/PULL RELEASE. The braking proce-
The parking brake holds the car stationary, dure is stopped when the control is released.
when the driver's seat is empty, by mechani-
cally locking/blocking two wheels. NOTE
Function In the event of emergency braking at
speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds
A faint electric motor noise can be heard during the braking procedure.
when the electrical parking brake is being
applied. The noise can also be heard during
the automatic function checking of the park- Parking on a hill
ing brake. If the car is parked facing uphill:
If the car is stationary when the parking brake • Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If the car is parked facing downhill:
If it is applied when the car is moving then the Parking brake control - apply.
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
• Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
on all four wheels. Brake function changes
over to the rear wheels when the car is almost 2. Press the control PUSH LOCK/PULL WARNING
stationary. RELEASE.
Always apply the parking brake when
> The combined instrument pan- parking on a slope - leaving the car in
Low battery voltage el's symbol starts flashing - once there gear, or in P if it has automatic transmis-
If the battery voltage is too low then the park- is a constant glow the parking brake is sion, is not sufficient to hold the car in all
ing brake can neither be released nor applied. situation.
applied.
Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage
is too low, see Jump starting with battery 3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
(p. 263). sure that the car is at a standstill position.
• When parking the vehicle put the gear
selector in the P position.
Emergency brake
In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is in motion by
08 pressing and holding the control for PUSH
280

Disengaging the parking brake Releasing automatically is released automatically on a steep incline.
1. Put the seatbelt on. Avoid this by depressing the control while
driving off. Release the control when the
2. Start the engine.
engine achieves traction.
3. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
Replacing the brake linings
4. Move the gear selector to position D or R The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
and depress the accelerator. workshop due to the design of the electric
> The parking brake releases and parking brake - an authorised Volvo work-
the combined instrument panel's sym- shop is recommended.
bol extinguishes.
Symbols and messages
For information on how the combined instru-
NOTE
ment panel's text messages can be shown
Parking brake control - release. For safety reasons, the parking brake is and deleted, see Messages - handling
only released automatically if the engine is (p. 112).
Releasing manually running and the driver is wearing a seat-
1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- belt. The parking brake is released imme-
tion switch10. diately on cars with automatic gearbox
when the accelerator pedal is depressed
2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly. and the gear selector is in position D or R.
3. Pull the control.
> The parking brake releases and Heavy load uphill
the combined instrument panel's sym- A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
bol extinguishes. car to roll backward when the parking brake
08
10 For a car with the Keyless system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.

}}
281

||
"Message" • Read the combined instrument panel's message.
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.

If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen.
• Read the combined instrument panel's message.
Handbrake not A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released:
fully released
• Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
• Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.
Handbrake not A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied:
applied
• Try to release and apply the brake.
The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door
open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.
Handbrake A fault has arisen:

Service
• Try to apply and release the brake.
required
08 • If the car has to be parked before a pos- the gear selector must be set in position A text message can be acknowledged by
sible fault is rectified then the wheels P. briefly pressing the OK button on the direc-
must be turned as if parking on a hill and tion indicator stalk.
282

Related information
• Foot brake (p. 276)
08
283

Planning your driving Here is some advice that reduces power con- required, the internal combustion engine
It is important to plan carefully when driving in sumption (allowing longer possible mileage) starts automatically so that heating takes
electric mode in order to achieve the longest without the need for travelling time to place. The car can be driven electrically but
possible driving distance. increase or driving pleasure to decrease. with reduced power if the temperature
becomes too low.
Utilise electric operation as much as possible:
• Do not hold the car stationary on a hill
with the accelerator pedal. Use the foot Similarly, the system may need to be cooled
• Find out where the charging stations are brake instead. down when driving in hot conditions.
located. • Use engine braking and smooth operation
NOTE
• Prioritise choosing a parking space with a of the foot brake when braking - this
charging station. recharges the hybrid battery and extends If the outside temperature drops extremely
• Balance electricity consumption with the the possible mileage with the electric low then the diesel engine will always be
accelerator pedal, and by these means motor. running.
use the advantages of the electric motor. • High speed increases power consump-
tion considerably due to increased wind Power consumers
WARNING resistance - doubling speed increases The more power consumers in the car that
wind resistance 4 times. are switched on (e.g. stereo, electrically
Remember that the car does not emit any
engine noise when it is only powered by • Maintain the car regularly - follow Volvo's heated windows, door mirrors, seats, etc.) the
the electric motor and may therefore be recommended service intervals. higher the energy consumption.
difficult to notice by children, pedestrians, • Towing another car consumes a lot of
Related information
cyclists and animals. This applies in partic- electricity - use the AWD mode. This then
ular at low speeds, such as in car parks. charges the hybrid battery, in combina- • Economical driving (p. 294)
tion with improving the car's driving cha- • Winter driving (p. 287)
NOTE racteristics and roadholding, see Drive
system - drive modes (p. 265).
Make a habit of always starting a journey
with fully-charged hybrid battery. Outside temperature
The electric motor, electronics and batteries
Driving techniques work best at approx. 25 °C. When the car is
connected to an electrical socket it is condi-
The electric motor acts as both engine and
tioned (p. 136) to its optimal temperature
alternator. During braking (p. 276) the brake
08 range. If the car is started in cold weather or
force is used to recharge the hybrid battery
goes beyond its permitted temperature range
(p. 294) - energy that otherwise would have
while driving then the fuel heater starts and, if
been lost as heat energy.
284

Fording IMPORTANT Overheating

Fording means that the car is driven through a Under special conditions, for example hard
Engine damage can occur if water enters
water-covered roadway. Fording must be car- the air filter. driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
ried out with great caution. a risk that the engine and drive system may
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
The car can be driven through water at a enter the transmission. This reduces the
maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum lubricating ability of the oils and shortens For information about overheating when driv-
speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be the service life of these systems. ing with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer
exercised when passing through flowing Damage to any component, engine, trans- (p. 305).
water. mission, turbocharger, differential or its
internal components caused by flooding, • Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
During driving in water, maintain a low speed hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is not of the grille when driving in hot climates.
and do not stop the car. When the water has covered by the warranty. • If the temperature in the engine's cooling
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly In the event of the engine stalling in water, system is too high then a warning symbol
and check that full brake function is achieved. do not try restart - tow the car from the is illuminated in the combined instrument
Water and mud for example can make the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo panel's information display and a text
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake workshop is recommended. Risk of engine message High engine temperature
function. breakdown. Stop safely is shown there - stop the car
in a safe way and allow the engine to run
• Clean the electric contacts of the electric
at idling speed for several minutes in
engine block heater and trailer coupling Related information
order to cool down.
after driving in water and mud. • Recovery (p. 313)
• Do not let the car stand with water over • Towing (p. 312) • If the text message High engine
the sills for any long period of time - this temperature Turn off engine or Engine
could cause electrical malfunctions. coolant level low Stop safely is shown
then the engine must be switched off
after stopping the car.
• In the event of overheating in the gearbox
a built-in protection function is activated
which, amongst other things, illuminates
a warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel, and its display shows the
text message Transmission hot Reduce 08
speed or Transmission hot Stop safely
Wait for cooling - follow the recommen-
dation given and lower the speed and
}}
285

stop the car in a safe way and allow the Driving with open tailgate Overload - starter battery
engine to run at idling speed for a few When driving with the tailgate open, toxic The electrical functions in the car load the
minutes in order to allow the gearbox to exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car starter battery (p. 369) to varying degrees.
cool down. through the cargo area. Avoid using the key position II (p. 81) when
• If the car overheats, the air conditioning the engine is switched off. Instead use posi-
may be switched off temporarily. WARNING tion I - which uses less power.
• Do not turn the engine off immediately Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic Also, be aware of different accessories that
you stop after a hard drive. exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car load the electrical system. Do not use func-
through the cargo area.
tions which use a lot of power when the
NOTE
engine is switched off. Examples of such
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to Related information functions are:
operate for a time after the engine has • Loading (p. 151)
been switched off. • ventilation fan
• headlamps
• windscreen wiper
• audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low then the
combined instrument panel's information dis-
play shows the text Low battery charge
Power save mode. The energy-saving func-
tion then shuts down certain functions or
reduces certain functions such as the ventila-
tion fan and/or audio system.
– In which case, charge the starter battery
by starting the engine and then running it
for at least 15 minutes - starter battery
charging is more effective during driving
than running the engine at idling speed
while stationary.
08
286

Before a long journey Winter driving starter battery and its capacity is reduced
Before a long journey, it makes good sense to For winter driving it is important to perform by the cold.
go through the following points: certain checks in order to ensure that the car • Use washer fluid (p. 368) to avoid ice
can be driven safely. forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
• Check that the engine is working normally
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-
and that fuel consumption (p. 409) is nor- Check the following in particular before the
mal. ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if
cold season:
there is a risk of snow or ice.
• Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil • The engine coolant (p. 356) must contain
or other fluid). at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects NOTE
• Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths. the engine against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To achieve opti- The use of winter tyres is a legal require-
• Carrying a warning triangle (p. 326) is a ment in certain countries. Studded tyres
legal requirement in certain countries. mum antifreeze protection, different types
of glycol must not be mixed. are not permitted in all countries.
Related information • The fuel tank must be kept filled to pre-
• Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 355) vent condensation. Slippery driving conditions
• Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
Changing wheels - removing wheels • Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
(p. 321) lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- controlled conditions to learn how the car
ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel reacts.
• Lamp replacement (p. 359)
consumption while the engine is cold. For
Related information
more information on suitable oils, see
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions • Winter driving (p. 287)
(p. 402).
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
• The condition of the starter battery and

charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the
08
287

Range for electric operation if the car is parked in a cool place. For further Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing
The car's range for electric operation is information about what to consider during The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as
dependent on several factors, such as the longer periods of inactive time, see Long- follows:
number of consumers that are switched on. term storage - points to remember (p. 304).
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Power consumers Related information
In order to achieve the longest possible mile- • Planning your driving (p. 284)
age for electric operation, the driver of an
electric car also has to think about saving
current (p. 295). The more consumers there
are (stereo, electric heating in windows/
mirrors/seats, very cold air from the climate
control system, etc.) that are switched on -
the shorter the potential mileage.
To specify the range for electric operation,
see Range - specification (p. 411).
NOTE
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on
In addition to high power output in the the lighting panel - the flap opens when the
passenger compartment, high speed, sud- button is released.
den acceleration, heavy loads and uphill
gradients can also reduce the possible In the combined instrument panel's
driving distance. display the arrow on the symbol indi-
cates which side of the car the fuel cap is
Longer periods of inactive time located.
During normal hybrid battery charging • Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in
(p. 294) some of the charging current is used until a click confirms that it is closed.
to keep the car's drive system ready to drive,
mainly to control the hybrid battery's tem- Related information
perature. If the car is not being used for a few • Filling up with fuel (p. 289)
08 days then energy can be saved by not star-
ting preconditioning. If the car is not used for
a long time, the hybrid battery performs best
288

Fuel filler flap - manual opening Filling up with fuel Filling with a fuel can11
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually Important things to consider when refuelling. When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
when electric opening from the passenger located under the floor hatch in the cargo
compartment is not possible. Opening/closing the fuel cap area.
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly
into the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an open-
able cover and the funnel's pipe must be slid
past the cover before filling can begin.
Related information
• Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 289)
• Fuel - handling (p. 290)
The fuel filler cap can be attached onto the flap.

1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo A certain overpressure may arise in the tank
area (same side as fuel filler flap). in the event of high outside temperatures.
2. Expand/open a perforated section in the Open the cap slowly.
isolation and locate a green cord with • After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it
handle. until one or more clicking sounds are
3. Pull the cord gently straight back until the heard.
fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
Filling up with fuel
IMPORTANT • Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out.
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is
required to disengage the hatch lock. NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
Related information weather. 08
• Filling up with fuel (p. 289)
11 Only applies to cars with diesel engine.
289

Fuel - handling IMPORTANT Fuel - diesel

Fuel of a lower quality than that recom- Diesel is used as fuel.
Mixing different types of fuel12
or the use
mended by Volvo must not be used as engine
of fuel that is not recommended invalid- Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc-
power and fuel consumption is negatively ates Volvo's warranties, as well as any
affected. ers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel
supplementary service agreements, and
this applies to all engines. NOTE: Does not fuel must fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
WARNING apply to cars with engines adapted for standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to
driving on ethanol fuel (E85). contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get- high volumes of sulphur particles for exam-
ting fuel splashes in the eyes. ple.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any NOTE
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a par-
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a affin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
medical attention. which may lead to ignition problems. Special
nation with fuel grade are factors that
diesel fuel designed for low temperatures
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, could affect the car's performance.
bioethanol and mixtures of them and die- around freezing point is available from the
sel are highly toxic and could cause per- major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous
manent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Related information at low temperatures and reduces the risk of
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel • Economical driving (p. 294) paraffin precipitate.
has been swallowed. • Fuel - diesel (p. 290) The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
• Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 293) reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
WARNING • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
(p. 409) filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-
ignited. • Fuel tank - volume (p. 408)
gent and water.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could
cause spark build-up and ignite petrol
fumes, leading to fire and injury.
08
12 Only applies to mixing petrol and ethanol fuel.
290

IMPORTANT the option of using electric operation with the connection with this, a self-explanatory text
PURE or HYBRID drive mode in low temper- message may appear, for example:
Diesel fuel must: atures. If such a situation occurs then the die-
• Aged fuel Start diesel engine to
• fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435 sel engine will be running the whole time. consume fuel
standards
Diesel fuel thermal resistance is a measure of • Aged fuel Engine will run to consume
• have a sulphur content not exceeding the usefulness of the fuel at low tempera- fuel
10 mg/kg tures. Normally, the diesel fuel's thermal
• Aged fuel Fill up fuel tank
• have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME properties are adapted to the climate zone
(Fatty Acid Methyl Ester). and season in which it is distributed and sold. Follow the recommended action where
appropriate.
The automatic limitation in low temperatures
IMPORTANT increases gradually depending on the age of Empty tank
the fuel in the tank. When the car has recently The design of the fuel system in a diesel
Diesel type fuels that must not be used: been refuelled there is no limitation, but it engine means that if the vehicle runs out of
• Special additives increases the older the fuel in the tank fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the
• Marine diesel fuel becomes, counted in months. workshop in order to restart the engine after
fuelling.
• Heating oil The purpose of the function is, in low outside
temperatures, to allow the car to consume Once the engine has stopped due to fuel
• FAME13 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and
fuel at such a rate that fresh fuel - with the starvation, the fuel system needs a few
vegetable oil.
correct thermal resistance - can/must be moments to carry out a check. Do this before
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in added before the critical temperature for the
accordance with Volvo recommendations starting the engine, once the fuel tank has
current fuel is reached. been filled with diesel:
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo Fuel age 1. Insert the remote control key in the igni-
warranty. tion switch and push it in to the end posi-
Old diesel fuel (from approx. 5 months and
older) in combination with condensation can, tion. For more information, see Key posi-
Limitation due to low outside in some circumstances, lead to algal and tions (p. 80).
temperature bacterial growth in the fuel system and/or oxi- 2. Press the START button without
To avoid the risk of paraffin precipitate (see dation of the fuel with the risk of operational depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
previous section) in the diesel fuel due to low disruption as a result.
thermal resistance, the car has a market-
To avoid such problems, the car has a built-in 08
dependent function which automatically limits
function which checks the age of the fuel. In
13 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
}}
291

||
3. Wait approx. one minute. and then restart the engine again to regain full Catalytic converters
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake function. The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
and/or clutch pedal and then press the purify exhaust gases. They are located close
START button again.
Draining condensation from the fuel
to the engine so that operating temperature is
filter reached quickly.
The fuel filter separates condensation from
NOTE
the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel operation. (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
shortage: walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
• Stop the car on as flat/level ground as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet rhodium/palladium. These metals act as cata-
possible - if the car is tilting there is a or if you suspect that the car has been filled lysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a
risk of air pockets in the fuel supply. with contaminated fuel. For more information, chemical reaction without being used up
see Volvo service programme (p. 347). themselves.
To bear in mind when you have run out Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
of fuel IMPORTANT The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
Avoid running out of fuel. In the event of an intended to reduce emissions and improve
Certain special additives remove the water
empty tank, it is possible to continue driving separation in the fuel filter. fuel economy. For more information, see Fuel
with the available charge in the hybrid bat- consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 409).
tery. After refilling the fuel, it may seem to
take longer to start the engine (up to Related information An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen con-
30 seconds). In certain cases, repeated • Fuel - handling (p. 290) tent of the exhaust gases leaving the engine.
attempts to start the car may also be • Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 293) This value is fed into an electronic system
required. that continuously controls the injectors. The
• Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is
Once the engine has been started, it is rec- (p. 409)
continuously adjusted. These adjustments
ommended to keep it running for at least create optimal conditions for efficient com-
5 minutes. Select drive mode AWD or bustion, and together with the three-way cat-
POWER in order to facilitate the supply of alytic converter reduce harmful emissions
fuel. (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous
If the message Internal combustion engine oxides).
08 unavailable Limited performance and
mileage is shown in the combined instru-
Related information
ment panel's information display - switch off • Economical driving (p. 294)
• Fuel - diesel (p. 290)
292

Diesel particle filter (DPF) Start regeneration of the filter by driving the • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, car until the engine reaches normal operating (p. 409)
which results in more efficient emission con- temperature, preferably on a main road or • Fuel tank - volume (p. 408)
trol. motorway. The car should then be driven for
approximately 20 minutes more.
The particles in the exhaust gases are collec-
ted in the filter during normal driving. So- NOTE
called "regeneration" is started in order to
burn away the particles and empty the filter. The following may arise during regenera-
tion:
This requires the engine to have reached nor-
mal operating temperature. • a smaller reduction of engine power
may be noticed temporarily
Regeneration of the particle filter is automatic
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may • fuel consumption may increase tem-
take a little longer at a low average speed. porarily
Fuel consumption may increase slightly dur- • a smell of burning may arise.
ing regeneration.
During regeneration, charging of the hybrid When regeneration is complete the warning
battery is activated temporarily in the back- text is cleared automatically.
ground, which is similar to the SAVE function,
see Drive system - drive modes (p. 265). Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating tem-
Regeneration in cold weather perature more quickly.
If the car is frequently driven short distances
in cold weather then the engine does not IMPORTANT
reach normal operating temperature. This
If the filter is completely filled with parti-
means that regeneration of the diesel particle cles, it may be difficult to start the engine
filter does not take place and the filter is not and the filter is non-functional. Then there
emptied. is a risk that the filter will need to be
replaced.
When the filter has become approx. 80% full
of particles, a yellow warning triangle is
shown in the combined instrument panel, and Related information 08
the message Soot filter full See manual is • Fuel - handling (p. 290)
shown in its information display. • Fuel - diesel (p. 290)

Economical driving • Remove unnecessary items from the car - Charging the hybrid battery
Driving economically means driving smoothly the greater the load the higher the con- In addition to the fuel tank, as in a conven-
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driv- sumption. tional car, the car is equipped with a
ing style and speed to the prevailing condi- • Use engine braking to slow down, when it rechargeable battery - a so-called hybrid bat-
tions. can take place without risk to other road tery of the lithium-ion type.
users.
• Use the ECO Guide which indicates how
• A roof load and ski box increase air resis-
The hybrid battery is charged using a charg-
fuel-efficiently the car is being driven, see ing cable with control unit (p. 297) which is
tance, leading to higher consumption -
Eco guide & Hybrid guide (p. 71). located in the storage area under the cargo
remove the load carriers when not in use.
• Drive in the highest gear possible, adap- area floor, see Charging cable with control
ted to the current traffic situation and
• Avoid driving with open windows. unit (p. 297).
road - lower engine speeds result in lower For information about Volvo Car Corpora-
fuel consumption. Use the gear indicator tion's environmental philosophy, see Volvo NOTE
(p. 271). Cars' environmental philosophy (p. 21).
Use a charging cable recommended by
• Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration For more information about fuel consumption, Volvo in accordance with IEC 62196 and
and heavy braking. see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions IEC 61851 that supports temperature
• High speed results in increased fuel con- (p. 409). monitoring.
sumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed. WARNING The time it takes for the hybrid battery to be
• Do not run the engine to operating tem- Never switch off the engine while moving, charged is dependent on the charging current
perature at idling speed, but rather drive such as downhill, this deactivates impor- (p. 295) that is used.
with a light load as soon as possible - a tant systems such as the power steering During the charging of the car's hybrid bat-
cold engine consumes more fuel than a and brake servo.
tery the display on the charging cable's con-
warm one.
trol unit shows the current status (p. 300)
• Drive with the correct air pressure in the Related information during an ongoing charging and after charg-
tyres and check this regularly - select • Fuel - handling (p. 290) ing is complete.
ECO tyre pressure for best results, see
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 410). • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions While the hybrid battery is being charged,
(p. 409) charging is also in progress for the car's
• Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump-
tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a • Fuel tank - volume (p. 408) starter battery (p. 369).
08 dealer. If the hybrid battery's temperature is below
-10 ºC or above 30 ºC then it may mean that
some of the car's functions are changed or
294

unavailable because the capacity of the Charging current Current inten- Charging time
hybrid batteries is reduced outside this tem- Charging current is used for charging the sity (A) (hours)
perature range. hybrid battery (p. 294) as well as precondi-
An example of this is the PURE drive mode tioning of the car. Charging cable (p. 297) 6 7,5–10,0
(see Drive system and drive modes (p. 265)) between the car's charging input socket and
10 4,5–7,0
which is not selectable if the temperature in a 230 VAC socket can be set for different cur-
the battery is too low or high. rent intensity loads (6-16 A) using the control 16 4,0–5,5
unit.
Charging with fixed control unit in
accordance with mode 314 When the charging cable is activated the NOTE
combined instrument panel shows a message
In certain markets the control unit is installed
and a lamp (p. 303) in the car's charging • If the weather is very hot or very cold,
within a charging station connected to the some of the charging current is used
input socket illuminates. The charging current
mains power circuit. In which case, the to heat/cool the hybrid battery and the
is mainly used for battery charging, but is also
charging cable has no control unit of its own. passenger compartment, which results
used for preconditioning (p. 136) the car. in a longer charging time.
Instead, it has a special connector to be used
to connect the charging cable to the charging • The charging time is extended if pre-
station. Follow the instructions at the charg- IMPORTANT conditioning (p. 136) has been
ing station. selected. The time required depends
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 VAC socket while charging is in pro- mainly on the outside temperature.
Related information
gress - there is then a risk of damaging the
• Charging the hybrid battery - prepara-
230 VAC socket. Always stop charging
tions (p. 296) first, and then disconnect the charging
• Range for electric operation (p. 288) cable.
Charging time varies with the amperage set-

ting on the control unit.
See examples in the following table:
08
14 European standard - EN 61851-1.

}}
295

||
the car will draw 10 A from the 230 VAC Charging the hybrid battery -
mains power circuit. If additional consumers preparations
are connected to the same socket (or another Before recharging the car's hybrid battery can
socket in the same fuse circuit) then there is a be started (p. 302) a number of preparations
risk that the fuse for the socket/fuse socket need to be made.
will be overloaded and triggered, at which
point battery charging is stopped. WARNING
In which case, reset the fuse for the socket/ • Charging the hybrid battery must only
fuse circuit and select a lower charging cur- take place from approved grounded
rent on the control unit - or disconnect other 230 VAC sockets.
consumers from the socket.
• The control unit's ground fault breaker
Charging cable plug and charging input socket. Example 3 protects the car, but there may still be
If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A a risk of overloading the 230 VAC
Normally several 230 VAC consumers are mains power circuit.
included in a fuse circuit, so additional con- socket and the control unit is set at 6 A, then
sumers (e.g. lighting, vacuum cleaner, electric the car will only draw 6 A from the 230 VAC • Avoid visible worn or damaged mains
mains power circuit. Battery charging will of sockets since they may lead to fire
drill, etc.) can be on the same fuse.
course take longer, but then additional con- damage and/or personal injury if used.
Example 1 sumers can be connected at the same time to • Never use an extension cable.
If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A the same socket (or fuse circuit) as long as
socket and the control unit is set at 16 A, then the total load does not exceed the capacity of
the car will attempt to draw 16 A from the the fuse circuit. WARNING
230 VAC mains power circuit - after a while The hybrid battery must only be replaced
the overloaded 10 A fuse for the socket will Related information by a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-
be tripped and battery charging stopped. • Range for electric operation (p. 288) shop is recommended.
In which case, reset the fuse for the socket

and select a lower charging current on the
control unit, see Charging the hybrid battery -
preparations (p. 296).
08 Example 2
If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A
socket and the control unit is set at 10 A, then
296

Before charging Opening/closing the cover for the Charging cable with control unit
charging input socket The charging cable with its control unit is
IMPORTANT used to charge the car's hybrid battery. Use a
charging cable recommended by Volvo.
• The control unit should not be flooded
or immersed in water.
• Avoid exposing the control unit and its
plug to direct sunlight. In such cases,
the overheating protection in the plug
is at risk of reducing or interrupting the
charging of the hybrid battery.
IMPORTANT
• Check that the 230 VAC socket has
adequate power supply for charging Press in the rear section of the cover and
electric vehicles - in the event of release.
uncertainty the socket must be The charging cable is located in the storage
checked by a qualified professional. Open the cover.
compartment under the cargo area's floor cover.
• If the socket has unknown current Pull away the cover for the charging input
intensity - use the lowest level on the socket and secure it in the holder inside Specifications, charging cable
control unit. the cover. Make sure that the cover's rub-
ber straps are bent downwards in order Enclosure class IP67
On the charging cable's control unit (p. 297) to prevent the cover coming off from the Ambient temperature -32 ºC to +50 ºC
select the required charging current (p. 295) holder.
6-16 A15. On delivery, the lowest possible Close the cover for the charging input socket
charging current is preset. in reverse order.
Related information
• Charging the hybrid battery (p. 294)
• Charging the hybrid battery - ending 08
(p. 303)
15 Maximum charging current may vary depending on market.

}}
297

||
WARNING Control unit Indicator16 shows selected charging cur-
rent.
The charging cable must not be used if
any part of it is damaged - there is then The symbol illuminates when the charging
the risk of electric shock and serious per- cable is plugged into a 230 VAC socket.
sonal injury. Pushbuttons to increase/decrease the
A damaged or inoperative charging cable charging current.
must only be repaired by a workshop - an
The symbol illuminates when the charging
authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended. cable is plugged into the car's 230 VAC
input socket.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
Multiple plugs, overvoltage protection or
Never unplug the charging cable from the similar devices must not be used together
230 VAC socket while charging is in pro- with the charging cable since this may
gress - there is then a risk of damaging the involve a risk of fire, electric shocks, etc.
230 VAC socket. Always stop charging
first, and then disconnect the charging An adapter between the 230 VAC socket
cable. and charging cable may only be used if the
adapter is marked with approval in accord-
ance with IEC 61851 and IEC 62196.
NOTE
The charging cable will remember the last
setting of the charging current. It is there-
fore important to adjust the setting if
another 230 VAC socket is used at the
next charging.
08 Control unit display and controls.
16 Maximum charging current may vary depending on market.
298

Related information
• Charging cable with control unit - status
messages (p. 300)
• Charging cable with control unit - ground
fault breaker (p. 301)
• Charging current (p. 295)
08
299

Charging cable with control unit - cable's control unit (p. 297) shows the current
status messages status during an ongoing charging and after
During the charging (p. 294) of the car's charging is complete.
hybrid battery the display on the charging
Control unit display Status Specification Recommended action

The indicator for charging current (1) is Standby • The charging cable is connected to the Wait until the battery is fully
extinguished. The car symbol (5) illumi- car. charged.
nates with a constant green glow. • Charging is possible but has not yet
been activated by the electronics in the
car.
Existing current consumption is shown Charging in • The car's electronics have started Wait until the battery is fully
with a green indicator (1). The car symbol progress. charging. charged.
(5) illuminates with a constant green • Charging in progress.
glow.
The indicator for charging current is Charging is not • There is a communication error between 1. Check all connections or use
extinguished. The car symbol (5) flashes possible. the control unit and the car. another 230 VAC socket.
red. • The ventilation for the car's electronics 2. Restart the battery charging.
is not adequate, not activated or defec-
tive.
The car symbol (5) illuminates with a Charging is not • The ground fault breaker on the charg- 1. Unplug the charging cable
constant red glow. possible. ing cable has triggered. from the 230 VAC socket.
2. The ground fault breaker is
reset and the unit restarts.
The indicator (1) for charging current and Charging is not Temperature monitoring has triggered for Restart charging. If the problem
the house symbol (3) flash red. possible. the 230 VAC socket. persists - consult a qualified pro-
fessional.
08
Related information
• Charging current (p. 295)
300

Charging cable with control unit - IMPORTANT Charging cable with control unit -
temperature monitoring ground fault breaker
If the temperature monitoring has automat-
In order for the car's hybrid battery to be ically lowered the charging current repeat- The control unit for the charging cable
charged (p. 294) safely every time, the control edly and charging has been interrupted (p. 297) has a built-in ground fault breaker
unit (p. 297) has a built-in monitoring device then the cause of the overheating must be that protects the car and the user from elec-
for the charging current. investigated and rectified. tric shocks caused by system faults.
The control unit's monitoring device ensures If the control module's built-in ground fault
that the permissible charging current (p. 295) breaker is tripped then the car symbol illumi-
is automatically adjusted to take into account nates with red constant glow - check the
the safety aspect. This ensures safe operation 230 VAC socket.
without supervision as well as optimised
charging time. IMPORTANT
The control unit's earth fault switch does
NOTE not protect the 230 VAC socket.
Use a charging cable recommended by
Volvo in accordance with IEC 62196 and Related information
IEC 61851 that supports temperature
monitoring. • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 294)
Temperature fuse
Temperature monitoring is activated automat-
ically when the car's hybrid battery starts
charging. If a critical temperature is reached
then the charging current is lowered. If this
happens repeatedly, then charging is
switched off.
08
301

Charging the hybrid battery - starting 5. The charging cable's charging handle is
How to start charging the hybrid battery fastened/locked in, and charging starts
(p. 294). after approx. 10 seconds.
To check the remaining charging time:
IMPORTANT
Never connect the charging cable when • Press the remote control key's button
there is a risk of lightning. for Approach lighting - the combined
instrument panel then shows the esti-
mated time.
NOTE Battery charging can be interrupted for a
Remove the charging handle's cover and
Use a charging cable recommended by then connect the handle to the car. while if the car is unlocked:
Volvo in accordance with IEC 62196 and
IEC 61851 that supports temperature • and the door is opened - charging
monitoring. restarts after 2 minutes.
• without the door being opened - the
car is relocked automatically, see
Take out the charging cable (p. 297) from the
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
storage compartment under the cargo area
(p. 175). Charging restarts after
floor. 1 minute.
NOTE
Approach lighting must be active in order
Location of the charging handle's cover.
to show the remaining charging time. Its
settings are managed in the menu system
IMPORTANT MY CAR (p. 113).
To avoid damage to the paint, e.g. in the

event of high winds, position the charging
handle's protective cover so that it does
Connect the charging cable to a 230 VAC not touch the car.
socket. Never use an extension cord.
08
2. Set the correct charging current (p. 295)
(for current 230 VAC socket) on the con-
trol unit.
302

IMPORTANT LED lamp Specification Charging the hybrid battery - ending

glow How to stop charging the hybrid battery
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 VAC socket while charging is in pro- (p. 294).
gress - there is then a risk of damaging the White constant LED light
230 VAC socket. Always stop charging NOTE
Yellow constant Waiting modeA - wait-
first, and then disconnect the charging To be able to detach the charging cable
cable. ing for charging to
start. glove from the car's 230 VAC intake, the
car must first be unlocked using the
6. When charging is complete (see following Green flashing Charging in progressB. remote control key/PCC.
below) - open the driver's door. Then the
combined instrument panel illuminates Green constant Charging completeC.
and can show information about charge
status. Blue - flashing or Timer switched on.
constant
Red - flashing, A fault has arisen.

constant
A For example, after a door has been opened or the charging
cable's plug is not locked in.
B The slower the flashing, the closer to fully charged.
C Extinguishes after a while.
Unlock the car with the remote control
Condensation from the air conditioning may key/PCC* - the charging cable's locked
drip under the car during charging. This is plug releases/is unlocked.
normal and takes place due to cooling of the
hybrid battery.
Related information
The LED lamps show the current status while • Charging the hybrid battery - ending
charging is in progress. The white, blue, red (p. 303)
and yellow lamps are activated when the pas-
senger compartment lighting is switched on -
they remain switched on for a while after the 08
passenger compartment lighting has been
switched off.
}}

||
Charging with the diesel engine Long-term storage - points to
The hybrid battery can also remember
be charged by the car's die- To reduce degradation of the hybrid battery
sel engine, see Drive sys- during long-term storage of the vehicle it is
tems (p. 264). recommended that the state of charge
remains at 25%.
Proceed as follows:
Related information 1. Select the "Hybrid" theme for the com-
• Charging cable with control unit (p. 297) bined instrument panel. For information
Unplug the cable from the car's electrical
input socket, refit the charging input • Charging the hybrid battery - starting on menu navigation, see Combined
(p. 302) instrument panel (p. 66).
socket's cover and close the hatch, see
Charging the hybrid battery - prepara- 2. If the state of charge is high - run the car
tions (p. 296). until approx. 25% remains. If the state of
charge is low - press the POWER button
and run the car until approx. 25% is ach-
ieved. For more information on the drive
modes, see Drive system - drive modes
(p. 265).
3. If storage has lasted longer than
6 months and is intended to continue -
start the engine in drive mode POWER
and leave it running for at least
10 minutes until the state of charge has
stabilised at around 25% again (recom-
mended).
If the car has been locked in and could not be
Unplug the cable from the 230 VAC run, and the hybrid battery's charge level is
socket. significantly below 25% - charge the battery
for approx. 45 minutes at the lowest level,
08 Return the charging cable to the storage depending on the state of charge. Check the
space under the cargo area floor. charge level continuously in the combined
304

instrument panel, see Charging the hybrid Driving with a trailer • The brakes are loaded much more than
battery - starting (p. 302). When driving with a trailer there are a number usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
of important points to think about regarding Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
For handling the starter battery in connection speed.
with long-term storage, see Starter battery - e.g. the towing bracket, the trailer and how
general (p. 369). the load is positioned in the trailer. • For safety reasons, the maximum permit-
ted speed for the car when coupled with
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow
NOTE The total of the weight of the passengers and the regulations in force for the permitted
Choose the coolest location possible for all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's speeds and weights.
the vehicle in order to minimise aging of payload by a corresponding weight. For more • Maintain a low speed when driving with a
the battery during long-term storage. Dur- detailed information, see Weights (p. 399). trailer up long, steep ascents.
ing summer the vehicle should preferably
remain indoors or outdoors in the shade, If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
depending on where the temperature is then the car is delivered with the necessary more than 12%.
lowest. equipment for driving with a trailer.
Trailer cable
• The car's towing bracket must be of an An adapter is required if the car's towing
IMPORTANT approved type. bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer
During long-term storage, the charging • If the towbar is retrofitted, check with has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable
cable must not be plugged into the car's your Volvo dealer that the car is fully approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does
charging input socket. equipped for driving with a trailer. not drag on the ground.
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that
the weight on the towing bracket com- Direction indicators and brake lights on
Old fuel
plies with the specified maximum towball the trailer
Old diesel fuel (from approx. 5 months and
load. If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indi-
older) in combination with condensation can,
• Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- cators are broken, then the combined instru-
in some circumstances, lead to algal and
mended pressure for a full load. For tyre ment panel's symbol for direction indicators
bacterial growth in the fuel system and/or oxi-
pressure label location, see Tyres - air flashes faster than normal and the information
dation of the fuel with the risk of operational
pressure (p. 325). display shows the text Trailer indicator
disruption as a result. For more information,
malfunction.
see Energy flow (p. 268). • The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer. If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light
Related information are broken then the Trailer brake light
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is 08
• Charging the hybrid battery (p. 294) brand new. Wait until it has been driven malfunction text is shown.
• Range for electric operation (p. 288) at least 1000 km.
}}
305

||
Trailer weights Driving with a trailer - automatic Starting on a hill
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer gearbox 1. Depress the foot brake.
weights, see Towing capacity and towball When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a 2. Move the gear selector to driving posi-
load (p. 400). hot climate there may be a risk of overheating. tion D.
NOTE • An automatic gearbox selects the opti- 3. Release the parking brake.
mum gear related to load and engine
The stated maximum permitted trailer 4. Release the foot brake and start driving
speed.
weights are those permitted by Volvo. off.
National vehicle regulations can further • In the event of overheating a warning
limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars symbol is illuminated in the combined Related information
can be certified for higher towing weights instrument panel with a message that is • Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 272)
than the car can actually tow. shown in the information display - follow
the recommendation given.
WARNING Steep inclines

Follow the stated recommendations for • Do not lock the automatic transmission in
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and a higher gear than the engine "can cope
trailer may be difficult to control in the with" - it is not always a good idea to
event of sudden movement and braking. drive at a high gear with low engine revo-
lutions.
Related information Parking on a hill
• Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox 1. Depress the foot brake.
(p. 306)
2. Activate the parking brake.
• Towing bracket/Towbar (p. 307)
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
• Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
08
• Block the wheels with chocks when park-
ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
306

Towing bracket/Towbar Detachable towbar - storage Detachable towbar - specifications

A towing bracket means that it is possible to Store the detachable towbar in the cargo Specifications for detachable towbar.
e.g. tow a trailer behind the car. area.
Specifications
If the car is equipped with a detachable/
removable towbar, the installation instruc-
tions for the loose section must be followed
carefully, see Detachable towbar - attach-
ment/removal (p. 308).
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
• Follow the installation instructions
G021485
carefully.
• The detachable section must be Towbar storage space.
locked with the key before setting off.
• Check that the indicator window IMPORTANT
shows green.
Always remove the towbar after use and
store it in the appointed location in the car.
Important checks
• The towbar's towball must be cleaned Related information
and greased regularly. • Detachable towbar - specifications
(p. 307)
NOTE
• Detachable towbar - attachment/removal
When a hitch with a vibration damper is (p. 308)
used, the towball must not be lubricated. • Driving with a trailer (p. 305)
• Driving with a trailer (p. 305)
}}
307

||
Detachable towbar - attachment/
removal
The attachment/removal of the detachable
towbar is performed in the following way:
Attaching
G021488
The indicator window must show red.
G018928
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A 998
Remove the protective cover by first
B 81 pressing in the catch and then pulling
C 854 the cover straight back .
G021489
D 427
Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
E 109
F 282
G Side member
G021487
H Ball centre
Related information Ensure that the mechanism is in the

• Detachable towbar - attachment/removal
G021490
08 unlocked position by turning the key
(p. 308)
clockwise.
• Detachable towbar - storage (p. 307)
The indicator window must show green.
308

G000000
G021494
G021495
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked Check that the towbar is secure by pull- Safety cable.
position. Remove the key from the lock. ing it up, down and back.
WARNING
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it cable in the intended bracket.
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
Removing the towbar

IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be
clean and dry.
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the

unlocked position.
08
}}
309

||
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA17
The trailer stability assist TSA (Trailer Stability
Assist) function is designed to stabilise the car
and trailer combination if it begins to snake.
G018929
Push in the locking wheel and turn it Push the protective cover until it snaps
anticlockwise until you hear a click. tight.
Related information
• Detachable towbar - storage (p. 307)
• Detachable towbar - specifications
(p. 307)
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it

comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towbar rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in
the car, see Detachable towbar - storage
08 (p. 307).
17 Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
310

TSA- the function is included in the stability often enough to help the driver regain control Related information
system (p. 186) ESC18. of the car. • Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the (p. 186)
Function
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally combination is braked with all wheels and
occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it engine power is reduced. Once snaking has
occurring at lower speeds (70-90 km/h) if the been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer
trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly combination is stable once again, the system
distributed, e.g. too far back. stops regulating and the driver once again
has full control of the car. For more informa-
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a tion, see Electronic stability control (ESC) -
triggering factor, e.g.: operation (p. 187).
• Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
Miscellaneous
powerful side wind.
TSA can engage within the speed range
• Car with trailer drives on an uneven road 60-160 km/h.
surface or in a pothole.
• Sweeping steering wheel movements. NOTE
Operation TSA function is switched off if the driver
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or selects Sport mode, see Electronic stabil-
even impossible to suppress. This makes the ity control (ESC) - general (p. 186).
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example, TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses sud-
end up in the wrong lane or leave the car- den steering wheel movements to try to rec-
riageway. tify the snaking because, in such a situation,
the system cannot determine whether it is the
The trailer stability assist function continually
trailer or the driver that is causing the snak-
monitors car movements, particularly lateral
ing.
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to The ESC18 symbol in the combined
stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is instrument panel flashes when the 08
TSA system is working.
18 (Electronic Stability Control) - Electronic stability control.
311

Towing Towing eye Take out the towing eye, which is located
Towing the V60 Plug-in Hybrid is not permit- The towing eye is screwed into a threaded behind the panel on the left-hand side of
ted. When moving the car it must be transpor- socket behind a cover on the rear right-hand the cargo area.
ted (p. 313) raised up with all the wheels on a side of the bumper. The cover for the towing eye's attach-
recovery vehicle's platform. ment point is available in two variants
Attaching the towing eye
which must be opened in different ways:
Jump starting • Open the variant with a recess using a
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. coin or similar inserted in the recess,
Use a donor battery if the starter battery is turning it outwards. Then turn out the
discharged and the engine does not start, see cover completely and remove it.
Jump starting with battery (p. 263). • The second variant has a marking
along one side or in a corner: Press the
IMPORTANT marking with a finger and fold out the
The electric drive motor and the catalytic
opposite side/corner at the same time
converter may be damaged during using a coin or similar - the cover turns
attempts to tow-start the car. around its axis and can then be
removed.
Related information Screw the towing eye right in up to its

flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
• Towing eye (p. 312)
using the wheel wrench.
• Recovery (p. 313)
After use, unscrew the towing eye and
return it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car
up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed plat-
form. The car's position and ground clear-
ance determine whether it is possible. If the
08 slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too
steep, or if the ground clearance under the
car is inadequate, then the car may be dam-
312

aged if you try to pull it up using the towing Recovery

eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehi- Recovery means that the vehicle is transpor-
cle's lifting device if necessary. ted away by means of another vehicle.
WARNING Call a recovery service for recovery assis-

tance.
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car The towing eye may be used to pull the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform. up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed plat-
form. The car's position and ground clear-
Related information ance determine whether it is possible. If the
slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too
• Towing (p. 312)
steep, or if the ground clearance under the
• Recovery (p. 313) car is inadequate, then the car may be dam-
aged if you try to pull it up using the towing
eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehi-
cle's lifting device if necessary.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
Note that the V60 Plug-in Hybrid must
always be transported raised up with all
the wheels on the recovery vehicle's plat-
form.
Related information
• Towing (p. 312) 08
313

WHEELS AND TYRES

09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - direction of rotation Tyres - maintenance 09

NOTE
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed Amongst other things, the function of the
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have
to only turn in one direction have the direction the same type and dimension, and also the tyres is to provide grip on the road surface,
of rotation marked with an arrow. same make. dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
wear.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures Driving characteristics
specified in the tyre pressure table (p. 410). Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
Related information
pressure and speed rating are important for
• Tyres - dimensions (p. 320)
how the car performs.
• Tyres - speed ratings (p. 321)
• Tyres - load index (p. 320) Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
• Tyres - maintenance (p. 315)
checked by an expert even if they seem
• Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 317) undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
G021778
if they are hardly ever or never used. The

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation. function can therefore be affected. This
applies to all tyres that are stored for future
The tyre must always rotate in the same use. Examples of external signs which indi-
direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should cate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are
only be switched between front and rear cracks or discoloration.
positions, never between left and right-hand
sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted
incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics
and capacity to force rain and slush out of the
way are adversely affected. Tyres with the
greatest tread depth should always be fitted
to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of
skidding).
}}
315

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 New tyres Wear and maintenance Related information
Correct tyre pressure (p. 325) results in more • Tyres - dimensions (p. 320)
even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, cli- • Tyres - speed ratings (p. 321)
mate and road condition affect how quickly
your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences
• Tyres - load index (p. 320)
in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns • Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 315)
arising, the front and rear wheels can be • Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 317)
switched with each other. A suitable distance
for the first change is approx. 5000 km and
then at 10000 km intervals. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth)
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they between tyres have already occurred, the
begin to harden at the same time as the fric- least worn tyres must always be placed on
tion capacity/characteristics gradually deteri- the rear. Understeer is normally easier to cor-
orate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh rect than oversteer, and leads to the car con-
tyres as possible when you replace them. tinuing forwards in a straight line rather than
This is especially important with regard to having the rear end skidding to one side,
winter tyres. The last four digits in the resulting in possible complete loss of control
sequence mean the week and year of manu- over the car. This is why it is important for the
facture. This is the tyre's DOT marking rear wheels never to lose grip before the front
(Department of Transportation), and this is wheels.
stated with four digits, for example 1510. The
tyre in the figure was manufactured in week Wheels should be stored lying down or hang-
15 of 2010. ing up - and not standing up.
Summer and winter tyres WARNING

When summer and winter wheels are
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
changed the wheels should be marked with
over the car.
which side of the car they were mounted on,
for example L for left and R for right.
316

09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - tread wear indicators Wheel bolts Tools 09

A tread wear indicator shows the status of the Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at Amongst other things, the car contains towing
tyre's tread. the hubs and are available in different ver- eye, jack* and wheel bolt wrench*.
sions.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140
Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts
and the bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved

by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine acces-
sories. Check the torque with a torque
wrench.
G021829
Locking wheel bolts*

Tread wear indicators.
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both The car's towing eye and emergency punc-
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless aluminium and steel rims. ture repair kit are located behind the hatch on
bands across the width of the tread. On the the left-hand side of the cargo area. There is
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Related information also space for the sleeve for the lockable
Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth • Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 319) wheel bolts. Jack* and wheel bolt wrench* are
is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be located in a bag on the cargo area floor.
level in height with the tread wear indicators.
Change to new tyres as soon as possible. If the car is not equipped with the accessory
Remember that tyres with little tread depth spare wheel then the jack need not be stored
provide very poor grip in rain and snow. in the car.
Related information WARNING

When the towing eye and emergency
• Tyres - speed ratings (p. 321) puncture repair kit are stored in the foam
• Tyres - load index (p. 320) block, they must always be strapped in
with the tensioning strap.
• Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 315)
}}

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 Related information Jack* front of the car. Refit the towing eye in the
• Emergency puncture repair (p. 332) A jack is used to raise the car, e.g. when foam block on the left-hand side of the cargo
• Towing eye (p. 312) changing the tyres. area.
• Changing wheels - removing wheels The original jack should only be used for WARNING
(p. 321) changing to the spare wheel. The jack's
• Wheel bolts (p. 317) thread must always be well greased. The bag should be secured so that the
white arrow (see the inset figure) points
• Jack* (p. 318)
Tools - returning into place forward in the car.
NOTE
If the floor hatch in the cargo area floor is
not closed then privacy locking does not
work.
Related information
• Warning triangle (p. 326)
• Emergency puncture repair (p. 332)
The white arrow must point toward the front of

the car.
After use, crank the jack together and screw
apart the towing eye and wheel bolt wrench.
Place the wheel bolt wrench and the jack in
their respective compartments in the bag.
Tighten the bag's centre strap firmly and use
the other strap to secure the bag in the rear
load retaining eyelet on the left-hand side of
the cargo area. Position the bag so it is not
pinched when the tailgate is closed. The
white arrow on the bag must point toward the

09 Wheels and tyres
Winter tyres Using snow chains Wheel and wheel rim dimensions 09
Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for Snow chains may only be used on the front Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
winter road conditions. wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). accordance with the examples in the table
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow below.
Winter tyres chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu- wears out both the snow chains and tyres. The car has an approval for the complete
lar dimensions. Tyre dimensions are depend- vehicle. This means that certain combinations
ent on engine variant. When driving on winter WARNING of wheel (wheel rim) and tyre are approved.
tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen-
to all four wheels. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-
lent chains designed for the car model, sions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event
NOTE of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you 7 Rim width in inches
Volvo recommends that you consult a consult an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and The wrong snow chains may cause serious J Rim flange profile
tyre types are most suitable. damage to your car and lead to an acci-
dent. 16 Rim diameter in inches
Studded tyres Related information 50 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel

Studded winter tyres should be run in gently centre to wheel contact surface
• Changing wheels - removing wheels
for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly (p. 321) against the hub)
into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe-
cially the studs, a longer service life. Related information
NOTE • Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 410)
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo
therefore recommends not to drive on winter
tyres that have a tread depth of less than
4 mm.
319

09 Wheels and tyres
09 Tyres - dimensions • Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 319) Tyres - load index
The car's wheels (wheel rims) and tyres have Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a
a certain dimension, see the examples in the certain load.
table below.
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a
The car has an approval for the complete load, a load index (LI). The car's weight deter-
vehicle. This means that certain combinations mines the load capacity required of the tyres.
of wheels (wheel rims) and tyres are Minimum permissible index is indicated in the
approved. load index table.
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Related information
Example of designation:235/45R17 97W. • Tyres - dimensions (p. 320)
• Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 410)
235 Tyre width (mm)
45 Ratio between tyre wall height and • Tyres - maintenance (p. 315)
tyre width (%)
R Radial ply
17 Rim diameter in inches (")
97 Codes for the maximum permitted

tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
W Speed rating for maximum permitted

speed, speed rating (SS). (In this
case 270 km/h.)
Related information
• Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 315)
• Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 410)
320

09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - speed ratings Changing wheels - removing wheels 09

W 270 km/h
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. win-
speed and therefore belongs to a particular Y 300 km/h ter wheels/winter tyres.
speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).
Spare wheel*
Tyre speed class must at least correspond WARNING
The following instructions only apply if a
with the car's top speed. Minimum speed rat- The car must be fitted with tyres which spare wheel has been purchased as an
ing is indicated in the speed rating table have the same or a higher load index accessory for the car. If the car is not equip-
below. The only exception to these regula- (p. 320) (LI) and speed rating (SS) than ped with a spare wheel - see information
tions is the winter tyre (p. 319)1, where a specified. If a tyre with too low a load about Emergency puncture repair (TMK)
index or speed rating is used, it may over-
lower speed rating may be used. If such a heat. (p. 332).
tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for
Related information intended for use temporarily and must be
example, class Q can be driven at a maxi-
• Tyres - dimensions (p. 320) replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as
mum of 160 km/h). Traffic regulations deter-
possible. The car's handling may be altered
mine how fast a car can be driven, not the • Tyres - load index (p. 320) by the use of the spare wheel. The spare
speed rating of the tyres. • Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 315) wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The
car's ground clearance is affected accord-
NOTE ingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not
The maximum permitted speed is speci- machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is
fied in the table. fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow
chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive
cars the drive on the rear axle can be discon-
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres) nected. The spare wheel must not be
T 190 km/h repaired.
The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel
H 210 km/h is stated in the tyre pressure table (p. 410).
V 240 km/h
1 Both metal-studded and studless tyres.

}}

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 Before changing a wheel 3. Take out the jack* and the wheel bolt
IMPORTANT
1. Loosen the straps, lift out the spare wheel wrench* (which is located in a bag on the
• Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a from the cargo area and remove it from cargo area floor). If another jack is
spare wheel on the car. the spare wheel bag. selected, see Raising the car (p. 350).
• The car must never be driven fitted
2. To access the towing eye, open the hatch
with more than one "Temporary WARNING
Spare" wheel. on the left-hand side of the cargo area.
Check that the jack is not damaged, that
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
The spare wheel is supplied in a bag which that it is free from dirt.
must be secured on the cargo area floor
using straps.
NOTE
• If the car is not equipped with the
accessory spare wheel then the jack
need not be stored in the car.
• Volvo recommends only using the jack*
that belongs to the car model in ques-
tion, which is indicated on the jack's
label.
• The decal also indicates the jack's
maximum lift capacity at a specified lift-
ing height.
Cars with four load retaining eyelets.

Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out
towards you. Attach the sewn-in tensioning
strap hooks in the front load retaining eyelets.
Attach the long strap into one of the front
load retaining eyelets, run the strap diagonally
over the spare wheel and through the upper
handle. Tighten the short tensioning strap
onto the long one. Attach the rear load retain-
ing eyelet and tighten.

09 Wheels and tyres
3. Screw together the towing eye with the 09

NOTE WARNING
wheel wrench* until the stop position in
The car's regular jack is designed only for accordance with the following figure. Never position anything between the
use occasionally and for a short time, such ground and the jack, nor between the jack
as when changing a wheel with a punc- and the car's jacking point.
tured tyre, switching between summer
tyres and winter tyres, etc. Only the jack
belonging to the specific model is to be 5. There are two jacking points on each side
used to jack up the car. If the car is to be of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
jacked up more often, or for a longer time cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
than is required just to change a wheel, jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
use of a garage jack is recommended. In ground.
this instance, follow the instructions for
use that come with the equipment.
4. Set up the warning triangle (p. 326) if a

wheel is replaced in a trafficked location.
The car and jack* must be on a firm hori-
zontal surface. IMPORTANT
Removing The towing eye must be screwed into all
1. Apply the parking brake (p. 280) and threads in the wheel bolt wrench.
engage reverse gear, or position P if the
car has an automatic gearbox. 4. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anti-
clockwise with the wheel wrench.
2. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground to
prevent them from rolling. Use heavy IMPORTANT
wooden blocks or large stones for exam- The ground must be firm, smooth and
ple. level.
6. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.

Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
}}

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 Related information Changing wheels - fitting
• Changing wheels - fitting (p. 324) It is important that the procedure for fitting
• Jack* (p. 318) the wheel is carried out correctly.
• Warning triangle (p. 326) Installation
• Wheel bolts (p. 317) 1. Clean the contact surfaces between
wheel and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
The white arrow must point toward the front of
the car.
5. Screw apart the towing eye and the wheel
bolt wrench. Place the wheel bolt wrench
and the jack in their respective compart-
ments in the bag. Tighten the bag's cen-
tre strap firmly and use the other strap to
secure the bag in the rear load retaining
eyelet on the left-hand side of the cargo
area. Position the bag so it is not pinched
when the tailgate is closed. The white
arrow on the bag must point toward the
front of the car.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tight-
ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check
the torque with a torque wrench.

09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - air pressure Refit the valve cover 09

NOTE
Tyres can have different air pressures which 1. Fit the valve cap.
• After a tyre has been inflated, always
are measured in bar.
refit the dust cap in order to avoid 2. Press one edge of the cover (without the
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, Check the air pressure in the tyres hole) into place (nearest the tyre ).
etc. The tyre pressures must be checked every
3. Then fold the cover in toward the wheel
• Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust month.
caps can rust and become difficult to rim - and at the same time, gently press
unscrew. down the angled top edge in order to
help it in under the edge of the wheel rim.
4. Check that the cover is flush with the sur-
WARNING
face of the wheel rim - if not, gently press
The bag should be secured so that the in the part that is bulging out.
white arrow (see the inset figure) points
forward in the car.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is The tyre valve is covered by a plastic cover
raised on the jack.
which is equipped with a hole2.
Park the car such that passengers have
the car, or ideally a crash barrier, between Remove the valve cover
themselves and the roadway. 1. Take the torx wrench (which is fitted in
the foam block behind the panel on the
Related information left-hand side of the cargo area).
• Changing wheels - removing wheels 2. Press the torx wrench into the hole.
(p. 321)
3. Prize off the cover using the torx wrench
• Jack* (p. 318)
.
• Warning triangle (p. 326)
4. Remove the valve cap.
• Wheel bolts (p. 317)
2 Only 17" wheel Thia

}}

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 Tyre pressure label Warning triangle
NOTE
The warning triangle is used to warn other
• Check the tyre pressure when the
road users of a stationary vehicle.
tyres are cold. "Cold tyres" means that
the tyres are at the same temperature Storage and folding up
as the outdoor temperature. The tyres
will heat up and the tyre pressures will
increase after driving for a few kilome-
tres.
• Tyre pressures which are too low will
increase fuel consumption, reduce tyre
service life and impair the car's han-
G021830
dling. Driving with tyre pressures
which are too low may lead to the
tyres overheating and sustaining dam- The tyre pressure label on the driver side's
age. Tyre pressures affect ride com- door pillar (between frame and rear door)
fort, road noise and steering. shows the tyre pressures for the car's recom-
• Tyre pressure decreases over time, mended tyre dimensions. This is also speci-
this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre fied in the tyre pressure table, see Tyres -
pressure also varies depending on approved tyre pressures (p. 410).
ambient temperature.
Related information
• Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 317)
326

09 Wheels and tyres
First aid kit* 09

Tyre pressure monitoring*3
The first aid box contains first aid equipment. Tyre pressure monitoring warns the driver
when the pressure is too low in one or more
of the car's tyres. For certain markets the tyre
pressure monitoring is standard in accord-
ance with legal requirements.
The system does not replace normal tyre

maintenance.
Lift the floor hatch and take out the warn- Related information
ing triangle. • TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*
- general (p. 328)
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose • TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*
sides. - adjusting (recalibration) (p. 329)
Fold out the warning triangle's support A case with first aid equipment is located • TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*
- rectifying low tyre pressure (p. 332)
legs. under the floor in the cargo area.
• TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*
Follow the regulations for the use of a warn- - activate/deactivate (p. 330)
ing triangle. Position the warning triangle in a NOTE
suitable place with regard to traffic. If the car has been locked with privacy
• TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*
- recommendations (p. 331)
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are locking then the boot lid/tailgate and floor
hatch cannot be opened, see Privacy lock- • TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*
properly secured in the cargo area after use. ing* (p. 168). - driveable punctured tyres* (p. 331)
NOTE
If the car has been locked with privacy
locking then the boot lid/tailgate and floor
hatch cannot be opened, see Privacy lock-
ing* (p. 168).
3 Standard in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres
09 TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring • Tyre pressure system Service • TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*
System)*10 - general required - activate/deactivate (p. 330)
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre Both factory-fitted and optional wheels can • TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*
Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the be equipped with TPMS sensors in the - recommendations (p. 331)
driver when the pressure is too low in one or valves. • TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*
more of the car's tyres. If wheels without TPMS sensors are used or if - driveable punctured tyres* (p. 331)
Tyre pressure monitoring uses sensors a sensor has failed then Tyre pressure
located inside the air valve in each wheel. system Service required will be shown.
When the car is driven at about 30 km/h the Always check the system after changing a
system detects the tyre pressure. If the pres- wheel in order to ensure that replacement
sure is too low then a warning lamp illumi- wheels work with the system.
nates in the combined instrument panel and For information on the correct tyre pressure,
one of the following messages is shown: see Tyres - air pressure (p. 325).
• Tyre pressure low Check front right The system does not replace normal tyre
tyre maintenance.
• Tyre pressure low Check front left
tyre IMPORTANT
• Tyre pressure low Check rear right If a fault occurs in the TPMS system the
tyre
warning lamp in the combined instru-
• Tyre pressure low Check rear left tyre ment panel will flash for approx. 1 minute
• Tyre needs air now Check front right and then illuminate with a constant glow. A
tyre message is also shown in the combined
instrument panel.
• Tyre needs air now Check front left
tyre
Related information
• Tyre needs air now Check rear right • TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*
tyre - adjusting (recalibration) (p. 329)
• Tyre needs air now Check rear left • TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*
tyre - rectifying low tyre pressure (p. 332)

09 Wheels and tyres
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring 5. Drive for at least 10 minutes at a speed of TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring 09
System)*16 - adjusting (recalibration) at least 30 km/h. System)*18 - status
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre > Calibration is performed automatically Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the following initialisation by the driver. Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the
driver when the pressure is too low in one or The system provides no confirmation driver when the pressure is too low in one or
more of the car's tyres. when the calibration is complete. more of the car's tyres.
TPMS can be adjusted in order to follow Vol- The new reference values apply until steps
System and tyre status
vo's tyre pressure recommendations (p. 325), 1-5 are carried out again.
The current status of the system and the tyres
when driving with a heavy load for example. can be checked, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Related information
NOTE • Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 327) 1. Select the menu system MY CAR to open
The car must be stationary when calibra-
• Tyres - air pressure (p. 325) the menus for tyre monitoring.
tion is started. 2. Select Tyre pressure.
The status is colour-coded for each tyre in
Settings are made using the centre console's accordance with the following:
controls, see MY CAR (p. 113).
• All-green: the system is operating nor-
1. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in mally and the tyre pressure in all tyres is
accordance with the tyre pressure label slightly above the recommended level.
on the driver's side door pillar (between • Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pres-
front and rear doors). sure is too low.
2. Start the engine. • Red wheel: corresponding tyre's pressure
is very low.
3. Select the menu system MY CAR to open
the menus for tyre pressure. • All wheels grey: the system is temporarily
unavailable. It may be necessary to drive
4. Select Calibrate tyre pressure and the car for a few minutes at a speed
press OK. above 30 km/h before the system
becomes active again.
• All wheels grey and the message Tyre
pressure system Service required: an

}}

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 error has occurred in the system. Contact TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
NOTE
a Volvo dealer or workshop. System)*19 - activate/deactivate
• The TPMS system uses a so-called
Clearing warning messages compensated pressure value, based Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre
If a tyre pressure message has been shown on both tyre temperature and ambient Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the
and the TPMS warning lamp has been illumi- temperature. This means that the tyre driver when the pressure is too low in one or
nated: pressure may differ slightly from the more of the car's tyres.
recommended pressures listed on the
1. Check the tyre pressure on the indicated tyre pressure label on the driver's side NOTE
tyre/tyres with a tyre pressure gauge. door pillar (between front and rear The car must be stationary when the tyre
2. Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pres- doors). For this reason, it may be nec- pressure monitoring is activated/deacti-
sure in accordance with the tyre pressure essary to inflate the tyres to a slightly vated.
label on the driver's side door pillar higher pressure in order to clear a low
(between front and rear doors). tyre pressure message.
Settings are made using the centre console's
3. In some cases it may be necessary to • To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the controls, see MY CAR (p. 113).
pressure should be checked on cold
drive the car for a few minutes at a speed 1. Start the engine.
tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are
above 30 km/h in order to clear the warn- the same temperature as the ambient
ing text. At which point, the TPMS warn- 2. Select the menu system MY CAR to open
temperature (approx. 3 hours after the the menus for tyre pressure.
ing lamp is extinguished as well. car has been driven). After a few kilo-
metres of driving, the tyres warm up 3. Select Tyre pressure and press OK.
and the pressure increases. > An X is shown in the information dis-
play if the system is activated, the
option disappears if the system is
WARNING
deactivated20.
• Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to
tyre failure, which could result in the Related information
driver losing control of the car. • Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 327)
• The system cannot indicate sudden
tyre damage in advance.

20 Only in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring 09

WARNING
System)*22 - recommendations System)*24 - driveable punctured
When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS,
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre hold the nozzle of the pump directly tyres*
Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the against the valve to avoid damaging the If SST (Self Supporting run flat Tires)* is
driver when the pressure is too low in one or valve. selected, the car is also equipped with TPMS
more of the car's tyres. (p. 327).
• Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors NOTE This type of tyre has a specially reinforced
are fitted to all wheels on the car, includ- side wall that makes continued driving possi-
ing winter wheels.
• After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid ble to a limited extent despite the tyre losing
• Volvo recommends that sensors are not damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, all or some of its pressure. These tyres are fit-
moved between different wheels. etc. ted on a special rim. (Normal tyres can also
• be fitted to this rim.)
The spare wheel is not equipped a with • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
TPMS sensor. caps can rust and become difficult to If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the
• If the spare wheel or a wheel without a unscrew. yellow TPMS lamp in the combined instru-
TPMS sensor is used, the error message ment panel illuminates and a message is
Tyre pressure system Service shown in the information display. If this
required will be shown in the combined
NOTE occurs, reduce speed to max. 80 km/h. The
instrument panel. If you want to change the tyre dimension tyre must be replaced as soon as possible.
then the TPMS system must be reconfig-
• If a wheel has been changed, or if the
ured. For further information - contact a Drive carefully, in some cases it can be diffi-
TPMS sensor has been moved to another cult to see which tyre is faulty. In order to
Volvo dealer.
wheel then the seal, nut and valve core establish which tyre needs attention, check
must be replaced. all four tyres.
• When TPMS sensors are installed, the car Related information
should be switched off for at least 15 • Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 327)
minutes otherwise an error message will
be shown in the combined instrument
panel.

}}

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring Emergency puncture repair
WARNING
System)*26 - rectifying low tyre Emergency puncture repair, where the emer-
Only people with knowledge of SST tyres
should fit them. pressure gency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
The tyre pressure monitoring system TPMS Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
SST tyres must only be fitted together with check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 410).
TPMS. (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)27 warns
the driver when the pressure is too low in one
After an error message about low tyre The emergency puncture repair kit (p. 334)
or more of the car's tyres and indicates the
pressure has been shown, do not drive consists of a compressor and a bottle of seal-
faster than 80 km/h. tyre to which it applies. The lamp illuminates
ant. The sealing works as a temporary repair.
in yellow at the first indication, stop and
Maximum mileage before tyre replacement The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced
check the tyre pressure as soon as possible.
is 80 km. before its expiration date and after use. The
When the lamp illuminates in red you must
sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured
Avoid hard driving such as sudden braking stop and rectify the tyre pressure immedi-
or turning. in the tread.
ately.
SST tyres must be replaced if they are
If a message for low tyre pressure is shown in NOTE
damaged or punctured.
the display: The emergency puncture repair kit is only
1. Check the tyre pressure on the tyre in intended for sealing tyres with a puncture
Related information in the tread.
• Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 327) question.
2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
3. Drive at least at 30 km/h for several capacity to seal tyres which have punctures
minutes and check that the message dis- in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emer-
appears. gency puncture repair kit if they have larger
slits, cracks or similar damage. Connect the
Related information compressor to one of the car's 12 V sockets.
• Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 327) Choose the socket that is nearest to the
punctured tyre.

27 Option only in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair kit - 09

IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
location
If the compressor for emergency puncture If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sock- Emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - repair is connected to one of the two sock-
ets (p. 150) in the tunnel console then no Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a ets (p. 150) in the tunnel console then no
other current consumer may be connected puncture and check and adjust the tyre pres- other current consumer may be connected
to the other one. sure (p. 410). to the other one.
Location of the emergency puncture

NOTE repair kit NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. approved by Volvo.

• Emergency puncture repair - operation • Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 334) (p. 334)
• Emergency puncture repair - rechecking • Emergency puncture repair kit - sealant
(p. 337) (p. 339)
• Emergency puncture repair kit - overview • Emergency puncture repair (p. 332)
(p. 334)
• Tools (p. 317)
The emergency puncture repair kit is located
behind the hatch on the left-hand side of the
cargo area.
Set up the warning triangle (p. 326) if a tyre is
being sealed in a trafficked location.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture
in the tread.
333

09 Wheels and tyres
09 Emergency puncture repair kit - Related information Emergency puncture repair -

overview • Emergency puncture repair kit - location operation
Emergency puncture repair, where the emer- (p. 333) Emergency puncture repair, where the emer-
gency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary • Emergency puncture repair kit - sealant gency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and (p. 339) Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 410). • Emergency puncture repair (p. 332) check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 410).
Emergency puncture repair
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve

For information on the function of the parts, see
Air hose Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 334).
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
334

09 Wheels and tyres
1. Detach the label for maximum permitted 4. Screw the bottle into its holder. 6. Connect the hose from the compressor to 09
speed (which is fitted on one side of the the valve.
compressor) and affix it to the steering WARNING 7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
wheel.
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped start the car.
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
WARNING NOTE
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h 5. Remove the valve cover29 If the compressor is connected to one of
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
Take the torx wrench (which is fitted in the the two 12 V sockets in the tunnel console
been used. Volvo recommends that you
then no other current consumer may be
visit an authorised Volvo workshop for foam block behind the panel on the left- connected to the other one.
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum hand side of the cargo area).
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there
can determine whether or not the tyre can Press the torx wrench into the hole.
WARNING
be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Prize off the cover using the torx wrench
Do not leave children in the car without
(A). supervision when the engine is running.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
2. Check that the switch is in position 0 and

locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
Unscrew the valve cap and disconnect
3. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the the hose from the compressor to the
bottle's stopper. valve.

}}
335

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 8. Flick the switch to position I. 10. Switch off the compressor to check the • Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
pressure on the pressure gauge. Mini- (p. 334)
WARNING mum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum
3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure
Never stand next to the tyre when the reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
compressor is running. If cracks or
unevenness arise then the compressor high.)
must be switched off immediately. The
journey should not be continued. Contact- WARNING
ing an authorised tyre centre is recom-
mended. If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the
hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an
NOTE authorised tyre centre is recommended.
When the compressor starts, the pressure

can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure 11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
drops after approximately 30 seconds. cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes. fit the valve cap.
Press the cover29 back over the tyre valve
IMPORTANT with the hole against the wheel's hub.
Risk of overheating. The compressor must Two clicks confirm that the cover is fitted
not run for more than 10 minutes. in place.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Related information
• Emergency puncture repair (p. 332)
• Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
(p. 337)
336

09 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair - 09

WARNING
rechecking
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
Emergency puncture repair, where the emer- with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
gency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 410). 3. Make sure the compressor is switched
off. Detach the air hose and cable.
Check tyre pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment (for instructions
on removing the valve cover, see
(p. 335)).
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge. 4. Refit the valve cover31
• If it is below 1.3 bar30 then the tyre is Fit the valve cap.
insufficiently sealed. The journey
should not be continued. Contact a Press one edge of the cover (without the
tyre centre. hole) into place (nearest the tyre - B).
Then fold the cover in toward the wheel
• If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3
rim - and at the same time, gently press
bar30, the tyre must be inflated to the
down the angled top edge in order to
pressure specified in accordance with
help it in under the edge of the wheel rim.
the tyre pressure table, see Tyres -
approved tyre pressures (p. 410). Check that the cover is flush with the sur-
Release air using the pressure reduc- face of the wheel rim - if not, gently press
ing valve if the tyre pressure is too in the part that is bulging out.
high.
30 1 bar = 100 kPa.

}}
337

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 Emergency puncture repair kit -
NOTE WARNING
inflating the tyres
• After a tyre has been inflated, always You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
The car's original tyres can be inflated using
refit the dust cap in order to avoid after the emergency tyre repair kit has
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, been used. Volvo recommends that you the compressor in the emergency puncture
etc. visit an authorised Volvo workshop for repair kit (p. 334).
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum
• Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust driving distance is 200 km). The staff there 1. The compressor must be switched off.
caps can rust and become difficult to can determine whether or not the tyre can Make sure that the switch is in position 0
unscrew. be repaired or if it needs to be replaced. and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Remove the valve cover32 - for instruc-
NOTE Related information tions on removing the valve cover, see
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
• Emergency puncture repair (p. 332) (p. 335).
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends • Emergency puncture repair - operation 3. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
that this replacement is performed by an (p. 334) in the air hose valve connection to the
authorised Volvo workshop. • Emergency puncture repair kit - overview bottom of the thread on the tyre's air
(p. 334) valve.
WARNING
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-
Volvo recommends that you drive to the near- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf-
est authorised Volvo workshop for the ficient ventilation.
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid. WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
4. Connect the cable to one of the car's

12 V sockets and start the car.
338

09 Wheels and tyres
5. Start the compressor by flicking the Related information Emergency puncture repair kit - 09
switch to position I. • Emergency puncture repair (p. 332) sealant
• Emergency puncture repair kit - overview The container (bottle) with the emergency
IMPORTANT (p. 334) puncture repair kit (p. 334) contains sealant
Risk of overheating. The compressor must • Emergency puncture repair - rechecking and it can be replaced.
not run for more than 10 minutes. (p. 337)
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
6. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in mentally hazardous waste.
accordance with the tyre pressure table,
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 410). WARNING
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high. The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natu-
ral rubber-latex.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
Refit the valve cover32 by pressing one reaction in the event of skin contact.
edge of the cover (the one without the Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
hole) into place (nearest the tyre), see
Store out of the reach of children.
Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
(p. 337). Then fold the cover in toward the
wheel rim - and at the same time, gently Related information
press down the angled top edge in order • Emergency puncture repair (p. 332)
to help it in under the edge of the wheel
rim. Check that the cover is flush with the
surface of the wheel rim - if not, gently
press in the part that is bulging out.
8. Switch off the compressor Detach the air
hose and cable.
339

09 Wheels and tyres
09 Type approval - tyre pressure

monitoring
Type approval of the sensors in tyre pressure
monitoring - TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System)* can be read in the table.

09 Wheels and tyres
09
Country/Area
Brazil
Ukraine
}}
341

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09
Country/Area
Israel
342

09 Wheels and tyres
Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity) 09
Country/
Area
Countries in
the EU:
Exporting country: Germany

Manufacturer: Continental Automotive GmbH
Type of equipment: TPMS unit
}}
343

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09
Country/
Area
Czech Repub- Continental tímto prohlašuje, že tento Radio Transmitter je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
lic: ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark: Undertegnede Continental erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Radio Transmitter overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany: Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass sich das Gerät Radio Transmitter in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Estonia: Käesolevaga kinnitab Continental seadme Radio Transmitter vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
UK Hereby, Continental declares that this Radio Transmitter is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain: Por medio de la presente Continental declara que el Radio Transmitter cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera
otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece: ΜΕ ΗΝ ΠΑΡΟ ΣΑ Continental ΗΛΩΝΕ Ο Radio Transmitter Σ ΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕ Α ΠΡΟΣ Σ Ο Σ Ω Ε Σ ΑΠΑ ΗΣΕ Σ Α
Σ ΛΟ ΠΕΣ ΣΧΕ ΕΣ Α ΑΞΕ Σ ΗΣ Ο Η ΑΣ 1999/5/Ε .
France: Par la présente Continental déclare que l'appareil Radio Transmitter est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy: Con la presente Continental dichiara che questo Radio Transmitter è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia: Ar šo Continental deklarē, ka Radio Transmitter atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem
noteikumiem.
Lithuania: Šiuo Continental deklaruoja, kad šis Radio Transmitter atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Netherlands: Hierbij verklaart Continental dat het toestel Radio Transmitter in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
344

09 Wheels and tyres
09
Country/
Area
Malta: Hawnhekk, Continental, jiddikjara li dan Radio Transmitter jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn
relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary: Alulírott, Continental nyilatkozom, hogy a Radio Transmitter megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Poland: Niniejszym Continental oświadcza, że Radio Transmitter jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal: Continental declara que este Radio Transmitter está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva
1999/5/CE.
Slovenia: Continental izjavlja, da je ta Radio Transmitter v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive
1999/5/ES.
Slovakia: Continental týmto vyhlasuje, že Radio Transmitter spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice
1999/5/ES.
Finland: Continental vakuuttaa täten että Radio Transmitter tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden: Härmed intygar Continental att denna Radio Transmitter står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga
relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland: Hér með lýsir Continental yfir því að Radio Transmitter er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun
1999/5/EC.
Norway: Continental erklærer herved at utstyret Radio Transmitter er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i
direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Related information
• Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 327)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Volvo service programme Service interval and next service, Book service and repair*1
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- charging cable Manage service, repair and booking informa-
ble, follow the Volvo service programme as The hour meter on the charging cable counts tion directly in your Internet-connected car.
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. charging time to the next service. Volvo rec-
ommends having the control unit checked by This service provides a convenient way to 10
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised an electrician after every 5000 operating book a service and workshop visit directly in
Volvo workshop to perform the service and hours. the car. Car information is sent to your dealer,
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the who can prepare the workshop visit. The
personnel, special tools and service literature IMPORTANT dealer will contact you to schedule an
to guarantee the highest quality of service. appointment time. For certain markets, the
Do not modify the control unit in any way. system reminds you of a scheduled appoint-
IMPORTANT ment time as it approaches and the naviga-
Related information tion system2 can also guide you to the work-
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and • Climate control system - fault tracing and shop when the time comes.
Warranty Booklet. repair (p. 358)
Service and repair

Service the car regularly. Follow Volvo's rec-
ommended service intervals.
If inspection and repair are required then only
an authorised Volvo workshop may carry out
the work.
WARNING
Do not carry out any repairs of your own
on this vehicle. Electrical cables and/or
components that have detached must only
be rectified by an authorised workshop -
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
1 Applies to certain markets.

2 Applies to Sensus Navigation.
}}

||
Before the service can be used • For the service to work and for the sys- • Yes - A booking enquiry is sent to your
tem to communicate via the car's screen, dealer who then comes back with a
Volvo ID and my profile
notifications/pop-up messages must be booking proposal. The service lamp and
• Register a Volvo ID. For more information accepted. In the normal view for the MY service message in the combined instru-
and how to create a Volvo ID, see Volvo CAR source, press OK/MENU and then ment panel are extinguished.
10 ID (p. 19).
Service & repair Display • No - No more pop-up messages will be
• Log in to the web portal My Volvo, go to notifications. shown in the screen. The message in the
your profile and carry out the following:
combined instrument panel remains. After
– Check that the car is connected to your Using the service this option has been selected, it is possi-
profile. All menus and settings are accessed from the ble to start the manual booking in the car,
normal view in MY CAR by pressing OK/ see below.
– Check that your contact information is MENU and then Service & repair.
correct. • Postpone - The pop-up menu is shown
When it is time for service, and in some cases the next time the car is started.
– Select the Volvo dealer you want to con- when the car is in need of repair, this is noti-
tact for service and repair. fied in the combined instrument panel (p. 66)
– Select preferred communication channel and via a pop-up menu in the screen.
(SMS or phone). Booking information is
always sent to the car and to you via
email.
Prerequisite for booking from car
• To send and receive booking information
to and from the car, the car must be con-
nected to the Internet, see Sensus Info-
tainment supplement for information on
how to connect the car to the Internet.
• Since the booking information is sent
over your private phone subscription, you
will be asked whether you want to send
the information. The question is asked Service message in the screen.
once and then applies to the selected
connection for a limited time. Meaning of the answer options in the
screen's pop-up menu:
348

Book a service or repair manually1 Call the dealer1 Booking information and vehicle data
1. Press the MY CAR button in the centre With a Bluetooth® phone connected to the When you decide to book a service from your
console and select Service & repair car, you can call your dealer. For connecting car, the booking information and vehicle data
the phone, see Sensus Infotainment supple- will be sent. Vehicle data information consists
Dealer information Request service
ment. of a number of signals within the following 10
or repair.
areas:
> Vehicle data is sent automatically to – Select Service & repair Dealer
your dealer. information Call dealer.
• Service requirement.
2. The dealer sends a booking proposal to • Function status.

Using the navigation system1, 2
the car. Enter your workshop as destination or way-
• Fluid levels.
3. Accept or request a new booking pro- point in the navigation system. • Mileage (distance).
posal. – • The car's vehicle identification number
Select Service & repair Dealer
(VIN3).
After the booking has been accepted the information Set single destination.
booking information is stored in the car, see • The car's software version.
My bookings. The car will automatically com- – Select Service & repair Dealer
Related information
municate with you via the screen by means of information Add as waypoint.
reminders about the booking and guide you
• Volvo ID (p. 19)
Sending vehicle data1
to the workshop visit.
Vehicle data is sent to a central Volvo data-
You can also book a workshop visit via My base (not your dealer) from which Volvo deal-
Volvo. Go to "My bookings" and select ers can retrieve vehicle information using the
"Update" in order to gain access to bookings car's identification number (VIN3). The num-
from My Volvo. ber is printed in the car's service and war-
My bookings1 ranty booklet, alternatively inside the wind-
Show booking information in the car's screen. screen's bottom left-hand corner.
Accept or request a new booking proposal. – Select Service & repair Send car
– Select Service & repair My bookings. data.
1 Applies to certain markets.

2 Applies to Sensus Navigation.
3 Vehicle Identification Number
349

Raising the car

When raising the car it is important that the
jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended
points on the car's underbody.
10
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recom-
mended by Volvo, follow the instructions
supplied with the equipment.
350

10
Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a front workshop jack
then this must be positioned under one of the
four lifting points furthest in under the car. If
the car is raised with a rear workshop jack
then it must be positioned under one of the
lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack
is positioned so that the car cannot slide off
the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.
If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop
lift then the front and rear lifting arms can be
positioned under the outer lifting points (jack-
ing points). Alternatively, the inner lifting
points can be used at the front.
Related information
• Changing wheels - removing wheels
(p. 321)
351

Bonnet - opening and closing Move the catch to the left and open the Engine compartment - overview
The bonnet can be opened when the handle bonnet. (The catch hook is located The overview shows normal checking points.
in the passenger compartment has been between the headlamp and grille, see
turned clockwise and the lock by the grille has illustration.) Some of the car's batteries and several of the
10 been moved to the left. components included in the car's electric
WARNING drive system are located under the bonnet.
Exercise caution in this area and only touch
Check that the bonnet locks properly when anything that is related to normal mainte-
closed.
nance.
Related information WARNING

• Engine compartment - checking (p. 353)
Orange-coloured cables must only be han-
• Engine compartment - overview (p. 352) dled by qualified personnel.
The handle for bonnet opening is always on the WARNING

left-hand side.
Several components in the car work with
high-voltage current that could be danger-
ous in the event of incorrect intervention.
• Do not touch anything that is not
clearly described in this owner's man-
ual.
• Exercise caution when checking/refill-
ing fluids in the engine compartment.
Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees

clockwise. You will hear when the catch
releases.
352

Related information Engine compartment - checking

• Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 352) Some oils and fluids should be checked at
• Engine compartment - checking (p. 353) regular intervals.
Regular checking 10
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
• Coolant
• Engine oil
• Power steering fluid
• Washer fluid
Normal checking points - other parts require
specialist expertise. WARNING
Checking/refilling the coolant for the cool-
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
ing and climate control systems
the front of the engine compartment,
Checking/filling the power steering fluid behind the radiator) may start automati-
cally some after the engine has been
Filling engine oil switched off.
Checking/filling of brake fluid (on driver's Always have the engine cleaned by a
side) workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended. There is a risk of fire if
Starter battery the engine is hot.
Relay and fuse box
Related information
Filling washer fluid • Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 352)
• Engine compartment - overview (p. 352)
WARNING • Coolant - level (p. 356)
The car's electrical system must always be • Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 355)
in key position 0 when work is being per- • Power steering fluid - level (p. 358)
formed in the engine compartment; see
Key positions - functions at different levels • Washer fluid - filling (p. 368)
(p. 81).
353

Engine oil - general When driving under adverse conditions, see tain variants have both systems. Contact a
An approved engine oil must be used in order Engine oil - adverse driving conditions Volvo dealer for more information.
that the recommended service intervals can (p. 402).
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord-
be applied. ance with the intervals specified in the Serv-
10 IMPORTANT ice and Warranty Booklet.
In order to fulfil the requirements for the Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
engine's service intervals all engines are permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
has been made very carefully with regard higher grade; see Engine oil - adverse driving
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel conditions (p. 402).
consumption and environmental impact.
For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade
An approved engine oil must be used in and volume (p. 404).
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed Related information
grade of oil for both filling and oil change, • Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 355)
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
Volvo recommends: and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of

low/high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain
engine variants have an oil pressure sensor,
and then the combined instrument panel's
warning symbol for low oil pressure is used.
Other variants have an oil level sensor, when
the driver is informed via the instrument's
warning symbol and display texts. Cer-
354

Engine oil - checking and filling WARNING

The oil level is checked with the electronic oil
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
level sensor. appears as shown in the illustration below.
The level must never be above MAX or
Engine with electronic oil level sensor, below MIN, as this could lead to engine 10
5-cyl. diesel damage.
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the system
when certain conditions are fulfilled. For
this reason the system cannot always
Message and graph in the display. directly detect changes when the oil is
Message filled or drained. Under certain conditions,
internal combustion engine operation may
Engine oil level be required for approx. 30 km.
The oil level is checked using the electronic
oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the WARNING
Filler pipe4. engine is switched off, see Menu navigation - Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani-
You do not need to take action with respect combined instrument panel (p. 110). fold due to the risk of fire.
to the engine oil level before a message is
shown in the display, see following illustra- WARNING
tion.
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may
be too high.
IMPORTANT
In the event of the message Oil level low
Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.
4 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

}}
355

||
Measuring the oil level, 5-cyl. diesel Coolant - level WARNING
If the oil level needs to be checked then it The coolant cools the internal combustion
should be carried out in accordance with the Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
engine to the correct operating temperature. requires topping up when the engine is at
sequence below. The heat that is transferred from the engine to operating temperature, unscrew the
10 the coolant can be used to heat the passen- expansion tank cap slowly to gently
1. Activate key position II; see Key positions
- functions at different levels (p. 81). ger compartment. release the overpressure.
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand The coolant level must lie between the MIN
stalk switch to position Oil level. and MAX marks on the expansion tank. For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality; see Coolant - grade and vol-
> You will then see information displayed Checking the level and topping up ume (p. 405).
about the engine oil level.
For more information on menu naviga- Check the coolant regularly
tion, see Menu navigation - combined The level must be between the MIN and MAX
instrument panel (p. 110). marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could
occur, causing a risk of damage to the
engine.
When topping up the coolant, follow the

instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill conditions. Never top up with water only. The
more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom- risk of freezing increases with both too little
mended filling level is 4. Message and graph in and too much coolant concentrate.
the display.
Related information
• Engine oil - general (p. 354)
356

IMPORTANT Brake and clutch fluid - level Filling

The brake fluid level should be between con-
• A high content of chlorine, chlorides
tainer's MIN and MAX marks.
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system. Checking the level 10
• Always use coolant with anti-corrosion The level must be between the MIN and MAX
agent as recommended by Volvo. marks that are visible inside the reservoir.
• Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% Check the level regularly.
water and 50% coolant. Change the brake fluid every other year or at
• Mix the coolant with approved quality every other regular service.
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed The fluid should be changed annually on cars
coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent
ommendations. braking, such as driving in mountains or tropi- The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
cal climates with high humidity.
• When changing coolant/replacing The fluid reservoir is protected under the
cooling system components, flush the For capacities and recommended brake fluid cover over the cold zone in the engine com-
cooling system clean with approved grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume partment. The round cover must be removed
quality tap water or flush with ready- (p. 407). first before the reservoir cap can be reached.
mixed coolant.
Turn and open the cover located on the
• The engine must only be run with a WARNING
covering.
well-filled cooling system. Otherwise, If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in
temperatures that are too high may the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the
occur resulting in the risk of damage ther before topping up the brake fluid. fluid. The level must be between the MIN
(cracks) in the cylinder head. Volvo recommends that the reason for the and MAX marks, which are located on
loss of brake fluid is investigated by an the inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
357

Power steering fluid - level NOTE Climate control system - fault tracing
The power steering fluid level must be and repair
If a fault should arise in the power steering
between the reservoir's MIN and MAX marks. system, or if the engine is switched off and The air conditioning system must only be
The fluid does not need to be changed. must be towed, then the car can still be serviced and repaired by an authorised work-
10 steered. shop.
Troubleshooting and repair

The air conditioning system contains fluores-
cent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when
looking for leaks.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres-
surised refrigerant R134a. This system
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering Related information
fluid reservoir clean when checking. The
cover must not be opened. • Volvo service programme (p. 347)
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not

require changing. The level must be between
the MIN and MAX marks.
For recommended fluid grade, see Power
steering fluid - grade (p. 407).
358

Lamp replacement WARNING NOTE

Lamp replacement can be carried out for
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps, replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
please refer to a workshop. ried out at a workshop - an authorised have condensation on the inside of the
Volvo workshop is recommended. Working lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is 10
The bulbs are specified (p. 365). The follow- with Xenon lamps demands extreme cau- designed to withstand this. Condensation
ing list contains locations of bulbs and other tion because the headlamp is equipped is normally vented out of the lamp housing
light sources that are specialised, such as with a high voltage unit. when the lamp has been switched on for a
LED5 lamps, or are unsuitable for changing time.
for some other reason, except at a work-
WARNING
shop6: Related information
The car's electrical system must be in key • Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 360)
• Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon
position 0 for bulb replacement; see Key
lamps) positions - functions at different levels • Lamp replacement - location of rear
• Daytime running lights/Position/parking (p. 81). lamps (p. 364)
lamps front • Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
• Side marker lamps front (p. 365)
IMPORTANT
• Cornering lights • Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs (p. 364)
• Side direction indicators, door mirrors with your fingers. Grease from your fingers
• Approach lighting, door mirrors is vaporised by the heat, coating the • Lamp replacement - number plate lighting
reflector and then causing damage. (p. 364)
• Interior lighting apart from Courtesy light-
ing front
• Position/parking lamps rear/Side marker NOTE
lamps rear If an error message remains after the bro-
• Brake light. ken bulb has been replaced then we rec-
ommend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
5 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

359

Lamp replacement - headlamps 1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound

All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the should be heard.
engine compartment. First loosen and remove 2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.
the whole headlamp. The short pin is fitted closest to the grille.
10 Check that they are firmly inserted.
Removing the headlamp
Set the car's electrical system in key position 3. Check the lighting.
0, see Key positions - functions at different The headlamp must be mounted and the con-
levels (p. 81). nector firmly connected before the lighting is
switched on or the remote control key is
Detach the headlamp connector by
inserted into the ignition switch.
pressing down the clip with your thumb.
At the same time, guide out the connec- Related information
tor with your other hand. • Lamp replacement (p. 359)
5. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a • Lamp replacement - cover for main/
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. dipped beam bulbs (p. 361)
6. Replace the bulb in question. • Lamps - specifications (p. 365)
Securing the headlamp

Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.
Release the headlamp by alternately tilt-

ing and pulling it out.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the
connector.
360

Lamp replacement - cover for main/ • Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 362) Lamp replacement - dipped beam
dipped beam bulbs • Lamp replacement - extra main beam The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the
Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by (p. 362) headlamp's larger cover.
releasing the headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE 10
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
Before starting to replace a bulb, see Lamp

replacement - headlamps (p. 360).
1. Unscrew the cover's four screws using a
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 360).
Torx tool, size T20 (1). They should not be
loosened completely. (3 - 4 turns are suf- 2. Remove the cover (p. 361).
ficient.)
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
2. Slide the cover to one side.
4. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Remove the cover.
5. The guide pin on the lamp should be
Reinstall the cover in reverse order. straight up when it is fitted and a clicking
sound should be heard when it clicks into
Related information place.
• Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 360)
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
• Lamp replacement - dipped beam
(p. 361) Related information
• Lamps - specifications (p. 365)
361

Lamp replacement - main beam Lamp replacement - extra main beam Lamp replacement - direction
The main beam bulb is fitted inside the head- The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the indicators front
lamp's larger cover. headlamp's larger cover. The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside
the headlamp's smaller cover.
10 NOTE NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps. Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 360).

2. Detach the cover by pulling it straight out.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 360). 1. Detach the headlamp (p. 360). 3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
bulb.
2. Remove the cover (p. 361). 2. Remove the cover (p. 361).
4. Press and simultaneously turn the bulb to
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise 3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
detach it.
and then pulling straight out. and then pulling straight out.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket 5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket Related information
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It • Lamps - specifications (p. 365)
can only be secured in one position. can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order. Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

• Lamps - specifications (p. 365) • Lamps - specifications (p. 365)

Lamp replacement - rear lamp Related information

Rear direction indicators, rear fog lamp and • Lamp replacement - location of rear
reversing lamp are replaced from inside the lamps (p. 364)
cargo area. • Lamps - specifications (p. 365)
10
Lamp housing, rear
The lamps are accessible when emergency

puncture repair kit is lifted out.
1. Open the panel.
2. Lift the emergency puncture repair kit.
3. Remove the insulation that is fitted in
front of the bulb holder by pulling it
The bulbs for reversing lamp, fog lamp and
straight out.
direction indicator in the rear lamp cluster are
replaced from inside the cargo area. 4. Press down the catch and pull out the
bulb holder.
5. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
6. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn
clockwise.
7. Press down the catch when the bulb
holder is refitted.
8. Refit the insulation, emergency puncture
repair kit and panel.
363

Lamp replacement - location of rear Lamp replacement - number plate Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo
lamps lighting area
The overview shows the location of the lamps The number plate lighting is located under the The cargo area lighting is located in the tail-
at the rear. tailgate handle. gate.
10
G031942
Brake light (LED) 1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so
that the lamp housing comes loose.
Position/parking lamps (LED)/Side marker 2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing
lamps (LED) and withdraw it. 2. Replace the bulb.
Indicator (p. 363) 3. Replace the bulb. 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing.
Brake light (LED) 4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it
into place. Related information
Reversing lamp
Related information • Lamps - specifications (p. 365)
Fog lamps • Lamps - specifications (p. 365)
Related information
• Lamps - specifications (p. 365)
364

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror Related information Lamps - specifications

lighting • Lamps - specifications (p. 365) The specifications apply to bulbs. When
The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer
lamp lenses. to a workshop.
10
Removal of lamp lens Lighting WA Type
Dipped beam, 55 H7 LL
halogen
Main beam, Halo- 65 H9

gen
Extra main beam, 65 H9

ABL
Front direction 24 PY24W

indicators
Courtesy lighting 3 T10 Socket

1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens front W2.1x9.5d
and gently prize up the lug on the edge.
Glovebox lighting 5 Socket SV8.5
2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp Length 43 mm
lens.
3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb Vanity mirror 1.2 T5 Socket
straight out to the side and replace with a lighting W2x4.6d
new one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with Cargo area light- 5 Socket SV8.5
the pliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could ing Length 43 mm
then be crushed.
Number plate 5 C5W LL
Attaching the lamp lens lighting
1. Refit the lamp lens.
Direction indica- 21 PY21W LL
2. Press it into place.
tors, rear
}}
365

||
Lighting WA Type Wiper blades IMPORTANT
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
Before placing the wiper blades in the
- - - windscreen and rear window. Together with service position, make sure that they are
the washer fluid they clean the windows and not frozen down.
10 Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL ensure visibility for driving.
Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL The windscreen wiper blades must be in serv- 1. Insert the remote control key in the igni-
ice position when they are to be replaced. tion switch7 and briefly press the START/
A Watt
STOP ENGINE button to set the car's
Related information Service position
electrical system to key position I. For
• Lamp replacement (p. 359) detailed information on key positions, see
• Lamp replacement - location of rear Key positions - functions at different lev-
lamps (p. 364) els (p. 81).
• Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting 2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
(p. 365) button again to set the car’s electrical
system in key position 0.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk
switch up and hold it in position for
approx. 1 second.
> The wipers then move to standing
straight up.
Wiper blades in service position.
The wipers return to their starting position
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper
when you briefly press the START/STOP
blades (for scraping off ice from the wind-
ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical sys-
screen, for example) they must be in service
tem to key position I (or when the car is
position.
started).
7 Not necessary in cars with the Keyless function.
366

IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the wind-
screen before the wipers are allowed to 10
return to their starting position. This is to
avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
Replacing the wiper blades

Fold up the wiper arm when it is in serv-
ice position. Press the button located on
the wiper blade mounting and pull
straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
NOTE
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard. The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
Check that the blade is firmly installed. the passenger side.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the

Replacing the wiper blades, rear
windscreen.
window
The wipers return from service position to
their starting position when you briefly press
the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the
car’s electrical system to key position I (or
when the car is started).
}}
367

||
1. Fold out the wiper arm. Washer fluid - filling Related information
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the Washer fluid is used for cleaning the head- • Wiper blades (p. 366)
arrow). lamps and windows. Washer fluid with anti-
freeze must be used during winter.
10 3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever
to detach the blade more easily.
4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen,
see Car washing (p. 388).
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected
maintenance shortens the service life of The windscreen and headlamp washers share
the wiper blades. a common reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Related information
• Washer fluid - filling (p. 368) Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equiva-
lent with a recommended pH of between 6
and 8.
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the
winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reser-
voir and hoses.
For capacities, see Washer fluid - quality and

volume (p. 407).
368

Starter battery - general IMPORTANT IMPORTANT

The starter battery is used to drive the starter
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure When charging the starter battery, only
motor and other electrical equipment in the you replace it with a battery with the same use a modern battery charger with con-
car. cold starting capacity and type as the orig- trolled charging voltage. Fast charging
inal battery (see the label on the battery). function must not be used since it may 10
The service life and function of the starter bat-
damage the battery.
tery is influenced by factors such as the num-
ber of starts, discharging, driving style, driving NOTE
conditions, climatic conditions, etc. NOTE
• The starter battery's container size
The car's traditional 12 V battery is here should be consistent with the original If both the starter battery and the hybrid
called "starter battery" even if the hybrid bat- battery's dimensions. battery (p. 294) are discharged then both
tery (p. 372) is often used for starting the batteries must be charged. In such a case,
• The starter battery's height is different charging only the hybrid battery first is not
internal combustion engine. depending on size. possible.
• Never disconnect the starter battery when
the engine is running.
WARNING IMPORTANT
• Check that the cables to the starter bat-
tery are correctly connected and properly • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen If the following instruction is not observed
tightened. gas, which is highly explosive. A spark then the energy saving function for info-
can be formed if a jump lead is con- tainment may be temporarily disengaged,
Voltage (V) 12 nected incorrectly, and this can be and/or the message in the information dis-
enough for the battery to explode. play about the main battery's state of
Cold start capacityA - charge may be temporarily inapplicable,
760 • The battery contains sulphuric acid, following the connection of an external
CCAB (A) which can cause serious burns. battery or battery charger:
Size, L×W×H (mm) 278×175×190 • If sulphuric acid comes into contact
• The negative battery terminal on the
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
car's starter battery must never be
Capacity (Ah) 70 large quantities of water. If acid
used for connecting an external bat-
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
A In accordance with EN standard. tery or battery charger - only the car
attention immediately.
B Cold Cranking Amperes. chassis may be used as the ground-
ing point.
See Jump starting with battery (p. 263) for
a description of how the cable clamps
must be attached.
}}
369

||
NOTE Battery - symbols Avoid sparks and naked
There are information and warning symbols flames.
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly. on the battery.
10 The life of the battery is affected by several Symbols on the battery

factors, including driving conditions and
climate. Battery starting capacity decrea- Use protective goggles.
ses gradually with time and therefore Risk of explosion.
needs to be recharged if the car is not
used for a longer time or when it is only
driven short distances. Extreme cold fur-
ther limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, Further information in the
at least 15 minutes of driving/week is rec-
ommended or that the battery is con- owner's manual for the
Must be taken for recy-
nected to a battery charger with automatic car.
cling.
trickle charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
Store the battery out of
Related information the reach of children.
• Battery - symbols (p. 370) NOTE
• Starter battery - replacement (p. 371) An expended battery must be recycled in
an environmentally safe manner as it con-
tains lead.
The battery contains cor-
rosive acid. Related information
• Starter battery - general (p. 369)
370

Starter battery - replacement

The starter battery in the car can be replaced
without the help of a workshop.
The car's traditional 12 V battery is here 10

called "starter battery" even if the hybrid bat-
tery (p. 372) is often used for starting the
internal combustion engine.
Removal
First of all: Take the remote control key from Open the clips on the front cover and
the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes remove the cover.
before any electrical connections are touched
Release the rubber moulding so that the
- this is because the car's electrical system
rear cover is free.
needs to store the necessary information to
control modules. Remove the rear cover by screwing one
quarter turn and lifting it away.
WARNING
Connect and remove the positive and neg-
ative cables in the correct order.
Detach the black negative cable.
Detach the red positive cable.
Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-

tery.
Loosen the screw holding the battery
clamp.
}}
371

||
Move the battery aside. For more information on the car's starter bat- Hybrid battery
tery, see Jump starting with battery (p. 263). The car is equipped with a hybrid battery for
Lift it up.
electric motor operation - a maintenance-free
rechargeable Lithium-ion type battery.
10 Fitting
WARNING
The hybrid battery must only be replaced
by a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
Coolant
The hybrid battery's cooling system has a
separate expansion tank.
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Check that it is correctly connected to
both battery and outlet in the body.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See earlier sec-
tion "Removal".) IMPORTANT
8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See "Removal".) The hybrid battery's coolant must only be
topped up by a workshop - an authorised
9. Align the front cover and secure it with Volvo workshop is recommended.
the clips. (See "Removal".)
372

Related information Electrical system Fuses - general

• Charging the hybrid battery - prepara- The electrical system is single-pole and uses All electrical functions and components are
tions (p. 296) the chassis and engine casing as a conductor. protected by a number of fuses in order to
protect the car's electrical system from dam-
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alterna- age by short circuiting or overloading. 10
tor.
The size, type and performance of the starter WARNING
battery depend on the car's equipment and Orange-coloured cables must only be han-
function. dled by qualified personnel.
IMPORTANT
WARNING
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
you replace it with a battery with the same Several components in the car work with
cold starting capacity and type as the orig- high-voltage current that could be danger-
inal battery (see the label on the battery). ous in the event of incorrect intervention.
Do not touch anything that is not clearly
described in this owner's manual.
Related information
• Starter battery - replacement (p. 371)
If an electrical component or function does
• Starter battery - general (p. 369)
not work, it may be because the component's
fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If
the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a
fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that
you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the
fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has
blown.
}}
373

||
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new Cargo area
fuse of the same colour and amperage.
Engine compartment, cold zone
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with • Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 375)
an amperage higher than that specified
when replacing a fuse. This could cause • Fuses - under glovebox (p. 378)
significant damage to the electrical system • Fuses - in the control module under the
and possibly lead to fire. glovebox (p. 380)
• Fuses - in cargo area (p. 382)
Location of central electrical units • Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 386)
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand

drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
electrical units under the glovebox change
sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Under the glovebox
374

Fuses - in engine compartment

Fuses in the engine compartment protect
engine and brake functions, amongst other
things.
10
}}
375

||
General fuses, engine compartment Function A Function A
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal - - Primary fuse for the central 20
and fitting of fuses. electronic module (CEM) under
10 Primary fuse for relay/fuse box 60 the glovebox
Positions (see preceding illustration) under the glovebox
Engine compartment, upper ABS 5
- -
Engine compartment, front Adjustable steering force* 5
- -
Engine compartment, lower Engine control module; Trans- 10
- - mission control module; Air-
These fuses are all located in the engine com-
partment box. The fuses in (C) are located bags
- -
under (A). Heated washer nozzles* 10
On the inside of the cover is a label that Windscreen wipers 30
shows the location of the fuses. - -
Parking heater* 25
• Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Headlamp control 5
Fuse" type and must only be replaced by - -
a workshop8. - -
• Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" - -
type and should be replaced by a work- - -
shop8 ABS pump 40
- -
• Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini ABS valves 20
Fuse" type. Relay coils 5
Function A Headlamp washers* 20
Auxiliary lamps* 20
- - Headlamp levelling*; Active 10
Xenon headlamps - ABL* Horn 15
Primary fuse for the central 50
electronic module (CEM) under
the glovebox

Function A Function A Related information

• Fuses - under glovebox (p. 378)
Relay coil in main relay for 10 • Fuses - in the control module under the
engine management system; Crankcase ventilation heater 10 glovebox (p. 380)
Engine control module 10
Transmission control module 15
Glow plugs 70
- -
Cooling fan 80
Relay coils in central electrical 5
unit in engine compartment Power steering 100
cold zone
Start relay 30 Behind the engine
Glow control module 10
Engine Control Module (ECM) 15
Mass air flow sensor; Control 15

valves
Valves; Oil level sensor 10
Lambda-sond; Control module, 10 A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car.

radiator roller cover Fuse
Function A
Diesel filter heater 20
Monitoring of vacuum pump for 5
brake system
377

Fuses - under glovebox

Fuses under the glovebox protect the info-
tainment system and seat functions, amongst
other things.
10
Positions Function A Function A

Function A
- - Control panel, rear passenger 20
Primary fuse for audio control 40 door, right
module*; Primary fuse for fuses Door handle (Keyless*) 5
16-20: Infotainment Control panel, rear passenger 20
- - door, left
Windscreen washers; Rear win- 25
dow washer Control panel, driver's door 20 Keyless* 7.5
- - Control panel, front passenger 20 Power seat, driver's side* 20

door
- - Power seat, passenger side* 20

Function A Function A
- - Parking assistance*; Parking 5
camera*; Towbar control mod-
Infotainment Control Module or 5 ule* 10
ScreenA
BLIS*
Audio control unit (amplifier)*; 10
- -
Digital radio*; TV*
Audio control module or Control 15 - -

module SensusA A Certain model variants.
Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5 Related information

- -
• Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 375)
• Fuses - in the control module under the
Sunroof*; Interior lighting roof; 5 glovebox (p. 380)
Climate sensor*; Damper • Fuses - in cargo area (p. 382)
motors, air intake • Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
12 V socket, tunnel console 15 zone (p. 386)
Seat heating, rear right* 15
Seat heating, rear left* 15
Electrically-driven heater 5
Seat heating, front passenger 15

side
Seat heating, front driver's side 15

Fuses - in the control module under

the glovebox
Fuses in the control module under the glove-
box protect airbag and collision warning sys-
10 tem functions, amongst other things.
Positions Function A Function A

Function A
Adaptive cruise control, ACC*; 10 Heated windscreen* 15
Rear window wiper 15 collision warning system*
Unlocking, tailgate 10
- - Interior lighting; Rain sensor* 7.5
Folding head restraint* 10
Interior lighting; Driver's door 7.5 Steering wheel module 7.5
control panel, power windows; Fuel pump 20
Power seats* Central locking system, fuel 10
filler flap Movement detector alarm*; Cli- 5
Combined instrument panel 5 mate panel
Heated steering wheel* 15

Function A
Steering lock 15
Siren*; Data link connector 5 10

OBDII
- -
Airbags 10
Collision warning system* 5
Accelerator pedal sensor; Dim- 7.5

ming interior rearview mirror*;
Seat heating, rear*
Infotainment control module 15

(Performance); Audio (Perform-
ance)
Brake light 5
Sunroof* 20
Immobiliser 5
Related information
• Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 386)

Fuses - in cargo area

Fuses in the cargo area protect trailer and
electric drive functions, amongst other things.
10
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
382

Box A Function A
- -
- - 10
Trailer socket 1* 40
- -
The emergency puncture repair kit needs to be

lifted out for the central electrical unit to be
accessible.
Positions
Box A Function A
Electric parking brake, left 30
Electric parking brake, right 30
Rear window defroster 30
Trailer socket 2* 15
- -
12 V socket, cargo area 15
- -
- -
}}

||
10
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
Box Function A Box Function A

B B
Coolant pump 1 for hybrid 10 Charging unit; Voltage con- 10
battery; Valve for coolant verter 400 V-12 V; Control
pumps 1 and 2 module for hybrid battery
Coolant pump 2 for hybrid 10 Relay coils; High voltage 10

battery converter for electric motor
and integrated starter gener-
Charging unit; Voltage con- 5 ator
verter 400 V-12 V; Control
module for hybrid battery Disengaging the electric 15
The emergency puncture repair kit needs to be motor from the rear axle
lifted out for the central electrical unit to be Coolant pump for the cool- 15
accessible. ing system's low tempera- - -
ture circuit
384

Box Function A
B
High voltage converter for 10
electric motor and integrated 10
starter generator; Control
module for hybrid battery
Coolant valves for the cool- 10

ing system's low tempera-
ture circuit; Electric A/C
compressor; Valve for heat
exchanger; Valve for climate
control system
- -
- -
Related information
glovebox (p. 380)
• Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 386)
385

Fuses - in the engine compartment's

cold zone
Fuses in the engine compartment's cold zone
are fitted in cars with the Start/Stop function.
10
Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.

• Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse" Positions Function A
type and must only be replaced by a
Function A
workshop9. Vacuum pump for brake sys- 40
• Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type Main fuse for central electrical 175 tem
and must only be replaced by a work- unit in the engine compartment
Primary fuse for the central 50
shop9.
Main fuse for central electronic 175 electronic module (CEM) under
• Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type. module (CEM) under the glove- the glovebox
For more information on Start/Stop - see box, relay/fuse box under the
Drive system - drive modes (p. 265). glovebox, central electrical Primary fuse for relay/fuse box 60
units in cargo area under the glovebox
386

Function A
Primary fuse for central electri- 50
cal unit B in cargo area
10
Primary fuse for central electri- 60
cal unit A in cargo area
Ventilation fan 40
- -
- -
- -
Internal diode 50
Oil pump automatic gearbox 30
- -
Related information
glovebox (p. 380)
387

Car washing WARNING NOTE

The car should be washed as soon as it
Always have the engine cleaned by a Wash the wiper blades and windscreen
becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash workshop. There is a risk of fire if the regularly with lukewarm soap solution or
with oil separator. Use car shampoo. engine is hot. car shampoo. Do not use any strong sol-
10 vents.
Washing by hand
• Remove bird droppings from the paint- IMPORTANT
work as soon as possible. Bird droppings Automatic car washes
contain chemicals that affect and discol- Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
our paintwork very quickly. An authorised for example.
Volvo workshop is recommended for the everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-
removal of any discoloration. Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents mended for achieving optimum results.
but use water and a non-scratching
• Hose down the underbody. sponge instead.
• Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt NOTE
has been removed so as to reduce the The car must only be washed by hand
risk of scratches from washing. Do not NOTE over the first few months. This is because
spray directly onto the locks. Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog the paint is more delicate when it is new.
• If necessary, use cold degreasing agent lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this have condensation on the inside of the High-pressure washing
case, the surfaces must not be hot from lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is
designed to withstand this. Condensation When using high-pressure washing, use
the sun! sweeping movements and make sure that the
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and when the lamp has been switched on for a nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to
plenty of lukewarm water. time. the surface of the car (the distance applies to
• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto
soap solution or car shampoo. the locks.
Wiper blades
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the
drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, windscreen, impair the service life of wiper
you reduce the risk of water drying stains blades.
which may need to be polished out.
For cleaning:
- Set the wiper blades to the service position,
see Wiper blades (p. 366).
388

Testing the brakes IMPORTANT Polishing and waxing

Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
WARNING rubber. or to give the paintwork extra protection.
Always test the brakes after washing the When using degreasant on plastic and The car does not need to be polished until it
10
car, including the parking brake, to ensure rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is is at least one year old. However, the car can
that moisture and corrosion do not attack necessary. Use a soft washing sponge. be waxed during this time. Do not polish or
the brake linings and reduce braking per- wax the car in direct sunlight.
formance. Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
layer.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
Polishing agent that contains abrasive and tar stains using tar remover or white spi-
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
must not be used. rit. More stubborn stains can be removed
The heat from the friction causes the brake
linings to warm up and dry. Do the same using fine rubbing paste designed for car
thing after starting in very damp or cold Rims paintwork.
weather. Only use rim cleaning agent recommended Polish first with a polish and then wax with
by Volvo. liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the the packaging carefully. Many preparations
components contain both polish and wax.
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
aluminium rims.
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
IMPORTANT
Related information
components, such as glossy trim mouldings. • Polishing and waxing (p. 389) Only paint treatment recommended by
When using such a cleaning agent the Volvo should be used. Other treatment
instructions must be followed carefully.
• Cleaning the interior (p. 390) such as preserving, sealing, protection,
• Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 390) lustre sealing or similar could damage the
paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by
such treatments is not covered by Volvo
warranty.
Related information
• Car washing (p. 388)
389

Water and dirt-repellent coating Rustproofing Cleaning the interior

The windows are treated with a surface coa- The car received a thorough and complete Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-
ting that improves visibility in difficult weather rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
conditions. are made of galvanised sheet metal. The and follow the instructions included with the
10 underbody is protected by a wear-resistant car care product.
Water and dirt-repellent coating* anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
There is natural wear of the water- Vacuuming is important prior to using clean-
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
repellent coating. ing agents.
exposed members, cavities, closed sections
Maintenance: and side doors. Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning
• Never use products such as car wax, Inspection and maintenance
of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it
this could ruin their water-repellent prop- a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
is important to keep the car clean. The car's
erties. Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
rustproofing needs to be checked regularly
• Take care when cleaning so as not to and touched-up if necessary in order for it to Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lift
damage the glass surface. be maintained. the mat straight up.
• To avoid damaging glass surfaces when Under normal conditions the rustproofing Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at
removing ice – only use plastic ice scra- does not require treatment for approximately each pin.
pers. 12 years. After this period, it should be trea-
• Treatment with a special finishing agent ted at three-year intervals. Volvo recom- WARNING
available from Volvo dealers is recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
mended in order to maintain the water- workshop for assistance if the car needs fur- check before setting off that the mat by
repellent properties. This should be used ther treatment. the driver's seat is firmly affixed and
first after three years and then each year. secured in the pins so that it does not get
Related information caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
IMPORTANT • Paint damage (p. 392)
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove A special textile cleaner is recommended for
ice from the windows. Use the heating to stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
remove ice from the door mirrors, see Win- mats should be cleaned with agents recom-
dows and rearview and door mirrors - mended by your Volvo dealer.
heating (p. 106).
Related information

Stains on fabric upholstery and roof To achieve best results Volvo recommends Protective treatment of leather
upholstery cleaning and the application of protective upholstery
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from cream once to four times per year (or more if 1. Pour a small amount of the protective
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is cream on the felted cloth and massage in
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of available from your Volvo dealer. a thin layer of cream with gentle circular 10
the upholstery. movements on the leather.
IMPORTANT
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
IMPORTANT • Certain items of coloured clothing (for before use.
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the example, jeans and suede garments)
The leather has now been given improved
fabric upholstery. may stain the upholstery.
protection against stains and improved UV
• Never use strong solvents. Such prod- protection.
Stains on leather upholstery ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to pre- leather upholstery. Washing instructions for the leather
serve its original appearance. steering wheel
Washing instructions for leather • Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau- moistened sponge and neutral soap.
tiful patina over time. The leather is refined upholstery
and processed so that it retains its natural 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the damp- • Leather needs to breathe. Never cover
ened sponge and squeeze out a strong the leather steering wheel with protective
characteristics. It is given a protective coa-
foam. plastic.
ting, but regular cleaning is required in order
to maintain both characteristics and appear- 2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular • Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
ance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product agents are recommended for best results.
movements.
for the cleaning and treatment of leather If the steering wheel has stains:
upholstery which, when used in accordance 3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
with the instructions, preserves the leather's
stain. Do not rub. blood)
protective coating. After a period of use the
natural appearance of the leather will never- 4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and – Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
theless emerge, depending more or less on allow the leather to dry completely. ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use
the surface texture of the leather. This is a a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
natural maturing of the leather and shows Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
that it is a natural product.
1. Same procedure as for group 1.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
}}
391

||
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust) Paint damage Colour code
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt. Paint is an important part of the car's rust-
proofing and should therefore be checked
2. Same procedure as for group 1. regularly. The most common types of paint-
10 work damage are stone chips, scratches, and
Stains on interior plastic parts, metal
marks on the edges of wings, doors and
parts and wood parts
bumpers.
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo Touching up minor paintwork damage
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paint-
parts and surfaces. work should be rectified immediately.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong Materials
stain removers. A special cleaning agent
available from Volvo dealers can be used for • primer10 - a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plastic- Exterior colour code
more difficult cleaning.
coated bumpers Any secondary exterior colour code
IMPORTANT • base coat and clear coat - are available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks11 It is important that the correct colour is used.
Do not use solvents with high alcohol con- For product label location, see Type designa-
tent, e.g. washer fluid, to clean the com- • masking tape tions (p. 395).
bined instrument panel. • fine sand paper10.
Seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A spe-
cial textile cleaning agent is available from
your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is
dry before allowing it to retract.
Related information
10 If required.
11 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
392

Repairing minor paint damage such as 3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
stone chips and scratches brush, matchstick or similar. Finish with
base coat and clear coat once the primer
has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but 10
mask around the damaged area to pro-
tect the undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of
paint remains in place, fill in with base coat
G021832
and clear coat as soon as the surface has

been cleaned.
Before work is started, the car must be clean
and dry as well as at a temperature above Related information
15 °C. • Rustproofing (p. 390)
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape
to remove any loose paint.
If the damage has reached down to a
metal surface (sheet steel), it is preferable
to use a primer. In the event of damage to
a plastic surface, an adhesive primer
should be used for better results - spray
into the spray can's cap and brush thinly.
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a
very fine polishing agent may be carried
out locally if required (e.g. if there are any
uneven edges). Clean the surface thor-
oughly and allow to dry.
393

SPECIFICATIONS

11 Specifications
Type designations
Type designation, vehicle identification num-
ber, etc., i.e. information unique to the car,
can be read on a label in the car.
11
}}
395

11 Specifications
||
Label location
11
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle dealer regarding the car and when ordering Type designation, vehicle identification
identification and engine numbers can facili- spare parts and accessories. number, permissible maximum weights
tate all contact with an authorised Volvo and code designation for exterior colour
396

11 Specifications
and type approval number. The label is

visible when the right rear door is opened.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code and engine serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial num-

ber. 11
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact
replicas of those in the car. They are
included to show their approximate
appearance and location in the car. The
information that applies to your particular
car is available on the respective decals
for your car.
Related information
• Weights (p. 399)
• Engine specifications (p. 401)
397

11 Specifications
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can
be read in the table.
11
Dimensions mm Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2776 H Rear track 1575
B Length 4635 I Load width, floor 1082
C Load length, floor, folded rear J Width 1865

seat 1749
K Width including door mirrors 2097
D Load length, floor 978
L Width including folded-in door
E Height 1484 mirrors 1899
F Load height 658
G Front track 1578
398

11 Specifications
Weights WARNING
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read
The car's driving characteristics change
on a label in the car. depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (p. 400) (when a trailer is
hitched) influence the load capacity and are 11
not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -
Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car
without extra equipment or accessories.
This means that for every accessory added For information on label location, see Type des-
the loading capacity of the car is reduced ignations (p. 395).
correspondingly by the weight of the Max. gross vehicle weight
accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load- Max. train weight (car+trailer)
ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as Max. front axle load
other accessories such as Towbar, Load Max. rear axle load
carrier, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary
lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven engine block Equipment level
heater, Safety grille, Carpets, Cargo cover,
Power seats, etc. Max. load: See registration document.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- Max. roof load: 75 kg.
taining the kerb weight of your own partic-
ular car. Related information
• Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 400)
399

11 Specifications
Towing capacity and towball load Towing capacity and towball load for driving
with a trailer can be read in the tables.
Max. weight braked trailer

Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
D6 AWD D82PHEV Automatic, TF-80SD 1800 90
11 A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 395).
Max. weight unbraked trailer

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
750 50
Related information
• Weights (p. 399)
• Trailer Stability Assist - TSA (p. 310)
400

11 Specifications
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (output etc.) for each
respective engine alternative can be read in
the table.
Diesel engine
Engine Engine Output Output Torque No. of cylin- Bore Stroke Swept vol- Compres-
codeA (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rpm) ders (mm) (mm) ume sion ratio
11
(litres)
D6 AWD D82PHEV 158/4000 215/4000 440/1500-3000 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 16.5:1
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 395).
Related information
• Coolant - grade and volume (p. 405)
• Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 404)
401

11 Specifications
Motor specifications - Electric drive Engine oil - adverse driving conditions

motor Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
V60 PLUG-IN HYBRID is driven both by a die- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
sel engine and an electric drive motor (ERAD Below are some examples of adverse driving
– Electric Rear Axle Drive). conditions.
Max. power output: 50 kW (70 hp). Check the oil level (p. 355) more frequently for
long journeys:
Torque: 200 Nm.
11 • towing a caravan or trailer
Related information
• in mountainous regions
• at high speeds
• in temperatures colder than -30 °C or
hotter than +40 °C. IMPORTANT
The above also apply to shorter driving dis-
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
tances at low temperatures. engine's service intervals all engines are
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse filled with a specially adapted synthetic
driving conditions. It provides extra protection engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
for the engine.
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
Volvo recommends: consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
402

11 Specifications
Related information
• Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 404)
• Engine oil - general (p. 354)
11
403

11 Specifications
Engine oil - grade and volume

Engine oil grade and volume for each respec-
tive engine alternative can be read in the
table.
Volvo recommends:
11
Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)
D6 AWD D82PHEV Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 approx. 5.9
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 395).
Related information
• Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 402)
• Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 355)
404

11 Specifications
Coolant - grade and volume

Approved coolant volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by

Volvo mixed with 50% water2, see the pack-
aging.
Engine Volume 11
(litres)
D6 AWD 12.9
Related information
• Coolant - level (p. 356)
2 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
405

11 Specifications
Transmission fluid - grade and volume

The prescribed transmission fluid and volume
for each respective gearbox alternative can be
read in the table.
Automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
TF-80SD approx 7.0 AW1
11
NOTE
For the MPS6, oil changes must take place
within certain service intervals.
For other gearboxes the gearbox oil does
not need to be changed under normal driv-
ing conditions. However, it may be neces-
sary under adverse driving conditions.
Related information
• Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 402)
• Type designations (p. 395)
406

11 Specifications
Brake fluid - grade and volume Power steering fluid - grade Washer fluid - quality and volume
The medium in a hydraulic brake system is Power steering fluid is the denomination of Washer fluid is used, together with wind-
called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer the medium used in the car's power steering screen and rear window wipers, to keep the
pressure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master system. car's windows and headlamps clean and
brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, ensure visibility while driving.
which in turn act on a mechanical brake. Prescribed grade: WSS M2C204-A2 or
equivalent product. Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recom-
Prescribed grade: DOT 4 mended by Volvo - with frost protection dur-
Related information ing cold weather and below freezing point.
Volume: 0.6 litres • Power steering fluid - level (p. 358) 11
Volume:
Related information
• Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 357) • Cars with headlamp washing: 3.4 litres.
• Cars without headlamp washing: 3.4
litres.
Related information
• Washer fluid - filling (p. 368)
• Wiper blades (p. 366)
• Wipers and washing (p. 101)
407

11 Specifications
Fuel tank - volume

Fuel tank volume for each respective engine
alternative can be read in the table.
Engine Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

D6 AWD approx 45 Diesel: Fuel - diesel (p. 290)
Related information
11
• Filling up with fuel (p. 289)
408

11 Specifications
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and NOTE
carbon dioxide emissions.
Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams There are several reasons for increased fuel trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
per km. consumption compared with the table's val- nation with fuel grade are factors that
ues. Examples of this are: could affect the car's performance.
Explanation
• The driver's driving style.
gram/km Related information
• If the customer has specified wheels
• Economical driving (p. 294)
larger than those fitted as standard on the
• Weights (p. 399) 11
litre/100 km model's basic version, then resistance
increases.
combined driving • High speed results in increased wind
resistance.
• Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to3.
D6 AWD 48 1.8 Large deviations in fuel consumption may
(D82PHEV) arise in a comparison with the EU driving
cycles3 which are used in the certification of
Fuel consumption and emission values in the the car and on which the consumption figures
table above are based on specific EU cycles3, in the table are based.
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the
basic version and without extra equipment.
The car's weight may increase depending on
equipment. This, as well as how heavily the
3 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007
(Euro 5) / Euro 6 and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the
engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - The combined driving value given in the
table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legislation. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide
emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
409

11 Specifications
Tyres - approved tyre pressures

Approved tyre pressures for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Engine Tyre size Speed Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
(km/h) Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear
(kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
11
235/45 R 17 0 - 160 280 280 280 280 280
D6 AWD (D82PHEV)
235/45 R 18 160 + 280 280 320 320 -
Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420 420

A Economical driving.
B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Related information
• Tyres - air pressure (p. 325)
• Type designations (p. 395)
410

11 Specifications
Hybrid Battery - specification Range - specification

The hybrid battery (battery for drive motor) is The car's range during electric operation
used to power the electric motor when driving (drive mode PURE): up to 50 km.
in electric mode.
Type: Lithium-ion
Energy quantity: 11.2 kWh.
Service life: Longer than 10 years.
11
Related information
• Charging the hybrid battery (p. 294)
• Charging the hybrid battery - prepara-
tions (p. 296)
411

12 Alphabetical Index
A Air cleaning AWD, All Wheel Drive............................... 275

material............................................... 125
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 199 passenger compartment.... 123, 124, 125
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 95 Air conditioning........................................ 131 B
Active high beam....................................... 93 Air conditioning system
Backrest..................................................... 83
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 95 repair................................................... 358
front seat, lowering............................... 83
Active Yaw Control.................................. 186 Air distribution.......................................... 126
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 85
Recirculation....................................... 132
Adapting driving characteristics.............. 254 Battery............................................. 286, 369
table.................................................... 134
Adaptive Cruise Control........................... 199 jump starting....................................... 263
Air quality system IAQS........................... 125
deactivate........................................... 205 maintenance....................................... 369
12 fault tracing......................................... 210 Alarm................................................ 181, 183 overload.............................................. 286
function............................................... 200 alarm indicator.................................... 182 remote control key/PCC..................... 169
managing speed................................. 202 alarm signals....................................... 183 symbols on the battery....................... 370
overtaking........................................... 205 automatic re-arming........................... 183 warning symbols................................. 370
overview.............................................. 201 checking the alarm............................. 165
BLIS................................................. 249, 250
radar sensor........................................ 207 reduced alarm level............................ 184
remote control key not working.......... 183 Bonnet, opening...................................... 352
setting the time interval...................... 203
standby mode..................................... 204 Alcolock................................................... 256 Book service and repair........................... 347
temporary deactivation....................... 204 Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 124 Booster seat
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 87 lowering................................................ 53
All Wheel Drive, (AWD)............................. 275
raising................................................... 52
Airbag All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 275 seating position.................................... 51
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 36
Approach lighting............................ 100, 163 Brake fluid................................................ 357
driver's side.................................... 34, 42
passenger side......................... 35, 36, 42 Automatic car washes............................. 388 grade and volume............................... 407
AIRBAG ............................................... 34, 35 Automatic gearbox.................................. 272 Brake light.................................................. 97
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 272 Brakes.............................................. 276, 279
Airbag system............................................ 33
trailer................................................... 306 Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 279
warning symbol.................................... 33
Automatic relocking................................. 175 brake light............................................. 97
412

brake system.............................. 276, 279 Charging.................................................. 296 seatbelts............................................. 392

Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 279 finish charging.................................... 303 upholstery........................................... 390
emergency brake lights........................ 97 start charging...................................... 302 Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 124
filling brake fluid.................................. 357 Charging cable........................................ 297 Climate control
handbrake........................................... 280 control unit.......................................... 297 actual temperature............................. 123
symbols in the combined instrument
Checking the engine oil level................... 354 auto-regulation................................... 130
panel................................................... 277
Children general................................................ 122
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 360 personal preferences.......................... 125
child safety locks.................................. 45
child seat and airbag............................ 50 sensors............................................... 123
child seats and side airbags................. 39 temperature control............................ 131
C location in car....................................... 50 Clock, adjustment...................................... 76
safety.............................................. 39, 45 12
Camera sensor................................ 218, 229 CO2 emissions......................................... 409
Child safety locks............................ 180, 181 Collision..................................................... 43
Car care................................................... 388
Child seat Collision warning............................. 223, 224
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 391
integrated two-stage booster seat....... 51
Cargo area Collision warning system
Child seats................................................. 45 function............................................... 224
cargo cover......................................... 156
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats... 54 general limitations............................... 228
coolant................................................ 372
recommended...................................... 46 operation............................................. 227
lighting.................................................. 99
size classes for child seats with ISO- Pedestrian detection........................... 226
mounting points.................................. 153
FIX fixture system................................. 54 Radar sensor.............................. 207, 216
protective net...................................... 154
types..................................................... 56
Cargo cover............................................. 156 Collision Warning System with Auto
upper mounting points for child seats.. 58
Brake....................................................... 223
Car key memory...................................... 160 City Safety™............................................ 216
Colour code, paint................................... 392
Car upholstery......................................... 390 Cleaning
Combined instrument panel...................... 67
Car washing............................................. 388 automatic car wash............................ 388
car washing........................................ 388 Compass................................................. 107
Catalytic converter................................... 292
rims..................................................... 389 calibration........................................... 108
Recovery............................................. 312
Condensation in headlamps.................... 388
Charge current......................................... 295
413

Controls, lights........................................... 88 D Driver Alert Control.................................. 233

Control symbols......................................... 70 operation............................................. 234
Daytime running lights............................... 91 Driver Alert System.................................. 233
Control unit.............................................. 301
Deadlock.................................................. 179 Drive systems.......................................... 264
Control unit display.................................. 300
deactivation........................................ 179
Coolant Driving...................................................... 287
temporary deactivation....................... 179
volume and grade............................... 405 cooling system.................................... 285
Defroster.................................................. 132 with a tailer......................................... 305
Coolant, checking and filling
Detachable towbar with the tailgate open......................... 286
Engine compartment.......................... 356
storage................................................ 307 Driving in water........................................ 285
Cooling system........................................ 285
Diesel....................................................... 290 Driving with a trailer
overheating......................................... 285
run out of fuel..................................... 291 towball load........................................ 400
12
Cornering lights......................................... 96
Diesel particle filter.................................. 293 towing capacity.................................. 400
Corner Traction Control........................... 186
Dimensions.............................................. 398
Crash, see Collision................................... 43
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 355
Cruise control.......................................... 196
Direction indicator..................................... 98 E
deactivate........................................... 198
managing speed................................. 197 Direction indicators.................................... 98 ECC, electronic climate control............... 128
resume set speed............................... 198 direction of rotation................................. 315 EcoGuide................................................... 71
temporary deactivation....................... 197 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 274 Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual........... 23
CTA.......................................................... 251 Display lighting.......................................... 90 Economical driving.................................. 294
Cyclist detection...................................... 225 Distance Warning.................................... 213 Electrically-driven heater......................... 144
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 124 Limitations.......................................... 214 Electrical socket...................................... 150
Symbols and messages..................... 215 cargo area........................................... 153
Door mirrors............................................. 105 Electrical system...................................... 373
automatic dimming............................. 105
Electric drive motor
Driveable punctured tyres........................ 331 specifications...................................... 402
414

Electric parking brake filter..................................................... 354 Fuel.......................................................... 290

low battery voltage............................. 280 grade and volume............................... 404 fuel consumption................................ 409
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 128 Engine specifications....................... 401, 402 fuel economy...................................... 325
fuel filter.............................................. 292
Emergency equipment Error messages
first aid kit........................................... 327 Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 211 Fuel-driven heater.................................... 144
warning triangle.................................. 326 Driver Alert Control............................. 235 auto mode.......................................... 145
Lane Departure Warning..................... 240 deactivate........................................... 145
Emergency puncture repair............. 332, 333
see Messages and symbols....... 211, 281 fuelling................................................ 145
action.................................................. 334
parking on a hill.................................. 145
inflating the tyres................................ 338 Error messages in BLIS........................... 253
starter battery and fuel....................... 145
rechecking.......................................... 337 exhaust gases, toxic, sucked in.............. 286
Fuelling
Emergency puncture repair kit External dimensions................................ 398 filling................................................... 289 12
location............................................... 333
fuel cap............................................... 289
overview.............................................. 334
fuel filler flap....................................... 288
sealing fluid......................................... 339
F fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 289
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 409
Fuel tank
Engine Fan
volume................................................ 408
deactivate........................................... 262 ECC.................................................... 130
Fuse box.................................................. 374
overheating......................................... 305 Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 219
start..................................................... 261 Fuses....................................................... 373
First aid.................................................... 327
behind the engine............................... 377
Engine compartment First aid kit............................................... 327 cargo area........................................... 382
coolant................................................ 356
Fluids, capacities............. 405, 406, 407, 408 changing............................................. 373
oil........................................................ 354
cold zone............................................ 386
overview.............................................. 352 Fluids and oils.......................... 405, 406, 407
engine compartment.......................... 375
power steering fluid............................ 358 Fog lamp General............................................... 373
Engine drag control................................. 186 rear........................................................ 96 Start/Stop........................................... 386
Engine oil......................................... 354, 402 Foot brake....................................... 276, 279 under glovebox........................... 378, 380
adverse driving conditions.................. 402 FSC, ecolabelling....................................... 23
415

G Headlamps............................................... 360 I
head restraint
Gearbox................................................... 271 centre seat, rear.................................... 85 IAQS - Interior Air Quality System........... 125
automatic............................................ 272 lowering.......................................... 85, 86 Immobiliser.............................................. 162
Gear indicator.......................................... 271 Heated washer nozzles............................ 102 Indicator symbols...................................... 72
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 274 Heater Inflatable curtain.................................. 39, 42
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- electrically-driven................................ 144 Information button, PCC.......................... 165
gagement................................................. 274 fuel-driven........................................... 144
Information display.................................... 67
Geartronic................................................ 272 Heating
Inlaid mats............................................... 150
Glass rearview and door mirrors.................. 106
rear window........................................ 106 Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 90
12 laminated/reinforced............................. 23
seats................................................... 129 Instrument overview
Glovebox................................................. 149
steering wheel....................................... 88 left-hand drive car................................ 60
locking................................................ 177
Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 18 right-hand drive car.............................. 63
Gross vehicle weight............................... 399
High engine temperature......................... 305 Instruments and controls..................... 60, 63
Ground fault breaker................................ 301
High-pressure headlamp washing........... 102 Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 271 Air cleaning......................................... 125
Hill Start Assist........................................ 275
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 98
Home safe light duration......................... 100
Interior rearview mirror............................. 107
H Horn........................................................... 87
automatic dimming............................. 107
Hybrid battery.......................................... 372
Handbrake............................................... 280 Intermittent wiping................................... 101
charging.............................................. 294
Hazard warning flashers............................ 97 specifications...................................... 411 Internet-connected car
Headlamp control...................................... 88 book service and repair...................... 347
Hybrid guide.............................................. 71
Headlamp levelling.................................... 90
Headlamp pattern, adjusting................... 100
Headlamp pattern adjustment................. 100
Active Bending Lights ........................ 100
416

J Lane keeping assistant main beam (cars with active xenon

operation..................................... 238, 239 headlamps)......................................... 362
Jack......................................................... 318 Laser sensor............................................ 220 main beam (cars with halogen head-
Journey statistics..................................... 120 lamps)................................................. 362
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 391
number plate lighting.......................... 364
Jump starting........................................... 263 Light indications, PCC............................. 165 vanity mirror........................................ 365
Lighting.................................................... 359 Loading
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 95 cargo area........................................... 151
K approach lighting........................ 100, 163 General............................................... 151
automatic lighting, passenger com- long load............................................. 152
Kerb weight.............................................. 399
partment............................................... 99 roof load............................................. 153
Key................................................... 159, 161 bulbs, specifications........................... 365
Lock 12
Key blade......................................... 166, 167 controls................................................. 98
locking................................................ 175
Keyless drive.... 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 262 cornering lights..................................... 96
manual locking.................................... 175
daytime running lights.......................... 91
Keyless - locking..................................... 172 unlocking.................................... 175, 176
display lighting...................................... 90
Keyless start (keyless drive)..... 170, 171, headlamp levelling................................ 90 Lockable wheel bolts............................... 317
172, 173, 174, 262 home safe lighting.............................. 100 Lock confirmation ................................... 161
Keyless - unlocking................................. 173 instrument lighting................................ 90 Lock indicator.......................................... 161
in the passenger compartment............. 98
Keypad in the steering wheel.................... 87 Locking/unlocking
main/dipped beam............................... 92
Key positions............................................. 80 glovebox............................................. 177
position/parking lamps......................... 90
inside.................................................. 176
rear fog lamp........................................ 96
tailgate................................................ 178
tunnel detection.................................... 92
L Long-term storage................................... 304
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 360
bulb holder, rear................................. 363
Labels...................................................... 395
cargo area........................................... 364
Laminated glass......................................... 23 dipped beam (cars with halogen head-
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 359 lamps)................................................. 361
Lane Departure Control................... 237, 238 direction indicators, front.................... 362
417

M misting Park Assist............................................... 242

attending to the windows................... 122 backward............................................ 243
Main/dipped beam, see Lighting............... 92 Misting fault indicator...................................... 245
Main beam, automatic activation.............. 93 condensation in headlamps............... 388 function............................................... 242
parking assistance sensors................ 245
maintenance Mood lighting............................................. 99
Rustproofing....................................... 390 Park assist camera.................................. 246
MY CAR................................................... 113
settings............................................... 248
Manual gearbox
GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 271 Parking brake........................................... 280
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 272 Parking on a hill....................................... 145

O
Max. roof load.......................................... 399 Passenger compartment filter................. 124
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 402, 404
12 Memory function in seat............................ 84 PCC – Personal Car Communicator
Oil level low.............................................. 354 functions............................................. 163
Menus
Output...................................................... 401 range........................................... 166, 171
Combined instrument panel............... 110
electric motor...................................... 402 Pedestrian detection................................ 223
menu overview.................................... 111
outside temperature gauge....................... 75 Personal Car Communicator................... 166
Messages................................................ 112
Information display............................. 111 Overheating............................................. 305 Pinch protection, sunroof........................ 110
Messages and symbols Owner's manual, ecolabelling.................... 23 Polishing.................................................. 389
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 211 Position/parking lamps.............................. 90
Collision Warning with Auto
Power seat................................................. 83
Brake.......................................... 222, 231 P
Driver Alert Control............................. 235 Power steering fluid
Lane Departure Warning..................... 240 PACOS....................................................... 36 grade................................................... 407
Messages in BLIS.................................... 253 Paintwork Power sunroof......................................... 109
Meters colour code......................................... 392 Power windows....................................... 103

fuel gauge............................................. 68 damage and touch-up........................ 392
Preconditioning
speedometer......................................... 68 Panel lighting............................................. 90 direct start.......................................... 138
tachometer........................................... 68 Panic function.......................................... 163 general................................................ 136
418

immediate stop................................... 139 Rearview and door mirrors Retractable power door mirrors............... 106
messages and symbols...................... 142 compass............................................. 107 Road sign information............................. 190
parking inside..................................... 137 door.................................................... 105 Limitations.......................................... 192
parking outside................................... 137 electrically retractable......................... 106 operation............................................. 190
timer............................................ 139, 140 heating................................................ 106
Roof load, max. weight............................ 399
Privacy locking......................................... 168 interior................................................. 107
Rustproofing............................................ 390
Protective grille........................................ 156 Rear window
heating................................................ 106
Protective net........................................... 155
Recommendations during driving............ 287
Recommended child seats
S
table...................................................... 46 Safety lock
Q children................................................. 45
12
Recovery.................................................. 313
Queue Assist............................................ 206 Safety mode.............................................. 43
Refrigerant............................................... 358
Queue Assistant....................................... 206 moving the car...................................... 44
Regeneration........................................... 293
start attempt......................................... 44
Relay/fuse box, see Fuses....................... 373
Sealing fluid............................................. 339
Remote control immobiliser..................... 162
R Seat, see Seats.......................................... 82
Remote control key................. 159, 160, 161
Radar sensor........................................... 200 Seatbelt...................................................... 29
battery replacement............................ 169
Limitations.................................. 207, 208 loosen................................................... 31
detachable key blade................. 166, 167
pregnancy............................................. 31
Rain sensor.............................................. 101 functions............................................. 163
putting on............................................. 30
loss..................................................... 159
Range rear seat................................................ 32
range........................................... 164, 171
during electric operation..................... 411 seatbelt reminder.................................. 32
Remote control key system, type appro- seatbelt tensioner................................. 32
Rear bulbs
val............................................................ 184
location............................................... 364 Seatbelt reminder...................................... 32
Resetting, trip meter................................ 117
Rear seat Seatbelt tensioner................................ 32, 42
Heating............................................... 129 Resetting the door mirrors....................... 105
Seats.......................................................... 82
Resetting the power windows................. 104 head restraints, rear.............................. 85
419

heating................................................ 129 Stability and traction control system 186, Symbols

Heating............................................... 129 188 indicator symbols........................... 70, 72
lowering the front backrest................... 83 operation............................................. 187 warning symbols................................... 70
lowering the rear backrest.................... 85 Stability system....................................... 186 Symbols and messages
power.................................................... 83 Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 211
Stains....................................................... 390
Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST)........ 331 Collision Warning with Auto
Start/Stop function.................................. 267
Sensus....................................................... 79 Brake.......................................... 222, 231
Steering force, speed related.................. 254 Driver Alert Control............................. 235
Service position....................................... 366
Steering force level, see Steering force... 254 Lane Departure Warning..................... 240
Service programme................................. 347
Steering lock............................................ 262 System
Set time interval....................................... 213 tripping.................................................. 42
Steering wheel........................................... 87
12 Side airbag SIPS.................................. 38, 42 heating.................................................. 88
SIPS airbag................................................ 38 keypad.................................................. 87
Skidding................................................... 287 steering wheel adjustment.................... 87 T
slippery driving conditions....................... 287 Stone chips and scratches...................... 392
Tailgate
Soot filter................................................. 293 Storage spaces Locking/unlocking.............................. 178
glovebox............................................. 149
SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 293 Temperature
tunnel console.................................... 149
spare wheel............................................. 321 actual temperature............................. 123
Storage spaces in the passenger com-
installation........................................... 324 Temperature control................................ 131
partment.................................................. 147
Speed limiter............................................ 193 Timer
Sunroof
alarm for speed exceeded.................. 195 deactivate........................................... 141
opening and closing........................... 109
deactivation........................................ 195 preconditioning................................... 139
pinch protection.................................. 110
getting started............................ 193, 194 setting................................................. 140
sunscreen........................................... 110
temporary deactivation....................... 194 start..................................................... 140
ventilation position.............................. 109
Speed ratings, tyres................................. 321 Tools........................................................ 317
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................. 110
Spin control............................................. 186 Total airing function......................... 122, 177
Switching off the engine.......................... 262
420

Towbar Trip computer.................. 114, 115, 119, 120 Tyres

detachable, attachment...................... 308 Trip meter.................................................. 75 direction of rotation............................ 315
detachable, removal........................... 309 maintenance....................................... 315
Trip meter, resetting................................ 117
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 307 pressure...................................... 325, 410
Trip statistics........................................... 268 puncture repair................................... 332
Towbar - detachable
Troubleshooting specifications...................................... 410
attachment/removal.................... 308, 309
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 210 tread depth......................................... 319
Towing..................................................... 312 tread wear indicators.......................... 317
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 186, 310
towing eye.......................................... 312 tyre pressure monitoring..... 327, 328, 329
Tunnel console........................................ 149
Towing bracket........................................ 307 winter tyres......................................... 319
12 V socket......................................... 150
specifications...................................... 307
cigarette lighter and ashtray............... 149
Towing capacity and towball load........... 400 12
Tunnel detection........................................ 92
Towing eye.............................................. 312
Type approval
U
TPMS - Tyre Pressure Monitoring.... 327, radar system....................................... 254 Unlocking
328, 329 remote control key system................. 184 from the inside.................................... 176
Traction control........................................ 186 tyre pressure monitoring..................... 340 from the outside................................. 175
Trailer....................................................... 305 Type designations................................... 395 Unlocking with the key blade................... 173
cable................................................... 305 Tyre dimension........................................ 320
driving with a trailer............................ 305
Tyre load index........................................ 320
snaking............................................... 310
Tyre pressure label.................................. 325 V
Trailer stability assist............................... 186
Tyre pressure monitoring......... 327, 328, 329 V60 PLUG-IN HYBRID
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 310
Adjust.................................................. 329 introduction........................................... 26
Transmission oil arming................................................. 330 overview................................................ 24
volume and grade............................... 406 deactivate........................................... 330 Vanity mirror...................................... 99, 150
Transponder.............................................. 18 driveable punctured tyres (SST)......... 331
Ventilation................................................ 126
Tread depth............................................. 319 low tyre pressure................................ 332
recommendations............................... 331 Vibration damper..................................... 307
Tread wear indicators.............................. 317
Volvo ID..................................................... 19
421

Volvo Sensus............................................. 79 Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 390 Wiper blades............................................ 366
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 390 changing............................................. 367
Cleaning.............................................. 368
Waxing..................................................... 389
replacing, rear window....................... 367
W Weights Service position.................................. 366
Warning lamp kerb weight......................................... 399
Wipers and washing................................ 101
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 200 Wheel bolts.............................................. 317
collision warning system.................... 227 lockable.............................................. 317
stability and traction control system.. 186 Wheel rim, dimensions............................ 319
Warning lamps Wheel rims
Airbags – SRS....................................... 73 cleaning.............................................. 389
12 Fault in brake system........................... 73
Wheels
Parking brake applied........................... 73
installation........................................... 324
seatbelt reminder............................ 32, 73
removal............................................... 321
starter battery not charging.................. 73
snow chains........................................ 319
Warning................................................ 73
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 40
Warning sound
collision warning system.................... 227 WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 41
Warning symbols................................. 70, 73
seating position.................................... 41
Warning triangle....................................... 326 whiplash protection........................ 40, 42
Washer fluid Windows, rearview and door mirrors....... 390
volume................................................ 407
Windscreen washing................................ 102
Washer fluid, filling................................... 368
Windscreen wiper.................................... 101
Washer nozzles, heated........................... 102 rain sensor.......................................... 101
Washers Winter driving........................................... 287
rear window........................................ 102
Winter tyres.............................................. 319
washer fluid, filling.............................. 368
windscreen......................................... 102
422

TP 17970 (English), AT 1420, MY15, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2014, Copyright © 2000-2014 Volvo Car Corporation

v60 Plugin Hybrid PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

v60 Plugin Hybrid PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

v60 Plugin Hybrid PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WEB EDITION

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

04 Climate control 05 Loading and storage

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

06 Locks and alarm

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

08 Starting and driving

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

09 Wheels and tyres

8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10 Maintenance and service

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11 Specifications 12 Alphabetical Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

note refers to text in a table then letters are

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Information When there is a series of illustrations for Related information 01

NOTE Position lists Related information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1 Applies to certain car models.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3. To change the input mode to numbers or Categories Navigating in an article 01

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

18 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The windscreen is equipped with a heat- Information on the Internet Volvo ID 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The owner's manual and the Laminated glass 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

01 Plug-in hybrid - overview

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine